IBM Printer 1800409 001A User Manual

®
QMS magicolor LX  
Printer User’s Guide  
1800409-001A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dear Customer,  
Mark Twain once said that only two things in life are certain: death and taxes.  
Well, if he were living today, we’re sure he’d add manuals to this list. Just about  
everything you buy is accompanied by a manual—and your new QMS printer is  
no exception. Now, we know that even though we’ve devoted our lives to writing  
manuals, very few people actually enjoy reading them. So we’ve written this  
manual with you in mind. However, there are more of you out there than there are  
printers, and you all need something different. Because of this, we’ve tried to  
design your manual to help you reach your destination as easily as possible:  
Table of Contents—Use this section as a road map to discover what there is to  
see in the manual and how the sections are related.  
Overview of the Documentation—This section functions as a Welcome Center.  
It’ll give you an idea about what’s in this city (your user’s guide) as well as in  
other nearby cities (other useful documentation).  
Overview of the Manual—As long as you’re at the Welcome Center, you  
probably wanta list of localattractions. This section lets you know which chapters  
you really shouldn’t miss and which you need to visit only if you have the time  
and interest, or a special purpose. It’s pretty much the same information as in the  
table of contents, but in a descriptive format.  
Headers, Footers, and Tab Dividers—Use these features as road signs to help  
you locate the section of the manual you want to visit.  
Index—While some people like to wander through a city, stopping wherever they  
find something interesting, others like to call ahead to make a reservation for a  
specific hotel or restaurant. OurBlue Pagesspeed you to the information you want  
quickly and without unnecessary detours. Easy on, easy off. We think you’ll find  
thebluecolorespeciallyusefulwhenyou havemorethanonemanualin thebinder.  
We hope you enjoy your new QMS printer (and traveling through its manuals,  
too!).  
Your QMS Technical Writer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Introduction  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
About This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Other Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Printer Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
Color Laser Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
Automatic Jam Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
Convenient Control Panel Operation. . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
PS Executive Series Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
PostScript Level 2 Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Resident HP PCL 5C and HP-GL Emulation . . . . 1-12  
39 Resident PostScript Fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
Chapter 2  
Initial Printer Setup  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Finding a Good Location for Your Printer. . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Location Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
What’s Included in the Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
QMS Product Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Unpacking the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Installing Developer and Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . 2-11  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Removing the Pressure-Release Pieces . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20  
Installing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle. . . . . . . . . 2-24  
Installing the Waste Toner Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30  
Installing the OPC Belt Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32  
Filling the Paper Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38  
Connecting the Power Cord. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43  
Using the Power Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44  
Installing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46  
Chapter 3  
Connecting the Printer  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
About Macintosh Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Making the Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Printing from the Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Installing the Printer Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Installing LaserWriter 8.x  
and the magicolor LX 4.1 PPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Installing Printer Description Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
PS Executive Series Printer Utility Software . . . . 3-13  
Installing a Color PostScript Printer Driver . . . . . 3-13  
Installing the Windows 3.1 Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Printer Description Files (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Testing Parallel Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Testing Serial Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19  
Checking Serial Communication Settings. . . . . . . 3-20  
i i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emulation Sensing Processing (ESP) Modes . . . . 3-23  
Chapter 4  
Printer Configuration  
Printer Configuration Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Configuration Method Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
The Function Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
The Main Menu Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
The Installation Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15  
Operator Control/Chain Inputbins. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Operator Control/Color Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Operator Control/Color Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Operator Control/Manual Feed Size . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
The Administration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20  
Administration/Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21  
Administration/Emulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
i i i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administration/Special Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
Header/Trailer Page Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56  
Header/Trailer Information Commands . . . . . . . . 4-56  
HP-PCL Emulation Features Commands . . . . . . . 4-57  
Lineprinter Emulation Features Commands . . . . . 4-57  
PostScript Emulation Features Commands . . . . . . 4-58  
Printer Features Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58  
Chapter 5  
Manual Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Printing Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Printing on Letterhead or Other Preprinted Media. . . . 5-8  
Printing on 3-Hole or Other Pre-punched Media. . . . . 5-8  
Printing on Thick Paper Stocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Page Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Media Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Media Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Collating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Configuring the Printer for Collation . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Changing Print Job Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
Adjusting Print Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17  
Cancelling a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17  
i v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending an End-of-Job Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17  
Diagnostic and Special Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19  
The Status Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20  
Chapter 6  
Handling Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Replacing a Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Replacing a Developer Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
Replacing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle. . . . . . 6-12  
Replacing the Waste Toner Pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
Moving the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18  
Removing and Replacing  
General Tips for Extending Printer Life . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Cleaning the Charger Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27  
Cleaning the Pre-Charger Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31  
Cleaning Register and Transfer Rollers . . . . . . . . 6-34  
Cleaning the Paper Exit Rollers and Plates. . . . . . 6-37  
Cleaning the Paper-Feed Roller  
and the Manual-Feed Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38  
Cleaning the Exterior of Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . 6-41  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Enabling QCOLOR for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Enabling QCOLOR for the Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Fine-Tuning Color Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Color Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Methods of Color Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Color Matching with a CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Color Matching with PostScript Level 2. . . . . . . . 7-14  
PANTONE®* Color Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
Chapter 8  
Printer Options  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Installing the Sheet Feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Using the Envelope Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
Font and Emulation Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
Using Font and Emulation Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
Security Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Using a Security Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Removing the Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18  
Replacing the Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20  
Single In-Line Memory Modules (SIMMs) . . . . . . . 8-22  
* Pantone, Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color and color reproduction materials.  
v i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using External Hard Disks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43  
Identifying External Hard Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45  
Formatting an External Hard Disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45  
Installing an Optional Card Font or Emulation. . . 8-47  
Formatting the Internal Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50  
Installing Print System Software and Fonts . . . . . . . . 8-51  
Chapter 9  
Troubleshooting  
Responding to Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Service Call Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Clearing Media Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Jam Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
Preventing Media Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
Preventing Envelope Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19  
Internal Hard Disk Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19  
Miscellaneous Problems: A Quick Check . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
IBM PC and Compatible Computer Checklist . . . 9-22  
Apple Macintosh Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
Mechanical Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24  
Control Panel Selections Don’t Take Effect . . . . . 9-24  
Data LED Stays Lit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24  
No Start-up Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24  
Printer Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25  
Printer Locks Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
Blank Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
Not All Pages Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
v i i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28  
Generally Poor Print Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28  
Specific Print Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28  
Placing a Service Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34  
Appendix A QMS Customer Support  
QMS Customer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
QMS National Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
QMS World-wide Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4  
Appendix B Technical Specifications  
Print Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Media Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
SIMMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
Warranty Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
How Electrostatic Discharge  
Affects Your Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
LocalTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11  
Macintosh to Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11  
Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12  
IBM PC/XT, PC/AT,  
and Compatible Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12  
Centronics Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13  
Notes to the Centronics Parallel  
Cable Pinouts Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14  
1284 Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15  
Dataproducts Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16  
v i i i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Notices  
FCC Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Canadian Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Vfg 1046/1984 Conformity Statement . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Bescheinigung des Herstellers/Importeurs . . . . . . . C-2  
Declaration of Manufacturer/Importer . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Electronics Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Proprietary Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Manual Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Colophon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
Appendix D Additional Technical Information  
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1  
How Your Printer Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1  
Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3  
The Memory Clients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4  
Frame Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
PostScript Heap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
Spool Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6  
Temporary Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7  
Disk Cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8  
MB Printer Mem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9  
System Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9  
Hard Disk Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9  
Spooling Overflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10  
PS Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10  
PS Protocol Menu for  
Optional Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12  
Advantages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13  
i x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13  
Updated DOCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14  
PCL 5 Emulation Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14  
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-14  
Font Index Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15  
Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15  
Resource. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-16  
Updated PCL 5 DOCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17  
Glossary  
Index  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Chapter highlights:  
About the documentation  
About your printer  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Introduction  
This chapter provides a brief overview of the printer, an  
explanation of the printer documentation, and an explanation of the  
printer’s main features and benefits.  
REMOTE  
SWITCH  
Fig. 1.1 The QMS magicolor LX  
The magicolor LX produces 300 or 600 dpi color or monochrome  
prints, using advanced color laser technology combined with the  
QMS Crown multitasking printer operating system. The magicolor  
LX prints in color at a rate of 3 to 6 pages per minute, and in  
monochrome at12pagesperminute.Itprints on plain orlaserpaper  
and on transparencies, envelopes, labels, and thick stock, and  
supports letter, legal, executive, andA4mediasizes.Italsofeatures  
an Energy Saver mode for reduced power consumption when not  
printing. The printer ships with either 12 or 24 MB of RAM. See  
“Printer Features,” later in this chapter, for a detailed list of your  
printer’s capabilities.  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
1 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
About This Manual  
This User’s Guide is organized in three parts, Installation (chapters  
1 through 3), Operation (chapters 4 through 6), and Reference (the  
rest of the manual). A tab for each of these sections was included  
with your manual: insert them at the beginning of the appropriate  
chapters to make it easier to navigate the manual.  
Installation  
Chapter 1: Introduction  
Gives an overview of the printer documentation and the  
printer’s major features; it also discusses the QMS Crown  
operating system and laser printing.  
Chapter 2: Initial Printer Setup  
Directs you in unpacking and installing the printer.  
Chapter 3: Connecting the Printer  
Discusses Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO) and  
Emulation Sensing Processor (ESP) mode, and explains  
how to connect the printer to a host through the LocalTalk,  
parallel, or serial port.  
Operation  
Chapter 4: Printer Configuration  
Describes control panel components and functions and  
tells how to use the Configuration menu to configure the  
printer to your printing requirements.  
Chapter 5: Print Media and Daily Operations  
Discusses print media sizes, loading, handling, and  
storage. It also covers operations such as printing  
1 - 2  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
envelopes, transparencies, thick stock, and labels,  
adjusting print density, and canceling or ending print jobs.  
Chapter 6: Consumables and Preventative Maintenance  
Guides you through handling and replacing consumables,  
such as the toner, developer, cleaning pad, oil bottle, OPC  
belt cartridge, and waste toner pack. It also covers moving  
and preventative maintenance for the printer.  
Reference  
Chapter 7: Optimizing Color Output  
Discusses QCOLOR, the QMS automatic color control  
technology, explains how to fine-tune color options,  
discusses color matching, and lists the printer’s typefaces.  
Chapter 8: Printer Options  
Describes installing and using optional printer hardware,  
such as font, emulation, and security cards; memory  
upgrades (SIMMs); hard disks; and network interface  
cards. Also explains how to upgrade the system software.  
Chapter 9: Troubleshooting  
Explains how to clear jams and interpret status messages;  
outlines possible print quality problems and solutions; and  
explains how to place a service call.  
Appendix A: QMS Customer Support  
Lists sources of help and information.  
Appendix B: Technical Specifications  
Provides technical specifications for the printer and lists  
available supplies and replacement parts. This appendix  
also gives the recommended pinouts for LocalTalk, serial,  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
1 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
IBM PC/XT, IBM PC/AT, and parallel (Centronics and  
Dataproducts) cables.  
Appendix C: Notices  
Presents legal, safety, and other notices.  
Appendix D: Additional Technical Information  
Provides information on how your printer works, and on  
customizing the printer’s memory allocation.  
Glossary  
Explains many of the terms used in the documentation.  
Optional Documentation  
The following optional manuals are available from your QMS  
vendor:  
QMS Crown Document Option Commands  
This document lists and explains Document Option  
Commands (DOCs). You insert these commands into  
documents or separator files to enable job-specific printer  
features (or special features that your application or page  
description language can’t access). In most cases, only  
advanced network users and system administrators need  
this information.  
QMS Crown Network Notes  
These notes provide tips for getting the best performance  
from your printer if it’s connected to a networkthrough the  
parallel or serial port. In most cases, only advanced  
network users and system administrators need this  
information. This manual is contained on a disk. The  
README file on the disk explains how to access the  
manual.  
1 - 4  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference  
This document covers the HP PCL 5 emulation. In most  
cases, only advanced PCL 5 users and system  
administrators need this information.  
QMS Crown Technical Reference  
This document provides advanced technical information,  
including information on communication protocols,  
HP-GL emulation, HP PCL emulation, CCITT, and  
PostScript emulation. In most cases, only advanced users  
and system administrators need this information. This  
manual is contained on a disk. The README file on the  
disk explains how to access the manual.  
Other Documentation  
Other sources of information you may find helpful are  
HP PCL 5C Technical Support Notes  
These notes cover the HP PCL 5C color commands. They  
are available free through CompuServe, the QMS bulletin  
board, and Q-FAX. Appendix A, “QMS Customer  
Support,” of this document explains how to use these  
services.  
Printer Option Documentation  
If you purchased a printer option (for example, a direct  
network interface card), you may have received separate  
documentation for it. Check chapter 8, “Printer Options,”  
of this manual for additional option information.  
Electronic Information  
CompuServe, the Internet, our bulletin board, and Q-FAX  
are all sources of information from QMS. Appendix A,  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
1 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
“QMS Customer Support,” of this manual explains how to  
use these sources.  
Don’t forget that the documentation for your application, operating  
system,andnetworkprobablycontainsuseful printinginformation.  
Typographic Conventions  
Mixed-Case Text you type, and messages and information  
Courier  
displayed on the computer monitor  
Mixed-Case Variable text you type; replace the italicized word(s)  
Italic  
Courier  
with informationspecifictoyour printerorworkstation  
UPPERCASE  
COURIER  
Information displayed in the printer message window  
lowercase bold PostScript operators  
lowercase italic Variable information in text and PostScript variables  
UPPERCASE File and utility names  
Press the Enter key (PC) or Return key (Macintosh)  
^X  
Press and hold down the Ctrl key (PC) while you type  
the following letter.  
NOTE: Notes contain tips, extra information, or important  
information that deserves emphasis or reiteration.  
CAUTION: Cautions present information that you need to know  
to avoid equipment damage or extreme annoyance.  
WARNING!  
Warnings indicate the possibility of personal in-  
jury if a procedure is not performed exactly as described in the  
manual.  
1 - 6  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1  
ACHTUNG!  
Bitte halten Sie sich exakt an die im Handbuch  
beschriebene Vorgehensweise, da sonst Verletzungsgefahr  
bestehen könnte.  
Printer Features  
The following overview acquaints you with the printer’s major  
features and their benefits. Consult the table of contents or index  
(blue pages) of this manual to find more information on the  
features.  
Color Laser Technology  
The magicolor LX laser printer features advanced color-laser  
technology that allows it to produce inexpensive, durable, 300 or  
600 dpi prints on plain paper or transparencies, at 3 to 6 color pages  
and 12 monochrome pages per minute.  
QCOLOR Technology  
The magicolor LX laser printer features QCOLOR,  
a
QMS-developed technology for automatically optimizing color  
printing, for Windows and Macintosh applications. When enabled,  
QCOLOR configures the magicolor LX for the best output quality  
based on the contents of the document (for example, text, line art,  
presentation graphics, photographs, or scans).  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
1 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 1  
The magicolor LX printer also supports device-independent color,  
either directly or through a color management system, such as  
Apple’s ColorSync and Pantone’s POCE. This printer also  
supports the PANTONE®* MATCHING SYSTEM, the standard  
model for color reproduction in graphic arts and publishing, to help  
you see the most accurate PANTONE Color simulations for  
proofing. Chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output,” contains more  
information on QMS Automatic Color Control and color  
management systems.  
Multiple Resolutions  
If you purchased a printer with 12 MB RAM, you can print color  
or monochrome documents in 300 dpi or monochrome documents  
in 600 dpi. You can print color and monochrome documents in 600  
dpi if you install additional RAM in the printer. The magicolor LX  
ships with either12or 24 MB of RAM. See appendix B,Technical  
Specifications,” for specific information on RAM requirements  
and color resolution.  
Software Loadable System (SLS)  
Your printer has a software loadable system, SLS, which allows  
you to replace or upgrade its system software from a host. Future  
enhancements to the system software can be easily installed as they  
become available from QMS.  
* Pantone, Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color and color reproduction materials.  
1 - 8  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
Energy Saver Mode  
The magicolor LX printer’s Energy Saver option allows it to  
automatically enter a lower-power state after no print jobs have  
been received for a certain length of time (which you define). The  
Energy Star version of the magicolor LX printer (look for an  
Energy Star labelontheback of  
the printer) is compliant with  
US Environmental Protection  
Agency (EPA) Energy Star  
regulations. The EPA Energy  
Star Computers program  
promotes the use of  
energy-efficient personal computers, monitors,andprintersandthe  
reduction of air pollution caused by power generation. See  
“Administration/Engine/Energy Saver ” in chapter 4, “Printer  
Configuration,” for information on Energy Saver options.  
NOTE: The addition of some optional interfaces, in some  
combinations, may cause the product to become  
non-Energy Star compliant.  
QMS Crown Operating System  
Your printer features the QMS Crown multitasking printer  
operating system. Some of its features are  
Multitasking  
The printer receives, compiles, processes, and prints  
simultaneously, so jobs are printed more quickly and the  
host is free sooner.  
Simultaneous Interface Operation  
All interfaces are active at the same time, buffering and  
processing data until pages can be printed, which increases  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
1 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
throughput. (Each input buffer can be expanded with  
optional memory.)  
Emulation Sensing Processor Technology  
When in ESP mode (selectable through PS Executive  
Series Utilities or the control panel), the printer analyzes  
incoming data and selects the appropriate printer language  
from those available, so users don’t have to set switches or  
send commands to use different printer emulations. ESP  
mode works with most popular commercially available  
applications.  
Context Switching  
After initial use, the state of an emulation and downloaded  
data (fonts, macros, overlays) is preserved for as long as  
the printer power is on, so repetitive downloading is  
unnecessary.  
Compile-ahead Processing  
Pages are compiled into intermediate, compressed blocks  
of data that can be immediately and more easily rasterized  
or more efficiently stored for concurrent compiling,  
rasterizing, and printing. This allows the printer to  
maintain full print speed under maximum job activity.  
User-configurable Input Buffers  
Printer memory can be configured to enable the most  
efficient spooling for a particular environment. Chapter 4,  
“Printer Configuration,” contains more information on  
printer memory.  
Spooling Overflow  
Data is spooled transparently to the internal hard disk, so  
input buffers aren’t limited to RAM capacity.  
Compressed Data Format  
1 - 1 0  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1  
Data is compressed so that entire documents can be stored  
in theprinter, allowingusersto take advantageofadvanced  
document handling features such as jam recovery without  
resending files.  
Media Flexibility  
With this printer, you can print on plain paper,laser paper,  
transparencies, labels, envelopes, and thick stock in letter, A4,  
executive, and legal sizes. Plain paper, economical and widely  
available, is the ideal choice when adding spot color to reports,  
newsletters, and other documents. Laser paper, such as  
Hammermill’s Laser Print, allows the richest color output and most  
consistent coverage (especially for large areas) for the highest  
quality documents or prepress proofs. See chapter 5, “Print Media  
and Daily Operations,” for detailed information on different media  
types.  
Automatic Jam Recovery  
The printer has jam recovery, so that after a jam is removed, the  
printer automatically reprints the jammed page(s) and finishes the  
job.  
Convenient Control Panel Operation  
The keypad and message window on the control panel allow easy  
access to the Configuration menu, through which you can change  
printer defaults to suit your needs. The message window and the  
LEDsindicateprinter status. Messagescan be displayedinEnglish,  
French, Spanish, or German. An optional security card allows  
access through the printer control panel to be password protected,  
so that only users who know the password can change printer  
configuration.  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
1 - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
PS Executive Series Utilities  
Once you install this software on your host, use its menus to access  
printer features, such as printer naming and font and emulation  
downloading. PS Exec also contains sample files that illustrate  
some of your printer’s capabilities. The PS Exec software is  
accompanied by Macintosh screen fonts and a PC screen printing  
utility. You can also load new system software through PS Exec.  
A README file explains how to install PS Executive Series  
Utilities, and its online help explains how to use the utilities.  
PostScript Level 2 Compatibility  
The printer’s Level 2 emulation is fully compatible with Adobe’s  
PostScript Level 2 page description language, whose features  
include device-independent color, improved memory and resource  
management, data compression/decompression filters, and pattern  
and form caching. Full support (selectable through PS Executive  
Series Utilities or the control panel) for PostScript Level 1 files is  
also included in this printer.  
Resident HP PCL 5C and HP-GL Emulation  
Your printer emulates the HP PaintJet XL300 PCL 5C printer. This  
emulation supports the complete set of color commands in the  
XL300, 13 outline typefaces, and 7 PCL Courier and Lineprinter  
bitmap fonts (see “The Resident HP PCL Fonts” in chapter 7,  
“Optimizing Color Output,” for a font list). It also supports  
HP-GL/2 vector graphics. This printer also emulates the following  
HP-GL plotters: 7550A, 7470A, 7475A, and ColorPro.  
Intel RISC-based Controller  
A 33 MHz Intel 80960CF RISC microprocessor boosts processing  
speed.  
1 - 1 2  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 1  
39 Resident PostScript Fonts  
Your printer comes with 39 licensed PostScript fonts. All these  
fonts have multilingual character sets. See “The Resident  
PostScript Fonts” in chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output,” for a  
list.  
Printer Options  
Full-color 600 dpi printing in all supported page sizes  
If you upgrade to 28 MB RAM or more, you can print  
four-color documents in all supported page sizes in 600  
dpi. See appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” for  
specific information on RAM requirements and color  
resolution.  
User-upgradable RAM (Random Access Memory)  
The resident RAM is user-upgradable to as much as 64  
MB, which allows your printer’s capacities to grow with  
your needs. Additional RAM expands printing capabilities  
and can improve system performance.  
Font and Emulation Cards  
Fonts and printer emulations are containedonsmall printer  
circuit boards called cards, which can be plugged into slots  
on the front of the printer. Contact your QMS vendor for  
a complete list of available cards.  
Direct Network Interface for Ethernet or Token-Ring  
A direct network interface is available for DECnet,  
EtherTalk, LAN Manager/LAN Server, Novell NetWare,  
TCP/IP, and EtherTalk on Ethernet networks, as well as  
LAN Manager/LAN Server, Novell NetWare, and TCP/IP  
on Token-Ring networks.  
Hard disk expandability  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
1 - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 1  
Your printer comes standard with an upgradable 80 MB  
internal hard disk. Also, through the resident 25-pin SCSI  
connector port, the printer’s capabilities can be expanded  
with up to six external hard disks. A hard disk provides  
storage for a cache of character bitmaps, downloaded  
outline fonts, and other files.  
250-sheet Optional Sheet Feeder  
The cassette in the optional sheet feeder can hold up to 250  
sheets, which allows you to spend less time refilling  
cassettes and to use different types of media more  
conveniently (for example, you could load transparencies  
in the standard cassette and plain paper in the  
sheet-feeder’s cassette.)  
Envelope Cassette  
You can purchase an envelope cassette from your QMS  
vendor. This cassette holds up to 30 DL or Com 10  
envelopes and fits in the standard or optional  
media-cassette slot.  
1 - 1 4  
I n t r o d u c t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Printer Setup  
Chapter highlights:  
Finding a good location for your printer  
Unpacking your printer  
Installing the developer and toner  
Installingthecleaningpad,oil,bottle,and wastetonerpack  
Installing OPC belt cartridge and paper cassette  
Printing a start-up page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Introduction  
This chapter explains how to set up the printer for the first time.  
For quick information on replacing print media, developer, and  
toner after the initial setup, see chapters 5 and 6, “Print Media and  
Daily Operations,” and “Consumables and Preventative  
Maintenance.”  
NOTE: We recommend that you have the printer set up by a  
QMS-authorized technician. The instructions in this  
chapter are provided for people experienced in working  
with printers, but must be followed carefully to avoid  
damage to the printer. QMS reserves the right to charge  
for repairs necessitated by improper installation. See  
appendix B, “QMS Customer Support,” for information  
on contacting QMS.  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
Finding a Good Location for Your Printer  
Location Requirements  
Your printer should located  
On a hard, level surface (maximum 1° slant) capable of  
supporting the printer weight (approximately 106 lbs/48  
kg).  
Away from cooling sources, heating sources, extreme  
temperature changes, direct sunlight, excessive dust, and  
corrosive chemicals or vapors.  
Away from any strong electromagnetic field (such as that  
created by an air conditioner) and excessive vibration.  
In an area with a moderate temperature (64° to 81° F; 18°  
to 27° C).  
In an area with a relative humidity of 60% to 70%.  
An appropriate distance from the host: less than 6 feet (1.8  
meters) for parallel communication, less than 25 feet (7.5  
meters) for serial communication.  
Near an electrical outlet.  
2 - 2  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2  
With proper clearance and ventilation area: left side 36"  
(90 cm), right side 4" (10 cm), front 28" (70 cm), rear 16"  
(40 cm).  
With enough space foryou toopentheprinter andtoaccess  
the paper cassette(s). Figure 2.1 illustrates the proper  
clearance for your printer.  
Fig. 2.1 Printer Clearance  
Power Requirements  
Your printer requires a properly grounded (earth connection) 120  
volt (±12 volts) outlet. The required frequency is 60 Hz (±2 Hz).  
The electrical connection should be direct, not via a branched  
socket, and should be surge-protected. Noise-generating  
equipment shouldn’t be connected to the same electrical outlet as  
the printer.  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
What’s Included in the Shipment  
In addition to this manual, your shipment should contain the  
following items:  
QMS magicolor LX printer  
OPC belt cartridge  
4 developer cartridges (1 each yellow, magenta, cyan,  
black)  
4 toner cartridges (1 each yellow, magenta, cyan, black)  
Cleaning pad  
Oil bottle  
Waste toner pack  
Power cord  
PS Executive Series Utilities disks  
Softload system back-up disks (includes printer system  
software and PostScript fonts on DOS and Macintosh  
disks, and PCL fonts on a DOS disk).  
Interfacecablesaren’tincluded withtheprinter.ContactyourQMS  
vendor if you need cables. See chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer,”  
for information on cables, and appendix B, “Technical  
Specifications,” for cable pinouts. If you find any part of the  
shipment missing or damaged, contact the shipping company or  
your QMS vendor immediately. Don’t return any merchandise to  
the manufacturer without authorization.  
2 - 4  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
QMS Product Registration  
Register your QMS product now. In the US, call (800) 637-8049  
to register. In other countries, see appendix A, “QMS Customer  
Support,” for the appropriate number.  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
Unpacking the Printer  
The packingmaterials thatprotecttheprinter duringshipment must  
be removed. You might want to save the packing materials in case  
you ever have to move or ship the printer.  
CAUTION: You may damage the printer if you turn it on before  
all packing materials are removed.  
WARNING!  
The printer weighs approximately 106 lbs(48 kg)  
without consumables. Do not attempt to lift it by yourself.  
ACHTUNG!  
Der Drucker hatein Gewicht von ungefähr48kg.  
Bitte versuchen Sie niemals, den Drucker alleine anzuheben  
oder zu transportieren.  
1. Remove everything except the printer from the shipping  
carton (fig. 2.2).  
2. With the assistance of another person, grasp the printer by the  
four ridged finger grips (two on each side of the printer) and  
lift it out of the carton and remove the plastic wrap (fig. 2.2).  
2 - 6  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
Fig. 2.2 Unpacking the Printer  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
3. Before you begin setup, take a few minutes to look over  
figures 2.3 and 2.4. They provide a quick overview of the  
exterior parts of your printer.  
2 - 8  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Fig. 2.3 Front View of the Printer  
Fig. 2.4 Back View of the Printer  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
4. Remove the two polystyrene inserts from the top cover of the  
printer.  
5. Remove all packing tape from the exterior of the printer.  
6. Grasp the front end of the top cover and lift it up to remove it  
(fig. 2.5). Then, set the cover aside for now.  
Fig. 2.5 Remove the Top Cover (front view)  
7. Remove the two polystyrene shipping spacers from inside the  
printer.  
2 - 1 0  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Installing Developer and Toner Cartridges  
When you load developer and toner cartridges, the colors must be  
in a set order from the back of the printer to the front. Black should  
be loaded in the slot closest to the rear of the printer, followed by  
cyan, then magenta, and finally yellow in the front slot.  
BK  
C
M
Y
Fig. 2.6 Cartridge Loading Order (front view)  
WARNING!  
The developer and toner are highly combustible  
powders; never burn them. Also, avoid inhaling loose devel-  
oper or toner or getting them around your eyes; they can cause  
respiratory problems and eye irritation.  
ACHTUNG!  
Bei Entwickler und Toner handelt es sich um  
gefährliche Pulver, die leicht entzündlich sind; sie dürfen  
deshalb niemals mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen.  
Einatmen oder Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls  
zu vermeiden, da dieses zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege,  
Haut oder Augenreizungen führen könnte.  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
CAUTION: The same color developer and toner cartridges must  
always be loaded in the same place on the printer. To prevent  
accidental mixing of colors, each toner cartridge has pins that are  
keyedto fit only the developer cartridgeof the corresponding color.  
Never force a toner cartridge onto the wrong developer cartridge.  
This can damage the cartridges and the printer.  
NOTE: A developer cartridge must be installed before the toner  
cartridge of the same color.  
1. Remove the developer cartridge from its protective bag,  
starting with theblackcartridge.(The developer cartridgesare  
color-coded on their tops.)  
2 - 1 2  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
2. Grasp the two green latches, one at each end of the cartridge,  
and raise them straight up (fig. 2.7) to open them.  
3. Holding the developer cartridge by the green latches, gently  
lower it into the open cartridge slot closest to the back end of  
the printer until it seats firmly under the securing latches (fig.  
2.7).  
Fig. 2.7 Load Developer Cartridge (front view)  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
4. Close the green latches by pushing them forward and down to  
hold the developer cartridge in place (fig. 2.8).  
Fig. 2.8 Close Latches (rear view)  
2 - 1 4  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
5. Grasp the tab on the top of the developer cartridge. Pull the  
tab and attached clear tape straight up and out of the cartridge,  
making sure the tape comes completely out (fig. 2.9). Then,  
discard the tab and tape.  
Fig. 2.9 Remove Sealing Tape (rear view)  
6. Locate the toner cartridge that matches the color of the  
developer cartridge just installed, and remove it from its  
protective bag. (Toner cartridges are color-coded—black,  
cyan, magenta, or yellow—on the top.)  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
7. Hold the toner cartridge as shown in figure 2.10, and shake it  
horizontally. This distributes toner evenly inside the cartridge  
and helps assure quality printing.  
Fig. 2.10 Distribute Toner in Cartridge  
2 - 1 6  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
8. Hold and squeeze the toner cartridge across the center (fig.  
2.11), and align it with the developer cartridge of the same  
color. Make sure the pins on the back side of the toner  
cartridge line up with the notches on the developer cartridge.  
CAUTION: Neverforcea tonercartridgeonto thewrongdeveloper  
cartridge. Not only will this damage the cartridges, but also the  
pressure can damage the printer.  
9. Lower the toner cartridge until it fits firmly onto the notches  
on the developer cartridge (fig. 2.11).  
Fig. 2.11 Align Cartridges (rear view)  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
10. Press the top of the toner cartridge until the cartridge latches  
securely in place.  
11. Grasp the tab on the top of the toner cartridge.  
12. Hold the toner cartridge in place with one hand as you pull the  
tab and attached clear tape straight up and completely out of  
the cartridge (fig. 2.12) using the other hand. Then discard the  
tab and tape.  
Fig. 2.12 Remove Sealing Tape (rear view)  
13. Repeat steps 1-12 to load the cyan, then the magenta, and  
finally the yellow developer and toner cartridges, making sure  
each toner cartridge is loaded onto the corresponding  
developer cartridge.  
2 - 1 8  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
When you finish, the black cartridges should be in the last slot  
toward the back of the printer, then the cyan in the next slot, the  
magenta in the third slot coming forward, and the yellow in the  
front slot.  
After the toner and developer are installed, you need to remove the  
pressure-release pieces.  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Removing the Pressure-Release Pieces  
Twopressure-release pieceshelprelievetensiononthefuserrollers  
to protect the rollers from accidental damage during shipment.  
These pieces must be removed before printing. Use the following  
procedure to remove these pieces:  
1. With the top cover still off, pull up on the paper exit unit latch  
and then tilt the unit back and down to open it (fig. 2.13).  
Fig. 2.13 Open the Paper Exit Unit (rear view)  
2. Pull back the two latches (one on each side) of the separator  
pawl unit to unlock it. Then, tilt the pawl unit back in the  
direction of paper exit unit atthe backof the printer (fig. 2.14).  
2 - 2 0  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
Fig. 2.14 Open Separator Pawl Unit (front view)  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
3. Open the pressure-release lever on the end of the fuser unit  
(fig. 2.15).  
Fig. 2.15 Open the Lever (rear view)  
2 - 2 2  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
4. Grasp the tab end of one of the green pressure-release pieces  
and gently pull it up and out of the printer (fig. 2.16). Remove  
thepieceattheotherendofthefuserroller inthesamemanner.  
Fig. 2.16 Remove Both Pieces (front view)  
5. Store the two pressure-release pieces in a safe place.  
NOTE: You need to reinstall both pieces if you move the  
printer farther than just across a table or from one side of a  
room to another—especially if the printer may not remain  
level or may be jostled. See “Moving your Printer” in chapter  
6 for details on replacing these pieces. Also, reinstall both  
pieces if the printer will not be used for 2 weeks or more.  
6. Close the pressure-release lever on the end of the fuser unit.  
Once the pressure-release pieces are removed, you need to install  
the cleaning pad and oil bottle.  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Installing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle  
The cleaning pad removes printing debris (such as excess toner and  
paper dust) from the fusing unit. The oil keeps toner from sticking  
to the fuser rollers. Instructions for installing the cleaning pad and  
oil bottle are given in this section. Replacing the cleaning pad and  
oil bottle are covered in chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative  
Maintenance.”  
To install the cleaning pad and oil bottle  
1. Remove the cleaning pad and oil bottle from their protective  
bags.  
2 - 2 4  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
2. Holding the cleaning pad by its center tab, align the center of  
the tab with the triangle mark on the printer (tab-side away  
from the triangle) (fig. 2.17).  
3. Slide the pad into the slot above the heat roller (fig. 2.17). The  
pad is correctly positioned when it is centered snugly in the  
slot.  
Fig. 2.17 Install the Cleaning Pad (front view)  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 2 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
4. Snap the separator pawl unit closed (fig. 2.18).  
Fig. 2.18 Close Separator Pawl Unit (front view)  
2 - 2 6  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
5. Pull open the spring latch on the outer edge of the oil bottle  
retainer, and lift the retainer up and toward the center of the  
printer (fig. 2.19).  
NOTE: The spout of the oil bottle has a seal to prevent oil  
from spilling until the bottle is installed on the pin in the fuser  
slot.  
6. Hold the bottle, spout end down with the label facing the  
printer’s front, over the slot in the top of the fuser unit (fig.  
2.19).  
7. Lower the bottle into place, making sure the spout on the  
bottom of the bottle aligns with the pin in the fuser slot. The  
bottle is positioned correctly when it fits snugly in the slot and  
is flush with the top of the fuser unit.  
Fig. 2.19 Install the Oil Bottle (rear view)  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 2 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
8. Close the oil bottle retainer, making sure the latch snaps back  
in place.  
9. Close the paper exit unit (fig. 2.20).  
Fig. 2.20 Close the Paper Exit Unit (rear view)  
2 - 2 8  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
10. Replace the top cover (fig. 2.21).  
Fig. 2.21 Replace the Top Cover (front view)  
Now install the waste toner pack. The next section covers this  
process.  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Installing the Waste Toner Pack  
NOTE: For information on replacing a used waste toner pack, see  
chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative  
Maintenance.”  
To install the waste toner pack  
1. Remove the waste toner pack from its protective bag.  
2. Follow the instructions accompanying the pack for  
assembling it, being careful not to puncture the bag.  
3. Open the waste toner door by pushing the cover on the  
top-right corner (fig. 2.22).  
Fig. 2.22 Open the Waste Toner Door (side view)  
2 - 3 0  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
4. Holding the waste toner pack by the side tab, insert the pack  
into the printer until it fits securely (fig. 2.23). Then, lift up  
slightly on the tab to be sure the pack is level and centered.  
Fig. 2.23 Insert the Waste Toner Pack in the Printer  
5. Close the waste toner door.  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Installing the OPC Belt Cartridge  
This section covers installing the OPC (Organic Photoconductor)  
belt cartridge into your printer. See “How Your Printer Works” in  
appendix D for details on the role the OPC belt plays in printing.  
Replacing the cartridge is covered in chapter 6, “Consumables and  
Preventative Maintenance.”  
To install the OPC cartridge  
1. Open the manual feed tray (fig. 2.24) by pushing the top-right  
corner to release the spring latch.  
Fig. 2.24 Open the Manual Feed Tray  
2 - 3 2  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
CAUTION: The OPC belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights  
and direct sunlight. Do not remove the cartridge from its protective  
bag until you are ready to install it. Limit exposure to light of 800  
lux (the average fluorescent lighting in an office) to under 2  
minutes. If exposure exceeds this, put the belt into a dark place,  
like inside the printer, to recover; depending on exposure, recovery  
may take up to 2 hours.  
Also, handle the belt cartridge carefully. The belt is extremely  
sensitive to hand oils and scratches, both of which will reduce print  
quality.  
2. Remove the OPC belt cartridge from its protective bag.  
NOTE: Besuretosavethe protective bagto useduringprinter  
cleaning and maintenance when the OPC belt cartridge is out  
of the printer.  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
3. Remove the pressure release and tension release pin sets (one  
set on the left and one on theright)fromtheOPC beltcartridge  
(fig. 2.25).  
NOTE: The pressure release and tension release pins protect  
the belt and its cleaning blade by relieving tension during  
shipment. Save these pins to reinstall them if you need to ship  
the printer later.  
Fig. 2.25 Remove the Release Pins  
2 - 3 4  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
4. Make sure the green handle on the end of the OPC belt  
cartridge is turned up (unlocked).  
5. Slide the cartridge three-quarters of the way into the printer  
until the notches on each side of the bottom rest on the lip of  
the manual feed tray (fig. 2.26).  
Fig. 2.26 Slide Cartridge Partially into Printer  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 3 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
6. Remove the black light-shield paper from the OPC belt by  
pulling the tab on the front as shown in figure 2.27 and pulling  
the paper straight out of the printer.  
NOTE: If the light-shield paper doesn’t slide out easily or if  
it should begin to tear, pull the OPC belt cartridge a little  
farther out of the printer and try again.  
Fig. 2.27 Remove the Light-Shield Paper  
2 - 3 6  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
7. Firmly slide the cartridge the rest of the way into the printer  
until it snaps into place. It is in place when you can see the  
green arrows inside the metal frame of the printer.  
8. Turn the green end-handle on the cartridge down to close it  
and lock the cartridge in place.  
9. Close the manual feed tray (fig. 2.28).  
Fig. 2.28 Close the Manual Feed Tray  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 3 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Filling the Paper Cassette  
Instructions are given here for loading and printing on letter- or  
A4-size paper. Chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily Operations,” has  
instructions for refilling the cassette, for printing on other media  
types and sizes, and for inserting media manually. Chapter 5 also  
contains information about margins and imageable areas.  
1. Pull the paper cassette out of the printer (fig. 2.29).  
Fig. 2.29 Remove the Paper Cassette  
2 - 3 8  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2  
2. Make sure the size key slide on the back end of the cassette is  
set for letter- or A4-size media (fig. 2.30).  
NOTE: The printer comes from thefactory configured to print  
on letter- or A4-size media. If you want to print on a different  
size media, see “Refilling the Media Cassette” in chapter 5 for  
information. Also, see chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for  
information on setting size through the control panel.  
EX LT A4 LG  
Fig. 2.30 Check the Cassette Size Key Slide  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 3 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
3. Fromthe paper wrapping, determine which is the printing side  
of the paper (an arrow points in the direction of the printing  
side on most wrappers). Then remove a stack of paper  
approximately 1"/27 mm (250 sheets) or less.  
NOTE: Make sure the paper is in good condition, free of such  
things as folds, tears, or wrinkles.  
4. Fan the paper (fig. 2.31) to prevent the sheets from sticking  
together. Align the edges of the stack on a flat surface.  
Fig. 2.31 Fan the Paper  
2 - 4 0  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
5. Load the paper printing-side up in the cassette, top end first  
for letterhead or preprinted media. (Printing onthe wrong side  
may reduce print quality.) Make sure the paper lies flat and  
does not exceed the upper-limit mark on the cassette for foil  
(transparencies) or paper (fig. 2.32). Overloading the cassette  
can cause a jam.  
Paper  
Foil  
Fig. 2.32 Load the Paper  
6. Adjust the paper guides on each side and on the trailing edge  
of the media so that they rest lightly against the media without  
causing it to buckle.  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 4 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
7. Slide the filled cassette into the printer (fig. 2.33) until it snaps  
firmly into place and is flush with the front of the printer.  
Fig. 2.33 Slide the Cassette into the Printer  
2 - 4 2  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Starting the Printer  
After you have unpacked the printer and installed the consumables,  
you need to connect the power cord and turn on the two power  
switches.  
Connecting the Power Cord  
The power connector is on the back of the printer on the lower-left  
side.  
CAUTION: Make sure that the main power switch on the back of  
the printer is off (the O is pressed down). Make sure the remote  
power switch on the front is off (the button is out).  
1. Connect one end of the power cord to the rear of the printer  
(fig. 2.34).  
Fig. 2.34 Connect the Power Cord  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 4 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 2  
2. Connect the opposite end of the power cord to a grounded,  
surge-protected, electrical outlet.  
Using the Power Switches  
There are two power switches on your printer, a main switch on  
the rear and a remote switch (for convenience) on the front. Only  
one switch has to be off to turn off the printer; however, both  
switches must be on to turn on the printer. Turn on the back switch  
by setting it to the on (|) position. Turn on the front switch by  
pressing it in.  
CAUTION: If the printer won’t be used for several days (such as  
over a weekend), or if any maintenance work is done, make sure  
at least one of the power switches is off. This reduces wear and  
extends the life of the fuser.  
When first turned on, the printer goes through an initialization  
warm-up and self-testing period of approximately 4 minutes. Close  
to the end of this process, the printer produces a start-up page (see  
the next section for information on the start-up page). When  
warm-up is complete, IDLEdisplays in the message window.  
NOTE: If the start-up page does not print, see chapter 9,  
“Troubleshooting.” Make sure you wait long enough for  
the initialization process to finish.  
The Start-up Page  
When you initially turn on your printer, a start-up page prints in  
approximately 4 minutes. This page gives basic information about  
the printer, such as the printer’s name, the PostScript emulation  
level and version, and various printer settings. For a detailed list of  
2 - 4 4  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 2  
what the start-up page includes, see “The Start-Up Page” in chapter  
5.  
If thestart-up pageprints,andtheprintquality is good,gotochapter  
3, “Connecting the Printer.”  
Otherwise, see chapter 9, “Troubleshooting,” for more  
information, and be aware of the following warning.  
WARNING!  
Be sure to turn the printer off (both switches),  
and then unplug it before checking your installation.  
ACHTUNG!  
Bitte schalten Sie unbedingt den Drucker aus  
und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker heraus bevor Sie die korrekte  
Installation des Druckers überprüfen.  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
2 - 4 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2  
Installing Options  
If you purchased any printer options, such as extra memory or  
emulations, install these now. If installation instructions are  
included with the option, follow those, and be sure to check for  
additional instructions in chapter 8, “Printer Options.” Then return  
to chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer,” to finish setting up your  
printer.  
2 - 4 6  
I n i t i a l P r i n t e r S e t u p  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting the Printer  
Chapter highlights:  
Connecting to a network  
Connecting to a Macintosh  
Connecting to a PC  
About printer communication modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Introduction  
This chapter explains how to connect your printer to a host  
computer after you have set it up according to the instructions in  
the previous chapter, “Initial Printer Setup.”  
Connecting to a Network  
If you’ve purchased a network interface for your printer, see  
chapter 8, “Printer Options,” for installation information, and see  
your network and your interface kit documentation for further  
details.  
About Macintosh Networks  
If you’re connecting to a print network such as TOPS or  
AppleShare using LocalTalk-type connectors and boxes, see your  
Macintosh and network documentation for details specific to your  
setup.  
All Macintosh users on a network must use the same version of  
LaserWriter to run correctly. For example, if the network has a  
mixture of LaserWriter 7.0 and 8.x, it will experience frequent  
reinitialization problems. Also, to get color output, you must use  
LaserWriter and Laser Prep 6.0 or higher. (System 6 users must  
also all have the same version of Laser Prep unless they’re using  
LaserWriter 6.1 or higher.) Check the version number by selecting  
the LaserWriter icon, then holding down the Command key while  
pressing the letter I. The driver version number appears in the Info  
window.  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3  
Connecting to a Macintosh  
What You Need  
To connect your printer to a single Macintosh, you need the items  
shown in the illustration below:  
Two PhoneNET-type transformer boxes  
You need one with a DIN-8 connector for the printer port  
and one with the connector required by your Macintosh  
(usually a DIN-8).  
RJ11 (telephone) cable  
Terminating resistors—probably two  
If you’re replacing a printer already connected to a Macintosh, you  
probably already have this equipment.  
Fig. 3.1 Macintosh-Printer Interface Cables and Port  
3 - 2  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 3  
NOTE: If you’re connecting more than one Macintosh to the  
printer, in an AppleTalk network, see your PhoneNET  
and Macintosh documentation for information.  
Making the Connection  
CAUTION: Turn off both the printer and the Macintosh before  
making the connection.  
1. Plug the connector from one transformer box into the printer’s  
LocalTalk port.  
2. Plug the connector from the other transformer box into the  
Macintosh.  
3. Connect the two transformer boxes with the telephone cable.  
4. Put terminating resistors into any open sockets in the  
transformer boxes. This ensures proper communication  
betweenthe Macintosh and the printer and helpsspeedupdata  
transmission.  
5. Turn on the printer.  
Printing from the Macintosh  
If your Macintosh waspreviously connected to a PostScript printer,  
you can probably start printing now. See your application  
documentation for instructions on sending a document to the  
printer or see “Testing Macintosh Communication,” later in this  
chapter.  
However, to take advantage of all your printer’s special features  
(like QCOLOR automatic color control technology, and media size  
and type selection), or if you’ve never printed to a PostScript  
printer before, you need to take a few minutes to load the following  
software from the Macintosh disks we shipped with your printer:  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3  
PS Executive Series printer utilities  
PS Exec is a utilities software package for controlling the  
printer from the Macintosh. For example, through PS Exec  
you can turn off the start-up page, install printer-resident  
screen fonts, rename the printer, download fonts, manage  
hard disks, and print font samples. Many of the procedures  
described in this manual involve using PS Exec.  
LaserWriter 8.x and the magicolor LX 4.1 PPD file  
Although your Macintosh system software came with a  
LaserWriter driver, we recommend you install  
LaserWriter 8.x and the magicolor LX PPD (a printer  
description file) so you can take advantage of special  
printer features (like QCOLOR automatic color control  
technology, and media size and type selection).  
Application-specific printer files  
If you plan to print from Aldus PageMaker, Aldus  
FreeHand, Aldus PrePrint, Adobe Separator, or  
QuarkXPress, you’ll also want to install the latest printer  
description file (PPD, PDX, or PDF) for your particular  
software. (You can probably print without them, but you  
may not be able to access all your printer’s features, and  
you may get an error message telling you to change the  
printer name.)  
Installing the Printer Utilities  
1. InserttheMacintosh FormatPSExecutiveSeriesUtilitiesdisk  
in your Macintosh.  
2. Double-click the PSExec3.xx.sea file.  
3. In the window that appears, choose Continue.  
4. In the window that appears, specify a folder to install the  
utilities to and choose Save.  
3 - 4  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
5. After all the files are extracted, choose Quit.  
6. Open the Utilities folder in the PSExec 3.xx Folder and  
double-click PSInstall to personalize the program.  
7. Double-click the PSExec icon to run the program.  
Check the README file for updates, and see the PS Exec  
Help for information on using the program.  
Installing LaserWriter 8.x and the magicolor LX 4.1  
PPD  
1. If you haven’t already, follow the instructions given above in  
“Installing the Printer Utilities.”  
2. Make backup copies of your current LaserWriter drivers and  
the contents of your Printer Descriptions folder. (If you use  
System 7, these files are stored in the Extensions folder in  
your System Folder. IfyouuseSystem 6, these filesare stored  
in the System Folder.)  
3. Delete your LaserWriter 8 preferences files. (If you use  
System 7, this file is stored in the Preferences folder in your  
System Folder. If you use System 6, this file is stored in the  
System Folder.)  
4. Open the PSExec 3.xx Folder, then the Drivers folder, then  
the LaserWriter folder to display the LaserWriter 8.x icon  
(among other things).  
5. Drag the LaserWriter 8.x icon to your current System Folder.  
(The system knows where to copy it. If you’re prompted for  
permission to copy the file to the folder, choose OK.)  
6. System 7 users: Create a folder called Printer Descriptions  
inside the Extensions folder inside the System Folder, if one  
doesn’t already exist.  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
System 6 users: Create a folder called Printer Descriptions  
inside the System Folder, if one doesn’t already exist.  
7. Open the PPDs folder inside the Drivers folder in the PSExec  
3.xx Folder.  
8. Open the Ver 4.1 folder inside the PPDs folder.  
9. Select the magicolor LX PPD in the Ver 4.1 folder and drag  
it to the Printer Descriptions folder you created in step 4.  
10. From the Apple menu, choose Chooser.  
11. In the Chooser window, select the LaserWriter 8.x icon and  
select the QMS magicolor LX.  
12. Choose the Setup button.  
This causes the LaserWriter to query the printer and  
automatically choose the appropriate PPD.  
13. Exit the Chooser.  
Now, when you gointo your application, you canaccessQMS  
printing options (like QCOLOR color control) by choosing  
Options in your application’s Print dialog box. For  
information on the printer-specific features in the Options  
dialog box, see chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output.”  
Note for Users of Aldus Applications  
If you use an Aldus application, when you want to print, hold  
down the Option key while selecting Print from the File menu.  
This brings up the LaserWriter window, which contains the  
QMS printing options like QCOLOR color control. (Normally,  
Aldus applications bypass LaserWriter and use an Aldus  
printer driver, which would prevent you from accessing QMS  
color printing options.)  
3 - 6  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Note for Adobe Photoshop Users  
If you use Adobe PhotoShop, go to PhotoShop’s Page Setup  
dialog box, and select Use Printer’s Default Screen under the  
Screens option. (This allows your choices in the QMS driver  
to take effect.)  
Installing Printer Description Files  
If you plan to print from Adobe Separator, Aldus PageMaker,  
Aldus FreeHand, Aldus PrePrint, or QuarkXPress, install the  
appropriate printer description file (PPD, PDX, and/or PDF) as  
described below:  
NOTE: The application should be installed before you install the  
printer description file(s).  
1. If you haven’t already, follow the instructions given above in  
“Installing the Printer Utilities.”  
2. Install the appropriate printer description file(s) for your  
application from the Drivers folder in the PS Exec folder:  
If you use Adobe Separator, install the PPD file. Your Separator  
documentation explains where to put it.  
If you use Aldus PageMaker 5.x, install the version 4.1 PPD in  
the Printer Descriptions folder.  
If you use Aldus PageMaker 4.x, install the version 3.0 PPD and  
PDX files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the System  
Folder.  
If you use Aldus FreeHand 4.x, install the version 4.1 PPD in the  
Printer Descriptions folder.  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
If you use Aldus FreeHand 3.x, install the version 3.0 PPD and  
PDX files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the System  
Folder.  
If you use Aldus PrePrint, install the version 3.0 PPD and PDX  
files in the PPDs folder in the Aldus folder in the System Folder.  
If you use QuarkXPress, install the magicolor LX PDF in the  
samefolder asQuarkXPress.QuarkXPress3.3allowsyouto access  
either a PDF or a PPD, but in order to have access to all of your  
printer’s features, we recommend that you use the PDF. To select  
the PDF, go to Quark’s Page Setup dialog box and hold down the  
Shift key while clicking the Printer Type listbox. (The selections  
that appear italicized are PPDs and the selections that appear  
non-italicized are PDFs.) Also in the Page Setup dialog box, make  
sure the EFIColor profile selection is “None.”  
Note that the Quark LPI setting you choose determines which  
printer halftone settings are used. The table below shows which  
printer halftone setting is used for each Quark LPI setting:  
LPI  
Halftone  
15 to 44  
45 to 54  
55 to 79  
80 to 89  
90 to 99  
100 to 125  
126 and higher  
Printer default  
53 lpi x 45 degrees  
71 lpi x 45 degrees  
80 lpi x 45 degrees  
Enhanced  
106 lpi x 45 degrees  
Printer default  
Testing Macintosh Communication  
You can test communication between the printer selected in the  
Chooser and the Macintosh by sending a file to the printer from an  
application (see your application documentation for more  
information), or by printing a directory, as described here:  
3 - 8  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
1. Display a disk or folder window.  
2. From the File menu, choose Page Setup. Select paper size,  
printing orientation, and any other necessary options. Then  
select OK.  
3. From the File menu, choose Print Directory or Print Window.  
A dialog box appears.  
4. Select the printing options you want, then click Print or OK.  
(Choose the Save button to save your settings for future print  
jobs.) A directory prints. (If no page prints, check chapter 9,  
“Troubleshooting.”)  
Where to Go Now  
You’re now ready to print from your Macintosh.  
From this point, you’ll probably perform most printing tasks from  
your application. For specific information, check the printing  
section in your application documentation.  
For information on printmedia typesandsizes,see chapter 5, “Print  
Media and Daily Operations.” For information about using your  
printer’s color-printing features, see chapter 7 of this manual,  
“Optimizing Color Output.”  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
Connecting to a PC  
If you have a brand-new computer, before connecting the printer,  
you should followthemanufacturer’s instructionsfor setting up the  
computer, including (if it’s not already installed) any operating  
system software, such as DOS and Windows.  
What You Need  
To connect your printer to a single PC, you need one of the  
following interface cables (not included with your printer, but  
available at any computer store):  
a parallel cable (with 36-pin and 25-pin male connectors)  
or a serial cable (with a 25-pin male and a 9- or 25-pin  
female connector, depending on the computer’s serial  
port)  
If you’re replacing a printer, you probably already have the  
necessary cables.  
How to Choose a Cable  
We recommend using a parallel cable if possible, because parallel  
communication doesn’t require printer configuration, while serial  
communication often does. However, if the printer is more than 6  
feet (1.8 meters) from the computer, we recommend using a serial  
cable for better communication.  
NOTE: Interface cables should be no longer than 6 feet (1.8  
meters) for parallel or 25 feet (7.6 meters) for serial  
communication.  
3 - 1 0  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 3  
Making the Connection  
CAUTION: If you’re connecting the printer to a single computer,  
turn off both systems first.  
1. At back of the printer, attach one end of the cable to the  
appropriate port.  
Parallel users: Connect the 36-pin end of the cable to the  
printer port labeled “parallel,” and close the clips.  
Fig. 3.2 Parallel Ports  
Serial users: Connect the male end of the cable to the printer  
port labeled “serial,” and tighten the screws.  
Fig. 3.3 Serial Ports  
NOTE: The port covered with a metal bracket is the SCSI port,  
which is used for connecting external hard disks.  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
2. At the computer, attach the other end of the cable to  
appropriate port. (The parallel port is female, and the serial  
port is male.)  
3. Turn on the printer and the computer.  
4. Test communication.  
Parallel users: You can do this by sending a file from one of  
your applications or you can see “Testing Parallel  
Communication,” later in this chapter.  
Serial users: You can do this by sending a file from one of  
your applications or you can see “Testing Serial  
Communication,” later in this chapter.  
5. See “PC Printing Software,” below to finish connecting the  
printer.  
PC Printing Software  
If you’rereplacing acolor PostScript printer, youcanprobably start  
printing now with the printing software already in place. You can  
refer to your application documentation for instructions on sending  
documents to the printer.  
However, if you want to be able to use all your printer’s special  
features (like QCOLOR automatic color control technology, media  
size and type selection, and collation), or if you’ve never printed  
to a color PostScript printer before, we recommend you take a few  
minutes to make sure you have the following printing software  
installed:  
PS Executive Series Utilities  
A color PostScript printer driver  
3 - 1 2  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
Printer description files (if you use QuarkXPress 3.3,  
Aldus PageMaker, or Adobe PhotoShop)  
PS Executive Series Printer Utility Software  
PS Exec, included on the DOS disks we shipped with your printer,  
is a utility for controlling the printer from the computer. For  
example, through PS Exec you can turn off the start-up page,  
rename the printer, download fonts, manage hard disks, print font  
samples, or print a file containing four-color simulations of  
Pantone-identified colors and the percentage of the process colors  
used to create them. Many of the procedures described in this  
manual involve using PS Exec. The README file on the PS  
Executive disk explains how to install the program, and the on-line  
help explains how to use it.  
Installing a Color PostScript Printer Driver  
If you’re using Windows, we recommend that you install the  
QMS-developed Windows driver. See “Installing the Windows3.1  
Driver,” below.  
If you’re using a non-Windows application, read the printing  
section of the application documentation for information on  
choosing a color PostScript driver. If the application does not  
provide a color PostScript driver, contact the application  
manufacturer to see if one has become available since you bought  
the program. Also, color PostScript drivers for some applications  
are available through the QMS Corporate Bulletin Board System  
and through CompuServe; see appendix A, “QMS Customer  
Support,” for information.  
Also, check to see if application notes (tips for printing from  
specific applications) are available for your application from  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3  
Q-FAX, the QMS bulletin board, or CompuServe. Appendix A,  
“QMS Customer Support,” explains how to use these QMS  
information services.  
Installing the Windows 3.1 Driver  
NOTE: The QMS-developed Windows driver supports all the  
printer’s advanced capabilities. However, if you  
experience printing problems while using our driver with  
a particular application, or if your application (like Aldus  
PageMaker) requires the use of the Microsoft PostScript  
driver, then we recommend using the Microsoft driver  
along with the QMS WPD file, to add printer-specific  
capabilities to the driver. (In this case, the QMS driver  
for Windows can remain loaded in order to be used for  
other applications.) The QMS WPD file is on the  
Windows Drivers disk, shipped with the printer. See the  
README file on the disk for information on using the  
WPD.  
Install the QMS driver for Windows (QSCRIPT.DRV) using the  
following procedure:  
1. Turn on your computer, start Windows, and insert the QMS  
“Windows Driver” disk (shipped with your printer) into the  
computer’s 3.5" floppy drive.  
2. In Windows, open File Manager and display the contents of  
the QMS Windows Driver disk.  
Double-click the File Manager icon (usually located in  
Program Manager’s Main window) and double-click the  
appropriate disk-drive icon (the drive the Windows disk is in)  
at the top of the File Manager window.  
3 - 1 4  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
3. Drag the QSCRIPT.HLP file from the QMS disk to the  
WINDOWS\SYSTEM directory.  
4. Open the Windows Control Panel and double-click the  
Printers icon.  
The Control Panel icon is usually located in Program  
Manager’s Main window.  
5. In the Printers dialog box, choose the Add button.  
6. From the List of Printers that appears, choose Install Unlisted  
or Updated Printer and choose the Install button.  
7. In the text box that appears, type the name of the floppy drive  
(for example, A:\) the Windows disk is in and choose OK.  
8. In the Add Unlisted or Updated Printer dialog box, select  
“QMS PostScript Printer” and choose OK.  
If you see the following message: "Insert Microsoft Windows  
3.1 Disk #5 or a disk with the updated SSERIFF.FON file  
in...," choose the Cancel button.  
9. Choose the Connect button to configure your printer port.  
10. In the Connect dialog box, select the appropriate host port in  
the Ports list and choose OK.  
11. Choose the Setup button, and in the Printers section of the  
dialog box that appears, choose your printer (magicolor LX).  
12. Choose OK to return to the Printers dialog box.  
13. Choose Set As Default Printer to make the QMS printer the  
default printer.  
14. Repeat steps 5 through 12 to install the QMS driver for other  
ports or choose Close to exit the Printers dialog box.  
Now you can set printer options from your application by choosing  
Print Setup from the application’s File menu and then choosing the  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Options button. Choose the Help button in any of the driver dialog  
boxes for information on driver options.  
Printer Description Files (PC)  
Printer description files for Windows applications are included on  
the Windows Drivers disk shipped with your printer:  
If you use QuarkXPress 3.3, after you install the QMS driver for  
Windows, install the magicolor LX PDF according to the  
instructions in your QuarkXPress documentation for installing  
PDFs. The table below shows which printer halftone setting will  
be in effect for the Quark LPI setting chosen:  
LPI  
Halftone  
15 to 44  
45 to 54  
55 to 79  
80 to 89  
90 to 99  
100 to 125  
126 and higher  
Printer default  
53 lpi x 45 degrees  
71 lpi x 45 degrees  
80 lpi x 45 degrees  
Enhanced  
106 lpi x 45 degrees  
Printer default  
If you use PageMaker 5.x, use the version 4 PPD on our Windows  
Drivers disk. Also, Aldus requires that the Microsoft PostScript  
driver (version 3.56 or later) be used with PageMaker. See your  
PageMaker documentation for installation instructions. To be able  
to access magicolor LX features from the Microsoft driver, add the  
QMS WPD file (also on our Windows Drivers disk) to the  
Microsoft driver. See the README file on our Windows Drivers  
disk for information on adding our WPD. Note that the QMS driver  
for Windows can be loaded to be used for applications besides  
PageMaker.  
3 - 1 6  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
If you use Adobe Photoshop, for best output quality use the  
QMS-supplied Windows driver. Then, so that choices in the QMS  
driver take effect, go to PhotoShop’s Page Setup dialog box, and  
select Use Printer’s Default Screen under the Screens option.  
Testing Parallel Communication  
1. Go to the DOS C:\ prompt.  
2. Create a short PostScript test file called PRINTEST.PS by  
typing the following commands:  
copy con printest.ps↵  
showpage↵  
^D^Z↵  
To type ^Dand ^Z, press and hold down the Ctrl key while  
you type the letters d and z. These are end-of-file characters.  
You must type showpage, which is a PostScript command  
telling the printer to eject a page, in lowercase letters. The ↵  
symbol means press the Enter key, as it does throughout our  
documentation.  
3. At the DOS C:\ prompt, send PRINTEST.PS to the printer by  
typing the following command:  
print printest.ps↵  
If prompted for the name of the list device, type the name of  
the parallel port the printer is connected to, for example,  
lpt1↵  
NOTE: If the computer has more than one parallel port, they’re  
probably labeled. If not, check the computer  
documentation for the LPT port names.  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
If the printerandcomputerarecommunicating, ablankpageshould  
eject from the printer. You are ready to start printing.  
If a blank page does not ejectand you typedthefilecorrectly, check  
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file to see if LPT1 (the parallel port) is  
being directed to COM1 (the serial port). If the AUTOEXEC.BAT  
file contains the following line, delete it:  
MODE LPT1:=COM1:  
Then type  
mode lpt1:,,p  
in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file so that print jobs are sent until the  
printer accepts them. Reboot and try the communication test again.  
See chapter 9, “Troubleshooting,” and refer to your DOS  
documentation for more information.  
3 - 1 8  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
Testing Serial Communication  
1. Go to the DOS C:\ prompt.  
2. Create a short PostScript test file called PRINTEST.PS by  
typing the following commands:  
copy con printest.ps↵  
showpage↵  
^D^Z↵  
To type ^Dand ^Z, press and hold down the Ctrl key while  
you type the letters d and z. These are end-of-file characters.  
You must type showpage, which is a PostScript command  
telling the printer to eject a page, in lowercase letters. The ↵  
symbol means press the Enter key, as it does throughout our  
documentation.  
3. At the DOS C:\ prompt, send PRINTEST.PS to the printer by  
typing the following command:  
print printest.ps↵  
If prompted for the name of the list device, type the name of  
the serial port you’re using at the computer, for example,  
com1↵  
NOTE: If the computer has more than one serial port, they’re  
probably labeled. If not, check the computer  
documentation for the COM port names.  
If a blank page ejects from the printer, the printer and the  
computer are communicating. You are ready to start printing.  
If a blank page does not eject and you typed the file correctly,  
make sure the printer’s serial port settings match those of the  
PC. See “Checking Serial Communication Settings,” below.  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
Checking Serial Communication Settings  
If the serialcommunication testdescribedabovedoesn’twork,then  
make sure your printer’s serial port settings (baud rate, parity, data  
bits, and stop bits) match those of the PC.  
To find out what the PC’s serial settings are, look in your  
AUTOEXEC.BAT file (in the root directory) for a command line  
like this:  
MODE COM1:9600,N,8,1,P  
In this example, the PC’s serial port communication settings are  
9600 for baud rate, n (no) parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bits. The p  
stands for infinite retry.  
To find out what the printer’s serial settings are, check the printer’s  
start-up page, which printed out when you first turned it on. It lists  
the printer’s current serial port settings. To change them to match  
the PC serial settings, use the printer control panel as described  
below:  
1. Press the printer control panel Online/Offline key to make the  
Online LED go out.  
2. Press the Menu key to enter the top-level menu, then press the  
Next key until the message window displays  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
ADMINISTRATION  
3. Press the Select key to enter the Administration menu, then  
press the Next key until the message window displays  
ADMINISTRATION  
COMMUNICATIONS  
4. Press the Select key to enter the Communications menu, then  
press the Next key until the message window displays  
3 - 2 0  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3  
COMMUNICATIONS  
SERIAL  
5. Press the Select key to enter the Serial menu, then press the  
Next key until the message window displays  
SERIAL  
BAUD RATE  
6. Press the SelectkeytoentertheBaudRatemenu.Themessage  
windowdisplays the currentlyselected baud rate (*represents  
a default setting):  
*9600 BAUD  
7. Press the Next key until the correct baud rate is displayed.  
NOTE: Baud rates of 19200 and 38400 require that either RTS  
or CTS hardware flow control (Hdwe Flow Ctl) be  
selected. These baud rates do not support XON/XOFF  
software flow control (Rcv Sw Flow CTL).  
8. Press the Select key. The message window momentarily  
displays  
RATE  
IS SELECTED  
(where RATEis the baud rate you selected) and then  
SERIAL  
BAUD RATE  
9. If you want to change other settings, use the Next key to scroll  
to the setting you want to change, then repeat the procedure  
described in steps 6 through 8 for finding and selecting new  
settings.  
When you have finished making changes, press the  
Online/Offline key. The message window displays  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3  
SAVE CHANGES?  
NO  
To save your changes, press the Next key so that the message  
window displays  
SAVE CHANGES?  
YES  
Press the Select key to save the changes.  
10. Press the Online key. The Online LED lights, and the  
keyboard message window displays IDLE.  
11. To verify the changes you just made, print a start-up page by  
turning the printer off, then back on. Compare the serial port  
settings listed on the page to those in your AUTOEXEC.BAT  
file.  
12. Try the communication test again. If a blank page ejects from  
the printer, the printer and the computer are communicating.  
You are ready to start printing.  
If a blank page does not eject and you typed the file correctly, see  
chapter 9, “Troubleshooting,” and refer to your DOS  
documentation for more information.  
About the Printer’s Communication Modes  
The following sections explain the communication mode choices  
you have with your printer, including the resident emulations,  
Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO), and Emulation Sensing  
Processor (ESP) technology. All of these features enhance the  
printer-computer interface.  
3 - 2 2  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3  
Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO)  
Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO), a standard feature of  
Crown technology, enables your printer to communicate  
simultaneously with hosts through the LocalTalk, parallel, serial,  
and optional network interface ports. In other words, SIO allows  
you to have more than one host communicating with the printer at  
one time.  
Emulation Sensing Processing (ESP) Modes  
Youcaneither allowyour printer to operate in itsdefault ESP mode  
or configure its ports to accept jobs in only a particular emulation  
(for example, PostScript only, HP PCL 5 only, or HP-GL only.)  
Thedefaultprintercommunication settings canbechangedthrough  
the Configuration menu, which you access through the control  
panel: In the Administration/Communications menu, you can  
choose a default emulation for the parallel and serial interfaces, and  
in the Administration/Emulations menu, you can configure the  
printer defaults for each emulation mode. (The LocalTalk interface  
uses only PostScript.)  
Advanced users can also use PostScript operators to reconfigure  
printer ports. The QMS Crown Technical Reference (an optional  
manual available from your QMS vendor) contains information  
about PostScript operators.  
If you plan to send jobs in a mixture of emulations, you should  
configure the parallel and serial ports for ESP mode. This mode is  
a standard feature of Crown architecture. It works with most  
popular commercially available applications, using a form of  
artificial intelligence to analyze incoming file data and select the  
appropriate printer emulation from those installed on the printer.  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
3 - 2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 3  
If you configure an interface port for ESP mode, then print jobs are  
processed without your having to change printer switch settings or  
send software commands to accommodate different printer  
emulations.  
3 - 2 4  
C o n n e c t i n g t h e P r i n t e r  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printer Configuration  
Chapter highlights:  
Printer configuration methods  
Control panel components and functions  
Moving through the menu and selecting options  
Description of the printer’s configuration menu  
Document Option Commands supported  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Introduction  
This chapter briefly discusses the different methods of printer  
configuration and then explains how to use the control panel to  
configure the printer.  
Printer Configuration Methods  
Controlling the Printer through an Application’s Printer  
Driver  
The easiest way to control the printer is through your application’s  
printer driver. See chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer,” of this  
manual and your application documentation for information on  
choosing and installing a printer driver. If you print from Windows  
or a Macintosh, we recommend you use the QMS-developed  
Windows or Macintosh driver shipped with your printer, because  
it supports all your printer’s special features.  
Controlling the Printer with PS Executive Utilities  
The PS Executive Series printer utilities software (shipped with the  
printer) provides a way to control the printer from a host. The PS  
Executive Series Utilities README file and the on-line  
documentation explain how to install and use this software.  
Controlling the Printer through Printer Commands  
The printer can also be controlled through printer commands:  
PostScript operators, HP-GL commands, HP PCL 5C commands,  
or QMS Document Option Commands (DOCs). DOCs enable  
job-specific printer features or features your application or page  
description language can’t access. See QMS Crown Document  
Option Commands and HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4  
and the QMS Crown Technical Reference (optional manuals  
available from your QMS vendor) for information on these  
commands.  
Controlling the Printer with the Control Panel  
Another way to control the printer is through the Configuration  
menu, which you access through the printer’s control panel. The  
printer is configured at the factory for the most typical printing  
environments, so most users don’t have to enter the Configuration  
menu often. However, there are a few situations that may require  
you to use the control panel:  
To configure the printer for printing on a different media  
type (for example, transparency instead of paper).  
To configure features not configurable through your  
application.  
NOTE: For information on restoring the factory default settings  
in  
the Configuration  
menu, see the  
“Administration/Miscellaneous/Restore Defaults”  
section later in this chapter.  
Configuration Method Priorities  
Options or values selected through an application or driver receive  
highest priority and override all other options or values. Those  
selectedthrough PSExecutive SeriesUtilitieshavesecondpriority.  
Those selected through DOCs (Document Option Commands)  
have third priority, and those selected through the control panel  
have the lowest priority.  
4 - 2  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
The Printer’s Control Panel  
Figure 4.1 shows the printer’s control panel.  
Fig. 4.1 Printer Control Panel  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4  
The LCD Message Window  
This message window presents status messages and Configuration  
menu options. When you’re in the Configuration menu, the top line  
of the message window displays the name of the current menu, and  
the bottom line displays the name of an option within that menu.  
Status messages display in order of priority if the printer is on line;  
they don’t display if the printer is off line. Chapter 9,  
“Troubleshooting,” lists and explains status messages.  
Use the Clear Warning option to clear a status message that doesn’t  
automatically clear after the related corrective action is taken. See  
“Administration/Engine/Clear Warning,” later in this chapter, for  
details.  
The Control Panel LEDs  
The LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) on the control panel give  
information about printer status:  
Illuminated when the printer is on line, ready to accept  
and process new print jobs.  
Flashes when the printer is receiving data from one or  
more of the simultaneous interfaces.  
Illuminated when the printer requires operator  
intervention.  
Illuminated when the standard paper cassette is  
selected.  
Illuminated when the optional lower cassette is  
selected.  
4 - 4  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4  
Illuminated when manual feed is selected using the  
Tray Select key.  
Illuminated when the media in the active cassette has  
been defined to be paper.  
Illuminated when the media in the active cassette has  
been defined to be transparency.  
All the LEDs, except Data and Message, are associated with  
function keys on the panel.  
The Function Keys  
The printer control panel has eight function keys. The top row of  
keys (Online/Offline, Tray Select, Media, Cancel) is for frequently  
usedoperations. The bottom row of keys is used to navigate menus,  
select options, and enter values.  
NOTE: When you’re in configuration mode (that is, if you have  
entered the menu by pressing the Menu key), the printer  
ignores the Tray Select, Media, and Cancel keys.  
Pressing the Online/Offline key once takes the printer  
off line, making the printer ready for configuration.  
When the printer goes off line, communication ports  
close and accept no new data. Although jobs continue  
to compile and print using data already received, a job  
may be interrupted when the printer goes off line,  
causing it to wait fortherestof thedatabeforefinishing  
printing. When the printer is off line, pressing this key  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
once brings it back on line. When the printer is on line  
(ready toaccept and process new printjobs), theOnline  
LED on the control panel is illuminated.  
The Tray Select key allows you to select the cassette  
from which to draw print media: the standard (upper)  
cassette, the optional (lower) cassette, or the manual  
feed tray. The appropriate LED is illuminated to  
confirm your choice.  
The Media key is used to tell the printer whether paper  
or transparencies are in the currently selected cassette.  
The factory default for both upper and lower cassettes  
is paper.  
TheCancel key allows youto cancel the “oldest” job(s)  
compiling or printing in the printer, or to send an  
end-of-job indicator for a print job. This key can be  
used without taking the printer off line. See  
“Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs” in chapter 5, “Print  
Media and Daily Operations,” for more details.  
NOTE: If you accidentally press the Cancel key, press  
the Menu key to tell the printer to stop cancelling a job.  
Press the Menu key after the printer goes off line to  
enter the Configuration menu. In addition, pressing the  
Menu key returns you to the next higher menu level,  
allowing you to back out of the Configuration menu  
one level at a time; tells the printer to stop cancelling a  
job when you accidentally press the Cancel key; and  
takes you back one character space at a time in an  
alphanumeric value.  
Press the Select key to enter a menu or to select a menu  
option or an individual character in an alphanumeric  
value.  
Press the Previous key to scroll backwards through the  
options in a menuortodecreaseanindividualcharacter  
4 - 6  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
in an alphanumeric value.  
Press theNext keytoscrollforwardthroughtheoptions  
in a menu or to scroll through characters available for  
alphanumeric values.  
NOTE: Always make sure the printer is idle and off line before  
making configuration changes. If the printer is not idle,  
jobs may be lost.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Using the Configuration Menu  
This section covers how to password-protect menus, how to select  
options, and how to enter and save values.  
Password-protected Menus  
The Operator Control and Administration menus may be  
password-protected if an optional security card is used with the  
printer. If the message window displays ENTER PASSWORD  
whenyou usetheSelectkeyto enteramenu,apasswordis required;  
see your system administrator. For information on entering  
passwords, see “Entering Alphanumeric Values” later in this  
chapter. If an invalid password is entered, the message window  
flashes INVALID PASSWORDfor three seconds, then returns you  
to the CONFIGURATION menu. If you specify the correct  
password, you’re allowed to enter the menu.  
Selecting Options  
Most menus offer an array of choices within each menu group. For  
example, within the Administration menu group, there is a  
Communications menu; within the Communications menu there is  
a Parallel menu; within the Parallel menu, there is an Emulations  
menu, and within the Emulations menu, there are several choices,  
such as ESP, PostScript, HP-GL, Lineprinter, and PCL 5C (LN03+  
and CCITT are listed if installed).  
Table 4.1 shows how to select a menu option, using as an example  
configuring the parallel interface for PostScript mode.  
NOTE: The printer must be off line and idle for you to change  
printer configuration. If the printer is not idle, jobs may  
be lost.  
4 - 8  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4  
Press  
What Happens  
Message Window  
ONLINE/  
OFFLINE  
You take the printer off line.  
OFFLINE  
MENU  
NEXT  
CONFIGURATION  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
You enter the Configuration menu.  
CONFIGURATION  
ADMINISTRATION  
You scroll to the Administration  
menu.  
SELECT  
ADMINISTRATION  
COMMUNICATIONS  
You enter the Administration  
menu, and the first submenu,  
Communications, displays.  
SELECT  
You enter the Communications  
menu, and the first submenu,  
Timeouts, displays.  
COMMUNICATIONS  
TIMEOUTS  
NEXT  
COMMUNICATIONS  
SERIAL  
You scroll to the Serial menu.  
You scroll to the Parallel menu.  
NEXT  
COMMUNICATIONS  
PARALLEL  
SELECT  
NEXT  
You enter the Parallel menu, and  
the first submenu, Mode, displays.  
PARALLEL  
MODE  
You scroll to the Emulation menu.  
PARALLEL  
EMULATION  
SELECT  
NEXT  
EMULATION  
*ESP  
You enter the Emulation menu,  
and the first option, ESP, displays.  
EMULATION  
POSTSCRIPT  
You scroll to the PostScript option.  
You select the PostScript option  
SELECT  
POSTSCRIPT  
IS SELECTED  
After three seconds, you are  
returned to your previous position  
in the Parallel menu.  
PARALLEL  
EMULATION  
ONLINE/  
OFFLINE  
SAVE CHANGES?  
NO  
You return to the top-level menu.  
You scroll to the Yes option.  
NEXT  
SAVE CHANGES?  
YES  
SELECT  
You save your changes.  
You put the printer on lline.  
IDLE  
ONLINE/  
OFFLINE  
Table 4.1 Selecting a Configuration Option  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Entering Alphanumeric Values  
In some submenus, you choose options by entering an  
alphanumeric string instead of by selecting from a list. Entering  
alphanumeric values through the control panel is similar to setting  
the time and date on a digital watch. You enter the information one  
character at a time. To change alphanumeric values in the  
Configuration menu  
Use the Next key to scroll forward through the list of  
available characters.  
Use the Previous key to scroll backwards through the list  
of available characters.  
Use the Select key to move the cursor to the next character  
or (when it’s flashing on the last character) to select the  
new value.  
Use the Menu key to move the cursor to the previous  
character or, when the cursor’s flashing on the first  
character, to select the new value.  
When you select a new alphanumeric value, the printer checks to  
see if it is valid. If it is invalid, the alphanumeric value reappears  
for editing. Press the Menu key to cancel any changes to the value.  
A space (no character) is available as a selection. You can set an  
alphanumericvalueto null byentering spacesinsteadofcharacters.  
Table 4.2 shows how to change an alphanumeric value, using as an  
example the scaling percent option in HP-GL emulation. The table  
starts in the Administration/Emulations/HP-GL menu.  
NOTE: Boxed type in the table below means that the value is  
flashing in the message window.  
4 - 1 0  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
Press  
What Happens  
Message Window  
SELECT  
You enter the HP-GL submenu.  
HP-GL  
SCALING PERCENT  
SELECT  
NEXT  
First character flashes to show it is SCALING PERCENT  
ready to be changed.  
1 00  
You scroll to the next value for  
the flashing character.  
SCALING PERCENT  
2 00  
NEXT  
You scroll to the next value for  
the flashing character.  
SCALING PERCENT  
3 00  
NEXT  
You scroll to the next value for  
the flashing character.  
SCALING PERCENT  
4 00  
NEXT  
You scroll to the next value for  
the flashing character.  
SCALING PERCENT  
5 00  
SELECT  
SELECT  
The second character flashes.  
SCALING PERCENT  
5 0 0  
The last character flashes to show SCALING PERCENT  
it is ready to be changed.  
50 0  
PREVIOUS You scroll to the previous value  
for the flashing character, a space  
character. This changes the  
SCALING PERCENT  
50  
value from 500 to 50.  
SELECT  
You choose 50 as the new  
setting for Scaling Percent.  
50  
IS SELECTED  
After three seconds, you are  
returned to your previous position  
in the HP-GL submenu.  
HP-GL  
SCALING PERCENT  
ONLINE/  
OFFLINE  
You return to the top-level menu.  
You scroll to the Yes option.  
SAVE CHANGES?  
NO  
NEXT  
SAVE CHANGES?  
YES  
SELECT  
You save your changes.  
You put the printer on line.  
IDLE  
ONLINE/  
OFFLINE  
Table 4.2 Entering Alphanumeric Values  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Saving Configuration Selections  
Press the Online/Offline key to exit the Configuration menu or  
press the Menu key to backout of the Configuration menu one level  
ata time. If youmadechangesbeforeexiting the menu,the message  
window displays  
SAVE CHANGES?  
NO  
If you don’t want the changes you made to take effect, press Select,  
and then press the Online/Offline key to put the printer back on  
line.  
If you want the changes you made to take effect, press the Next key  
to change NOto YESand then press the Select key. The changes  
are saved and take effect when you put the printer back on line. If  
the Message Window displaysWAITING FOR IDLE, the system  
is finishing jobs in progress under the old configuration values, but  
is not allowing any new jobs to begin. The printer then accepts new  
jobs and processes them using the new configuration values.  
NOTE: Some menu changes require that the printer be rebooted  
before they take effect, including the following:  
Operator Control/Media  
Administration/Communications/Serial/Mode  
Administration/Communications/Parallel/Mode  
Administration/Emulations/ESP Default  
Administration/Startup Options/Error Handler  
Administration/Disk Operations/Spool Overflow  
Administration/Disk Operations/Collation  
4 - 1 2  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
If you make configuration changes to other menu options and they  
don’t seem to be taking effect, wait until the current jobs end, and  
then try turning the printer off and on again.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
The Main Menu Groups  
The main menu groups in the Configuration menu are Operator  
Control and Administration (with the Installation menu also  
appearing if a security cartridge is installed) (fig. 4.2). Related  
functions are grouped together within submenus. The scrolling  
order of menu options on a given level varies.  
IDLE  
CONFIGURATION  
ADMINISTRATION  
CONFIGURATION  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
CONFIGURATION  
INSTALLATION (optional)  
COMMUNICATIONS  
EMULATIONS  
SPECIAL PAGES  
STARTUP OPTIONS  
MEMORY  
ENGINE  
MISCELLANEOUS  
DISK OPERATIONS  
COPIES  
COLLATION  
OPERATOR PASSWRD  
USE OPERATOR PWD  
ADMIN PASSWORD  
USE ADMIN PWD  
ORIENTATION  
INPUTBIN  
CHAIN INPUTBINS  
COLOR MODEL  
COLOR SEPARATION  
MEDIA  
MANUAL FEED SIZE  
Fig. 4.2 Configuration Menu  
4 - 1 4  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4  
The Installation Menu  
The Installation menu (fig. 4.3) appears only when a security card  
is in use. This menu is used to password-protect the Operator  
Control and Administration menus.  
CONFIGURATION  
INSTALLATION  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
INSTALLATION  
OPERATOR PASSWRD  
INSTALLATION  
INSTALLATION  
USE ADMIN PWD  
USE OPERATOR PWD  
INSTALLATION  
ADMIN PASSWORD  
Fig. 4.3 Installation Menu  
Installation/Operator Passwrd  
The Operator Passwrd menu allows you to choose the password  
(up to 16 characters in length) used to enter the Operator Control  
menu when Use Operator Pwd is set to on.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4  
Installation/Use Operator Pwd  
The Use Operator Pwd menu determines if a password is required  
to enter the Operator Control menu. The choices are on or off; the  
factory default is off.  
Installation/Admin Password  
The Admin Password menu allows you to choose the password (up  
to 16 characters) used to enter the Administration menu when Use  
Admin Pwd is set to on.  
Installation/Use Admin Pwd  
The Use Admin Pwd menu determines if a password is required to  
enter the Administration menu. The choices are on or off; the  
factory default is off.  
4 - 1 6  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4  
The Operator Control Menu  
It’s usually better to choose the selections available in Operator  
Control within your application, if possible. This is especially true  
in anetwork environment,where other users’ jobsare likely to have  
different requirements than yours. However, this menu is provided  
in case your application or driver doesn’t support all these  
selections.  
CONFIGURATION  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
COPIES  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
COLLATION  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
MANUAL FEED SIZE  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
ORIENTATION  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
MEDIA  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
INPUTBIN  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
COLOR SEPARATION  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
COLOR MODEL  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
CHAIN INPUTBINS  
Fig. 4.4 Operator Control Menu  
Operator Control/Media  
NOTES:The printer must be turned off and on again before  
changes to this menu take effect. The Media key on the  
printer’s control panel provides a faster means of  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4  
changing this setting, but does not contain a thick stock  
option.  
Use this option to tell the printer what type of media is in each tray  
so the printer can optimize output for that media type. To use the  
Media menu, first select a media tray (upper for the standard  
cassette slot, lower for the optional sheet feeder, or manual for the  
manual-feed tray). Then select paper, transparency, or thick stock  
for that tray. Select Paper for printing paper, envelopes, or labels.  
Select transparency for printing on overhead transparency film.  
Select thick stock (for the manual-feed tray only) for printing on  
2
2
stock that is between 24 and 43 lb (90 g/m and 163 g/m ). The  
factory default is paper.  
Operator Control/Copies  
Use this option to specify the number of copies of each job sent to  
the printer, from 001 to 999. The factory default is 001.  
Operator Control/Collation  
Use this option to turn collation off or on. The factory default is on.  
See “Collating” in chapter 5 for more details.  
Operator Control/Orientation  
Use this option to determine the orientation of the image on a page,  
either portrait (vertical) or landscape (horizontal). The factory  
default is portrait.  
Operator Control/Inputbin  
Use this option to select the input bin (the standard upper cassette  
or the optional lower cassette) from which to draw media. The  
4 - 1 8  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4  
factory default is upper. The current selection is indicated by the  
corresponding LED.  
NOTE: A status message on the control panel will let you know  
immediately if the selected cassette isn’t installed. If the  
selected cassette is out of paper, a paper out status  
message appears when you send the job to be printed.  
Operator Control/Chain Inputbins  
Use this option to turn on or off cassette switching (chaining) when  
the first cassette empties to another cassette with the same size and  
type of media. The factory default is off.  
Operator Control/Color Separation  
Use this option to turn color separation on or off. The factory  
default is off.  
Operator Control/Color Model  
Use this option to select between full-color or monochrome  
printing. The factory default is full color. Monochrome must be  
selected as the default if you want to print 600 dpi jobs on a printer  
with less than 24 MB RAM. You also may want to select  
monochrome when printing on legal-size media, because the  
printer’s imageable region for full color is limited to 8.1" x 11.7"  
(205.90 mm x 297.18 mm).  
Operator Control/Manual Feed Size  
Whenever you switchmedia sizes in the manualfeedtray,youmust  
tell the printer what the new size is. The choices are letter, legal,  
executive, A4, DL envelope, and Com 10 envelope. The factory  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4  
default is letter (or A4). See chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily  
Operations,” for more information on media sizes.  
NOTE: If the selected paper size doesn’t match the job size  
requested, images may be positioned incorrectly on the  
page, or may print off the edge of the page. If this  
happens, the resulting loose toner may adhere to the back  
of subsequent pages.  
The Administration Menu  
CONFIGURATION  
ADMINISTRATION  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
ADMINISTRATION  
COMMUNICATIONS  
ADMINISTRATION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
ADMINISTRATION  
EMULATIONS  
ADMINISTRATION  
MISCELLANEOUS  
ADMINISTRATION  
SPECIAL PAGES  
ADMINISTRATION  
ENGINE  
ADMINISTRATION  
STARTUP OPTIONS  
ADMINISTRATION  
MEMORY  
Fig. 4.5 Administration Menu  
NOTE: The items designated as factory default indicate those  
present when QMS ships the printer. The default of the  
system is the value or option last chosen. The options  
4 - 2 0  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
within these menus are seldom changed after the initial  
system installation.  
Administration/Communications  
ADMINISTRATION  
COMMUNICATIONS  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
COMMUNICATIONS  
TIMEOUTS  
Optional  
COMMUNICATIONS  
COMMUNICATIONS  
SERIAL  
NETWORK INTERFACE  
COMMUNICATIONS  
PARALLEL  
COMMUNICATIONS  
APPLETALK  
Fig. 4.6 Communications Submenu  
NOTE: If you have an optional interface installed, see the  
documentation that came with it for a description of  
options under the Administration/Communications  
menu.  
Administration/Communications/Timeouts  
The Timeouts option sets a limit to the amount of time the printer  
waits on transmission from the host for various types of data.  
Setting a timeout to 00000 is the same as specifying no timeout.  
PS Wait  
Timeout  
Thenumber ofseconds thatPostScriptemulation mode  
waits for incoming data, from 00000 (no timeout) to  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
99999, with a factory default of 00030. If the printer  
goes idle after 30 seconds and does not print, this  
timeout should be increased. Large jobs, such as  
graphics applications or computer-aided design,  
require this number to be increased to 00300. Note:  
When a print job is sent from a Macintosh, the PS Wait  
timeout is automatically changed to 300.  
Emul Timeout The number of seconds that emulations other than  
PostScript (such as HP-GL or an optional emulation)  
wait for additional incoming data, from 00000 (no  
timeout) to 99999, with a factory default of 00005.  
Job Timeout  
The number of seconds the printer spends processing a  
job before it ends the job, from 00000 (no timeout) to  
99999, with a factory default of 00000 (no timeout).  
ESP Timeout  
The number of seconds the printer (when set for ESP  
mode) spends trying to match emulations before  
printing the job using the default emulation  
(Administration/Emulations/ESP Default menu), from  
00000 (no timeout) to 99999, with a factory default of  
00003.  
Administration/Communications/Serial  
This option allows you to configure the printer-host  
communications when using the serial interface.  
Mode  
Mode allows or disallows the PostScript emulation  
interactive mode from the host. The options are  
interactive, noninteractive, and disabled. If mode is set  
to disabled, the printer accepts no jobs through this  
protocol. Interactive mode allows two-way  
communication between the host and the printer.  
Non-interactive is unidirectional communication from  
the host computer to the printer only. The factory  
default is interactive. The printer must be rebooted for  
a change in this setting to take effect.  
Emulation  
This option selects the emulation for the printer serial  
port. The emulations available are ESP, PostScript, HP  
PCL 5C, HP-GL, Lineprinter, and Hexdump. Optional  
4 - 2 2  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
emulations, like LN03 Plus and CCITT, appear only if  
installed. The factory default emulation is ESP.  
Min K Spool  
The minimum amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the  
serial interface. Do not set this value greater than K  
Mem for Spool. The default is 00015.  
Spool Timeout Thenumberofsecondstheinterface waits fordatafrom  
the host system before terminating a print job. The  
minimum value is 00000 (no timeout), the maximum  
value is 99999, and the factory default value is 00030.  
End Job Mode This option enables or disables data stream sensing for  
end-of-document (EOD) terminator strings. These  
sequences allow host computers to enforce print job  
sequencing without considerations for interacting  
timeouts. The values are none (printer recognizes only  
the PostScript ^D command), QMS EOD  
(%%EndOfDocument),  
and  
HP  
EOD  
(<ESC>%-12345X). The factory default is none. See  
“Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs” in chapter 5 for  
more details.  
Baud Rate  
The baud rate is a measure of the rate of transmission  
(bits per second) from host to printer over the serial  
channel. The baud rate options are 300, 600, 1200,  
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400. The factory  
defaultis9600. Hostandprinterbaud ratesmustmatch.  
Baud rates of 19200 and 38400 require either RTS or  
CTS hardware flow control (Hdwe Flow Ctl). These  
baud rates do not support XON/XOFF software flow  
control (Rcv Sw Flow CTL).  
Parity  
Parity acts as a check bit to identify data transmission  
errors. The options are none, mark, space, odd, or even.  
The host or application parity setting must match the  
printer’s parity setting. The factory default is none.  
Ignore Parity Ignore parity options are off or on; the factory default  
is off.  
Rcv Sw  
Flow Ctl  
The software communication protocol used by the  
printer to control communication from the host. The  
options are XON/XOFF, robust XON/XOFF,  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
ETX/ACK, and none. The factory default is  
XON/XOFF.  
Xmit Sw  
The software communication protocol used by the host  
to control communication with the printer. The options  
are none, XON/XOFF, ETX/ACK. The factory default  
is none.  
Flow Ctl  
Data Bits  
Stop Bits  
The number of data bits (either 7 bits or 8 bits)  
transmitted per character. The factory default is 8 data  
bits.  
The number of stop bits (either 1 bit or 2 bits)  
transmitted per character. The factory default is 1 bit.  
Hdwe Flow  
Ctl  
Allthe hardwareflow controlsettings mustbethesame  
as those of the host. The options are DSR POL (Data  
Set Ready Polarity: high or low; factory default low),  
DSR (Data Set Ready: on or off; factory default off),  
DTR POL(Data Terminal Ready Polarity: high or low;  
factory default low), DTR (Data Terminal Ready: on  
or off; factory default on), RTS (Request to Send: on  
or off; factory default off), and CTS (Clear to Send: on  
or off; the factory default is off).  
PS Protocol  
This option sets the binary communications protocol  
(BCP) for communicating over a serial, parallel, or  
optional network interface to a PostScript printer. BCP  
allows any 8-bit binary value (0-255) to be treated as  
data while allowing a few of the values to function as  
special control characters.  
Four choices are available through the PS Protocol  
submenu for the serial interface. The default is normal.  
Normal: Enables standard, ASCII hex protocol. Data  
is sent and received in ASCII format. Print jobs can  
alter this value through PostScript operators.  
Normal Fixed: Enables standard, ASCII hex protocol.  
Print jobs cannot alter this value through PostScript  
operators.  
BinaryEnables binary communications protocol  
(BCP). Print jobs can alter this value through  
PostScript operators.  
4 - 2 4  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Binary Fixed: Enables binary communications  
protocol (BCP). Print jobs cannot alter this value  
through PostScript operators.  
When PS Protocol is set to the normal fixed or binary  
fixed mode and a print job sends PostScript operators  
to change the input device mode, the operators are  
accepted but not acted upon. See appendix D,  
“Additional Technical Information,” for more  
information on PS Protocol.  
Administration/Communications/Parallel  
This option allows you to configure the printer to match the host  
communications when using the parallel interface.  
Mode  
Mode allows or disallows the PostScript emulation  
interactive mode from the host. The options are  
interactive, noninteractive, and disabled. If disabled,  
the printer accepts no jobs through this protocol.  
Interactive mode allows two-way communication  
between the host and the printer. Noninteractive is  
unidirectional communication from the host to the  
printer only. The factory default is noninteractive. The  
printer must be rebooted for a change in this setting to  
take effect.  
Emulation  
This optionselects theemulation for theprinter parallel  
port. The choices available for Emulations are ESP,  
PostScript, HP PCL 5C, HP-GL, Lineprinter, and  
Hexdump. Optional emulations, like LN03 Plus and  
CCITT, appear only if installed. The factory default  
emulation is ESP.  
Min K Spool  
The minimum of RAM (KB) dedicated to the parallel  
interface. Do not set this value greater than K Mem for  
Spool. The default setting is 00015.  
Spool Timeout The number of seconds the parallel interface waits for  
data from the host system before terminating a print  
job, from 00000 (no timeout) to 99999, with a factory  
default of 00030.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 2 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Data Bits  
The number of data bits (either 7 bits or 8 bits)  
transmitted per character. The factory default is 8 data  
bits.  
End Job Mode This option enables or disables data stream sensing for  
end-of-document (EOD) terminator strings. These  
sequences allow host computers to enforce print job  
sequencing without considerations for interacting  
timeouts. The values are none (printer recognizes only  
the PostScript ^D command), QMS EOD  
(%%EndOfDocument),  
and  
HP  
EOD  
(<ESC>%-12345X). The factory default is none. See  
“Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs” in chapter 5 for  
more details.  
PS Protocol  
This option sets the binary communications protocol  
(BCP) for communicating over a serial, parallel, or  
optional network interface to a PostScript printer.  
Choices for the parallel interface are normal, normal  
fixed, binary, and binary fixed. The default is normal.  
Descriptions of these options are in  
“Administration/Communications/Serial,” earlier in  
this section.  
Administration/Communications/AppleTalk  
This option allows you to configure printer-host computer  
communications when using the AppleTalk interface.  
Mode  
Mode enables or disables the PostScript emulation  
interactive mode from the host. The default is enabled.  
If disabled, the printer accepts no jobs through this  
protocol.  
Connection  
Connection allows you to enable or disable print  
spooling. The options are Conventional and Spool.  
Conventional, the factory default option, allows one  
AppleTalk connection and accepts only one print job  
at a time. If two users send print jobs to the printer, the  
workstation belonging to the first user is tied up until  
the first job has been printed, and the workstation  
belonging to the second user is tied up until both jobs  
have been printed. The Spool option allows multiple  
AppleTalk connections and accepts (spools) more than  
4 - 2 6  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
one print job at a time. Workstations are not tied up  
while jobs are printing.  
Min K Spool  
The minimum amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the  
LocalTalk interface. Do not set this value greater than  
K Mem for Spool. The default is 00015.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 2 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Administration/Communications/Network Interface  
This option allows you to configure printer-host communications  
when using an optional interface card. Appendix D of this manual,  
“Additional Technical Information,” contains information about  
the PS Protocol option. See the documentation that came with the  
interface card for details on other options.  
Administration/Emulations  
NOTE: The Emulations menu allows you to customize emulation  
settings. To choose an emulation or ESP for a particular  
interface, see that interface menu in the  
Administration/Communications menu.  
ADMINISTRATION  
EMULATIONS  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
EMULATIONS  
ESP DEFAULT  
Optional  
EMULATIONS  
OPTIONAL EMULATION  
EMULATIONS  
POSTSCRIPT  
EMULATIONS  
LINEPRINTER  
EMULATIONS  
HP-GL  
EMULATIONS  
HP PCL 5C  
Fig. 4.7 Emulations Submenu  
Administration/Emulations/PostScript  
Within the Emulations/PostScript menuare aPostScript Emulation  
Level option, a Default Halftone option, a Default CRD (Color  
4 - 2 8  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
Rendering Dictionary) option, a Default Dithering option, and a  
Gamma Correction option.  
Default  
Halftone  
This option allows you to choose a printer default  
halftone from the following settings: 106 (screen lines  
per inch) x 45° (screen angles), 71 lpi x 45°, 80 lpi x  
45°, 53 lpi x 45°, and the factory default Enhanced  
setting. The Enhanced setting gives the best results for  
most jobs, especially jobs containing a mixture of text,  
graphics, or sampled images. See chapter 7,  
“Optimizing Color Output,” for information about the  
halftone settings and their uses.  
NOTE: If you choose halftones settings (such as line  
frequencies or spot functions) in your application,  
those settings probably take precedence over the  
halftones in the Default Halftone menu.  
Emulation  
Level  
This option allows you to choose either PostScript  
Level 1 emulation or PostScript Level 2 emulation as  
your printer’s default PostScript emulation. This  
option is useful if you have files prepared in an  
application that is not fully compatible with Adobe’s  
PostScript Level 2 page description language.  
However, Level 2 works for Level 2 files and most  
Level 1 files. The default is PostScript Level 2  
emulation.  
Default CRD  
(Color  
Rendering  
Dictionary)  
For color matching with PostScript Level 2  
applications, this option allows you to choose from the  
following color rendering dictionaries: Colorimetric  
600, Colorimetric 300, Business 600 (the factory  
default), Business 300, Photographic 600, and  
Photographic 600. Since the printer has a different  
range of colors than other color devices (such as your  
monitor), a color rendering dictionary is necessary to  
tell the printer how to print colors that are out of its  
range. See “Printer-Resident Color Rendering  
Dictionaries” in chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output,”  
for more information on choosing a CRD. Additional  
CRDs may be available from your QMS vendor.  
Default  
Dithering  
This option allows you to specify the default dither  
pattern used by the printer. The choices are standard,  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
enhanced low, enhanced medium, and enhanced high.  
Standard, the factory default setting, is  
PostScript-compatible dithering. Enhanced dithering  
reduces the banding sometimes seen in  
PostScript-compatible dithering, with enhanced high  
producing the least banding. The factory-default  
Standard setting should not be changed if you are using  
the factory-default Enhanced halftone setting.  
Gamma  
Correction  
This option allows you to choose the amount of  
gamma correction for the printer. Choices are  
Gamma71 (0)  
Gamma53 (1)  
Gamma80 (2)  
Gamma106 (3)  
None  
(4)  
The default is None. The factory-default None set-  
ting should not be changed if you are using the fac-  
tory-default Enhanced halftone setting. Otherwise,  
the gamma setting should correspond to the printer  
default halftone chosen. (For example, when the 53  
lpi x 45° halftone is selected, the Gamma53 gamma  
setting should be selected.)  
Administration/Emulations/Lineprinter  
Twelve configuration choices are available:  
Font  
In this submenu, you can enter the name of a font (any  
PostScriptfont on theprinter)to be usedfor Lineprinter  
jobs. The factory default is Courier. To see a list of  
PostScript fonts available, print an advanced status  
page from the front control panel (from the  
Administration/Special Pages/Print Status submenu).  
Point Sz  
100ths  
Sets the five-digit value used to specify the point size  
of the font for the current print job. The range is from  
00400 (4 points) to 25600 (256 points). The default is  
00880 (8.8 points).  
Character  
Maps  
Specifies the type of character map to be used. The  
choices are ASCII and EBCDIC. The default is ASCII.  
4 - 3 0  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Line  
Numbering  
Specifies that a five-digit number is to be prefixed to  
the beginning of each line. The choices are On and Off.  
Off is the default.  
Tab  
Stops  
Specifies the number of spaces between tab stops. The  
minimum is 0 and the maximum is 256. The default is  
8.  
LF IS CRLF  
CR IS CRLF  
Stipulates whether each line feed in the print job is  
translated to a carriage return/linefeed combination.  
The choices are On and Off. On is the default.  
Determines whether each carriage return in the print  
job is translated to a carriage return/line feed  
combination. The choices are On and Off. Off is the  
default.  
FF IS CRFF  
Stipulates whether each form feed in the print job is  
translated to a carriage return/form feed combination.  
The options are On and Off. On is the default.  
Orientation  
Autowrap  
Specifies whether text is printed Portrait or Landscape.  
The default is Portrait.  
Indicates whether long lines are to be wrapped onto the  
next lineinstead of being truncated. The options areOn  
and Off. The default is on.  
Lines  
Per Page  
Specifies the number of lines printed on a page before  
an automatic page eject. Interline spacing is set to the  
selected point size. Logical pages consisting of more  
lines than specified are split into multiple pages. The  
minimumLinesPerPage settingis1, andthemaximum  
is 128. The default is 87.  
Margins  
This option defines the left, right, top, and bottom  
margins from 0 to 17 inches. The minimum setting is  
0 and the maximum is 1700. The default is 0.  
Administration/Emulations/HP-GL  
Fifteen configuration choices are available. The QMS Crown  
TechnicalReference (anoptionalmanual available fromyourQMS  
vendor) has more information on HP-GL.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Plotter  
Choices include 7550A (the factory default), 7475A,  
7470A, and ColorPro.  
Scaling  
Percent  
Choices range from 1 to 150 percent of the original  
size. The default is 100 percent.  
NOTE: To scale plots, select the paper size originally  
used for the plot in the Paper Type menu; then enter the  
reduction or enlargement needed to fit the plot on the  
new page in the Scaling Percent menu. If necessary,  
enter new x,y coordinates in the Origin menu to  
reposition the plot on the page.  
Origin  
Choices range from 0 to 850 to the right (x direction)  
and 0 to 1100 upward (y direction) in.001" increments.  
In normal orientation, the 0,0 origin point is the  
lower-left corner (when the page is viewed in  
landscape orientation) of the imageable area. The  
default values are 0000 in the x direction and 0000 in  
the y direction.  
Reverse  
Image  
This option applies only to monochrome printing.  
Choices are off (black on a white background) and on  
(white on a black background). The default is off.  
Enhanced  
Mode  
This option allows you to choose enhanced resolution  
for HP-GL output. Choices are off (standard resolution  
for fixed- and variable-spaced fonts, 4 x 8 grid) and on  
(enhanced resolution for variable-spaced fonts, 26 x 36  
grid). The default is off. Use the enhanced mode for  
7550A plotter emulation.  
Expand  
Mode  
Choices areoffand on(default scalingpoints,hard-clip  
plotting range, and maximum plotting area are all  
expanded). The default is off.  
Paper Type  
Pens 1-8  
Choices are A, A3, A4, B, and Scale to Paper (the  
factory default). Select the media size for which the  
plot was originally created.  
Pen width choices range from .1 mm to 6 mm, in 0.1  
mm increments (you can also enter a value of 0 for a  
1-pixel wide line). Color choices are black, violet,  
brown, 25% gray, 50% gray, 75% gray, red, orange,  
yellow, green, blue, cyan, and magenta.  
4 - 3 2  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
The default pen width is 07 (0.7 mm) for pen 1 and 03  
(0.3 mm) for all other pens. The default color settings  
are as follows: pen 1-black, pen 2-black, pen 3-red, pen  
4-green, pen 5-blue, pen 6-violet, pen 7-orange, and  
pen 8-brown.  
Administration/Emulations/HP PCL 5C  
See the QMS Crown Technical Reference and the HP PCL 5  
Emulation Technical Reference (optional manuals available from  
your QMS vendor) for more information on HP PCL. Also, the HP  
PCL 5C Technical Support Notes, available free through our  
bulletin board, Q-FAX, and CompuServe, has information on HP  
PCL 5C.  
Default  
Font  
Sets the printer default fonts. Choices are Courier 10  
point (12 pitch), Courier 10 Bold, Courier 10 Italic,  
Courier 12 point (10 pitch), Courier 12 Bold, Courier  
12 Italic, Times, Times Bold, Times Italic, Times Bold  
Italic, Universe, Universe Bold, Universe Italic,  
Universe Bold Italic, Universe Condensed, Universe  
Condensed Bold, Universe Condensed Italic, Universe  
Condensed Bold Italic, Lineprinter (8.5 point, 16.66  
pitch), and Select by Index. The Courier and  
Lineprinter fonts are bitmapped; the others are  
scalable. The default is Courier 12 point (10 pitch).  
Symbol  
Set  
Sets the value for the character set used by PCL 5C  
jobs. Choices include Roman-8, PC-850, PC8-US,  
PC8-DN, ECMA-94, Legal, HP German, HP Spanish,  
ISO 2, ISO 4, ISO 6, ISO 10, ISO 11, ISO 14, ISO 15,  
ISO 16, ISO 17, ISO 21, ISO 25, ISO 57, ISO 60, ISO  
61, ISO 69, ISO 84, ISO 85, Desktop, PS Math, Math  
8, Microsoft-Pub, PI-Font, PS-Text, Ventura-Intl,  
Ventura-Math, Ventura-US, Windows, PS-Zapf-  
Dingbats, Ventura-Dingbats, Zapf-Dingbats100,  
Zapf-Dingbats200, Zapf-Dingbats300. The default is  
Roman-8.  
Lines  
Per Inch  
Sets the number of lines printed per inch. The factory  
default is 6.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Line  
Termination  
Adds an indicator that controls the way the printer  
interprets CR (carriage return) and LF (line feed)  
characters. The options are CR=CR, LF=LF;  
CR=CR+LF, LF=LF; CR=CR, LF=CR+LF; CR or  
LF=CR+LF. The factory default is CR=CR, LF=LF.  
Point Size  
x100  
Identifies the point size in hundredths and is selectable  
in increments of 25. The minimum value is 25, the  
maximum is 99975, and the default is 1200.  
Retain  
Temporary  
Allows you to choose whether or not to retain  
temporary PCL 5C macros and fonts at the end of each  
print job. The options are on (save the temporary  
macros and fonts) and off (temporary fonts and macros  
are deleted at the end of each job). The default value is  
off.  
Scalable  
Fonts  
Specifies whether to enable or disable the printing of  
PCL 5 scalable fonts. The choices are enable (the  
factory default) and disable. When you enable this  
option and print PCL 4 documents, PCL 5 may  
substitute scalable fonts that could cause your PCL 4  
documents to print incorrectly. When this option is  
disabled, fonts are bitmapped. This option is designed  
to be used for PCL 4 documents that print incorrectly  
under PCL 5.  
Default  
Font IDX  
Sets the default font index when Select by Index is  
chosen in the Default Font menu. It is a numeric value  
with a minimumsettingof 0, a maximum of 32767, and  
default of 0.  
Monochrome Determines whether HP-GL 2 documents are printed  
GL/2  
in shades of gray (on) or color (off); the default is color  
(off).  
Default:  
Off  
Pen Color Defaults:  
Pen 0 = White  
Pen 1 = Black  
Pen 2 = Red  
Pen 3 = Green  
4 - 3 4  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Pen 4 = Yellow  
Pen 5 = Blue  
Pen 6 = Magenta  
Pen 7 = Cyan  
Range:  
On  
Sets the printer to monochrome (2 pen).  
Off  
Sets the printer to color (8 pens).  
When set to on, the printer maps each pen to its as-  
signed color, then converts the color to a grayscale  
using the National Television System Committee  
(NTSC) color standard for luminosity coefficients  
(Additive System): Y = .3R + .59G + .11B  
Example of how to use the Color Standard: Formula  
White  
Black  
Red  
Y = [(1*0.3) + (1*0.59) + (1*0.11)]100% gray  
Y = [(0*0.3) + (0*0.59) + (0*0.11)]0% gray  
Y = [(1*0.3) + (0*0.59) + (0*0.11)]30% gray  
Y = [(0*0.3) + (1*0.59) + (0*0.11)]59% gray  
Y = [(1*0.3) + (1*0.59) + (0*0.11)]89% gray  
Y = [(0*0.3) + (0*0.59) + (1*0.11)]11% gray  
Y = [(1*0.3) + (0*0.59) + (1*0.11)]41% gray  
Y = [(0*0.3) + (1*0.59) + (1*0.11)]70% gray  
Green  
Yellow  
Blue  
Magenta  
Cyan  
Download  
Location  
Controls the default storage location of PCL objects  
(fonts, macros, and patterns) when not otherwise  
specified through QMS Document Option Commands  
(DOCs). Choices are Disk (all downloaded PCL  
objects are stored in the default disk resource, if  
present) and Memory (all downloaded PCL objects are  
stored in temporary storage in RAM). Disk is the  
default setting. DOCs specifying resources override  
this optionon a per-jobbasis. Ifthisoption is set toDisk  
and no hard disk is installed, memory is used as the  
default storage location. If the printer has both a hard  
disk and a large amount of memory, setting this option  
to Memory enhances printer performance. See QMS  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 3 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Document Option Commands for more information on  
DOC.  
Other Optional Emulations  
If you have an optional emulation installed, such as LN03 Plus, see  
the documentation that came with it for a description of the options  
under the Administration/ Emulations menu. The QMS Crown  
Technical Reference and QMS Document Option Commands  
(optional manuals available from your QMS vendor) also have  
information on optional emulations.  
Administration/Emulations/ESP Default  
This setting tells the printer what emulation to default to if the  
printer’s emulation sensing technology is unable to identify the  
emulation needed for a particular job. Default emulation options  
include PostScript, PCL 5C, HP-GL, and Lineprinter. Optional  
emulations,suchasLN03Plus, appearonly ifinstalled.Thefactory  
default emulation for ESP is PCL 5C. Any change to this option  
takes effect only after turning the printer off and on again.  
4 - 3 6  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Administration/Special Pages  
ADMINISTRATION  
SPECIAL PAGES  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
SPECIAL PAGES  
PRINT STATUS  
SPECIAL PAGES  
SPECIAL PAGES  
STATUS PAGE TYPE  
REGISTRATION PG  
SPECIAL PAGES  
TRAILER INPUTBIN  
SPECIAL PAGES  
SAMPLE PAGE  
SPECIAL PAGES  
TRAILER PAGE  
SPECIAL PAGES  
HEADER PAGE  
SPECIAL PAGES  
HEADER INPUTBIN  
Fig. 4.8 Special Pages Submenu  
Administration/Special Pages/Print Status  
Use this option to print a printer-status page. The standard status  
page lists printer identification information and settings, current  
memory configuration, timeout values, communication settings,  
and input buffer sizes. It also has tickmarks for measuring the  
printer’s alignment. The advanced status page option has the same  
information as the standard one with the addition of configuration  
menu settings, fonts, and downloaded emulations. The  
Administration/Special Pages/Status Page Type menu, discussed  
later in this section, controls which type, standard or advanced,  
prints. For more details, see “The Status Pages” in chapter 5.”  
Administration/Special Pages/Registration Pg  
This option controls the printing of a registration page. This page  
allows you to check color registration (placement of each of the  
process colors on the page). Color marks going around the outside  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 3 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
of the page demonstrate horizontal and vertical color registration.  
Circles in the center of the page demonstrate cyan, magenta, and  
yellow color mixtures and red, green, and blue color mixtures.  
Administration/Special Pages/Sample Page  
This option controls the printing of a sample page. This page gives  
the current screen frequency and halftone angles settings for the  
printer. A bar that illustrates printing with these settings prints  
across the bottom of the page.  
Administration/Special Pages/Header Page  
This option controls the printing of a header banner page before  
each job. This page contains the following: printer name, selected  
interface, job identification, title, submitting computer, job owner,  
routing message, start time/date, application used, creation  
time/date, copyright date, versionnumber,jobsubmission time,job  
start time, and printer product name/logo. For details on this page  
and what it monitors, see “Header and Trailer Pages” in chapter 5.  
This option is either on or off; the factory default is off.  
NOTE: The information on header pages for this printer can be  
customized; QMS Crown Document Option Commands  
(an optional manual available from your QMS vendor)  
contains more information on customizing separator  
pages.  
Administration/Special Pages/Header Inputbin  
You can select the inputbin (tray or cassette) from which the printer  
pulls media when printing the header page. Choices are upper and  
lower. Upper is the factory default.  
NOTE: If you used the Administration/Engine/Inputbin x Name  
option to change the names of the input bins, these names  
replace upper and lower in the message window.  
4 - 3 8  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Administration/Special Pages/Trailer Page  
This option controls the printing of a trailer banner/error page for  
each print job. A trailer page helps you monitor jobs. Think of it as  
an accounting or tracking system. For details on this page and what  
it monitors, see “Header and Trailer Pages” in chapter 5. The trailer  
page also lists any errors generated by the printer while processing  
or printing your document.  
This option can be set to off, on, on error, and errors only with the  
default being off. Setting this option to on error prints a trailer page  
(with error messages generated during processing and printing of  
your job) only if any error occurred. Setting it to errors only prints  
error messages on the trailer page and omits other trailer page  
information.  
Administration/Special Pages/Trailer Inputbin  
You can select the inputbin (tray or cassette) from which the printer  
pulls media when printing the trailer page. Choices are upper and  
lower. Upper is the factory default.  
NOTE: If you used the Administration/Engine/Inputbin x Name  
option to change the names of the input bins, these names  
replace Upper and Lower in the message window.  
Administration/Special Pages/Status Page Type  
This option controls the type of status page to print. The options  
are standard (the default) or advanced. See  
“Administration/Special Pages/Print Status” earlier in this section  
for a description of the two types of status pages.  
Administration/Startup Options  
This menu(fig.4.9) allows youto configureyourprinter to perform  
certain actions automatically when it is turned on.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 3 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4  
ADMINISTRATION  
STARTUP OPTIONS  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
STARTUP OPTIONS  
DO START PAGE  
STARTUP OPTIONS  
DO ERROR HANDLER  
STARTUP OPTIONS  
DO SYS START  
Fig. 4.9 Startup Options Submenu  
Administration/Startup Options/Do Start Page  
This option allows you to enable and disable the start-up page.  
Choices are yes and no. The factory default is yes.  
Administration/Startup Options/Do Sys Start  
If you have a hard disk and Do Sys Start is enabled, whenever the  
printer is turned on, the controller checks the hard disk for a  
SYS\START file and executes this file. Choices for Do Sys Start  
are yes and no. The factory default is yes. More information on  
creating a SYS\START file is available in the QMS Crown  
TechnicalReference (anoptionalmanual available fromyourQMS  
vendor) and from Q-FAX. See appendix A, “QMS Customer  
Support,” for information on Q-FAX.  
Administration/Startup Options/Do Error Handler  
When this option is enabled, if a PostScript error occurs during a  
PostScript print job, a page is generated reporting the error. This  
information is used by QMS technicians (or users familiar with  
4 - 4 0  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
PostScript) for troubleshooting. The PostScript Language  
Reference Manual (Adobe Systems, Reading, MA:  
Addison-Wesley, 1990. ISBN 0-201-18127-4) contains more  
information on PostScript errors. Choices for this option are yes  
and no. The factory default is no.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 4 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Administration/Memory  
This section briefly explains what each memory client does. See  
appendix D, “Additional Technical Information,” for detailed  
information on the printer’s memory and what benefits, if any, may  
result from adding memory to a particular client.  
ADMINISTRATION  
MEMORY  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
MEMORY  
K MEM FOR SPOOL  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MB PRINTER MEM  
K MEM FOR PSHEAP  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
K MEM DISK CACHE  
K MEM PS FONTS  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
K MEM FRAMEBUFF  
K MEM EMULATION  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
K MEM DISPLAY  
K MEM EMUL TMP  
Fig. 4.10 Memory Submenu  
To find out how memory is currently allocated, print a status page  
(this option is in the Administration/Special Pages menu) or check  
each client individually in the Configuration menu. The printer  
automatically reallocates added or freed memory to either the  
Display List or the Frame Buffer client, whichever asks for it first.  
This is the best place for it for most users, but it can be reallocated  
to other memory clients.  
Keep in mind, though, that misallocating memory may hinder  
printer performance, and that the printer engine’s fastest speed is  
4 - 4 2  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
3 pages per minute for 2- or 3-color jobs, 2 pages per minute for  
4-color, and 8 pages per minute for black and white, no matter how  
you configure the memory. If you try to set a memory client below  
a minimum required value or above a maximum allowable value,  
the message INCORRECT VALUE appears in the message  
window.  
Administration/Memory/K Mem for Spool  
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the spooling buffers.  
Incoming print job data is stored in this memory client until it is  
processed and printed. The size range and default varies depending  
upon the amount of RAM available on your system. (Also, see the  
“Administration/Disk Operations/Spool Overflow” later in this  
section.)  
Administration/Memory/K Mem for PSHeap  
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the PostScript  
emulation interpreter. This memory holds downloaded PostScript  
emulation fonts, operators, and forms. The size range and default  
varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your  
system. This memory client is also known as virtual memory.  
Administration/Memory/K Mem PS Fonts  
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to caching previously  
scaled bitmap representations of fonts for the PostScript emulation  
interpreter. This reduces the numberof times aPostScript font must  
be converted from outline form to bitmap form, thus reducing  
processing time. The size range and default varies depending upon  
the amount of RAM available on your system.  
Administration/Memory/K Mem Emulation  
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to non-PostScript  
emulations for temporary storage and for loading optional  
emulations. The size range and default varies depending upon the  
amount of RAM available on your system. If you are using the  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 4 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
optional CCITT emulation, this value should be increased by 200  
KB.  
Administration/Memory/K Mem Emul Tmp  
This is the amount of RAM (KB) to be used by non-PostScript  
emulations for storing downloaded fonts. The size range and  
default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on  
your system.  
Administration/Memory/K Mem Display  
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the display lists. The  
display list client holds the intermediate representation of pages to  
be printed in compressed blocks of data. The size range and default  
varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on your  
system.  
Administration/Memory/K Mem Framebuff  
This is the amount of system RAM (KB) dedicated to the frame  
buffers. This client holds rasterized pages that are ready to be  
transferred to the print engine. The amount of frame buffer storage  
affects the maximum size of any single page. The size range and  
default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available on  
your system. For example, the factory default setting for a printer  
with 12 MB of RAM is the amount of memory necessary to print  
a four-color letter- or A4-size page in 300 dpi resolution. The  
factory default setting for a printer with 24 MB of RAM is the  
amount necessary to print a four-color letter- or A4-size page in  
600 dpi resolution.  
Administration/Memory/K Mem Disk Cache  
This is the amount of RAM (KB) dedicated to the disk cache, the  
area in which frequently used data is stored so it does not have to  
be continually read from and written to a hard disk (either the  
standardinternaldrive or anoptionalexternaldrive). Thesizerange  
4 - 4 4  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
and default varies depending upon the amount of RAM available  
on your system.  
If not enough memory is available for this client, some or all of the  
optional hard disks may not be accessible and/or an insufficient  
number of disk cache blocks may be available.  
Administration/Memory/MB Printer Mem  
This memory client cannot be changed: it is the amount of RAM  
installed in the printer that is available to be split among the other  
memory clients.  
NOTE: This isn’t the same as the amount of physical RAM  
present in the printer. Because the downloaded system  
software occupies approximately 3 MB, the amount of  
physical RAM required will be 3 MB more than the  
amount of RAM available to configurable memory  
clients.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 4 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Administration/Engine  
ADMINISTRATION  
ENGINE  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
ENGINE  
IMAGE ALIGNMENT  
ENGINE  
ENGINE  
DEFAULT PAPER  
CLEAR WARNING  
ENGINE  
ENGINE  
DEFAULT RESOLUTION  
OUTPUTBIN NAME  
ENGINE  
ENGINE  
PAGE RECOVERY  
INPUTBIN 2 NAME  
ENGINE  
ENGINE  
MAN FEED TIMEOUT  
INPUTBIN 1 NAME  
Fig. 4.11 Engine Submenu  
4 - 4 6  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
Administration/Engine/Image Alignment  
The Image Alignment option allows you to adjust the horizontal  
and vertical placement of printed images. To check image  
alignment, print a standard status page (this option is located in the  
Administration/Special Pages menu). When the printer is placing  
images properly, the alignment tickmarks at the lower left of a  
status page are 0.5"/12.7 mm from the left and bottom edges of the  
page. If the tickmarks are off, use this option to align the image  
horizontally and vertically in pixel increments (1300" or .08 mm),  
from 000 to 300 pixels (300 pixels = 1" or 25.4 mm). The factory  
default settingis 100. Valuesabove100move the image to theright  
(for horizontal alignment) or down (for vertical alignment); values  
below 100 move the image left (for horizontal alignment) or up (for  
vertical alignment). See “Entering Alphanumeric Values,” earlier  
in this chapter, if you’re not sure how to enter a number in the  
message window.  
NOTE: Engine constraints may limit the accuracy of pixel  
alignment.  
Administration/Engine/Default Paper  
Default Paper specifies a media size for the printer to use if it does  
not recognize the size specified for a job. The choices are letter and  
A4. The factory default is letter. Change the default to A4 if you  
print on metric-size media.  
Administration/Engine/Inputbin 1 Name  
Use this option to assign a name to the standard paper cassette  
(input bin). For example, you may want to name it “Letterhead” if  
you always keep letterhead paper in that cassette. The factory  
default is upper.  
Administration/Engine/Inputbin 2 Name  
Usethisoptiontoassignanametotheoptionallower cassette(input  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 4 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
bin). For example, you may want to name it “Plain” if you always  
keep plain paper in that cassette. The factory default is lower.  
Administration/Engine/Outputbin Name  
Even though there is only one output bin (the output tray), you may  
want to use this option to assign a name to the outputbin on the top  
of your printer. The factory default is upper.  
Administration/Engine/Clear Warning  
Use this option to clear a status message that doesn’t automatically  
clear after the related corrective action is taken; for example, TOP  
COVER OPENclears after you close the top cover, but REPLACE  
BELTdoes not clear automatically after a new OPC belt cartridge  
is installed. Options in this menu include all status messages that  
don’t automatically clear. Select the message that you want to clear  
after correcting the specified status. See “Status Messages” in  
chapter 9 for details.  
NOTE: If youclear REPLACE FUSERor 100K CHECKUP, the  
counter that tracks that particular service resets to 0 and  
the message does not reappear until after another  
complete cycle. If you continue to use the printer without  
the proper maintenance or part replacement, print quality  
can deteriorate, and the wear on the printer can shorten  
the printer’s life.  
Administration/Engine/Default Resolution  
This option allows you to choose either 600 or 300 dpi printing.  
The factory default setting is 600 dpi. If you purchased a printer  
with 12 MB RAM, you can print color or monochrome documents  
in 300 dpi or you can print monochrome documents in 600 dpi.  
You must upgrade printer RAM to be able to print color documents  
in 600 dpi. (See appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” for  
specific information on RAM requirements and color resolution.)  
If you want to print 600 dpi monochrome documents on a printer  
4 - 4 8  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
with 12 MB RAM, make sure you select Monochrome in the  
Operator Control/Color Model menu. Also, if you change the  
resolution, you should choose the appropriate halftone setting and  
gamma correction setting for best results.  
Administration/Engine/Page Recovery  
Use this option to enable or disable page recovery. The default is  
enabled.Enabling pagerecoverycausestheprinterto automatically  
reprint jammed pages (as long as the printer is not turned off while  
the jammed is being cleared). You may want to disable jam  
recovery to free up printer memory, and enhance performance.  
Administration/Engine/Manfeed Timeout  
This refers to the number of seconds the printer waits for media to  
be inserted in the manual feed slot before abandoning the job. This  
variable has a minimum value of 00000 (no timeout), a maximum  
of 00300, and a factory default of 00060.  
Administration/Engine/Energy Saver  
The Energy Saver option specifies whether the printer changes to  
a lower-power state (the engine remains on, but the fuser turns off)  
after the printer is inactive for a user-defined length of time. The  
options are Off, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 2 hours, or 3 hours  
(of idle time before activation of low-power state). The factory  
default setting is 60 minutes. If you have an Energy Star version  
of the printer (look for a label with the Energy Star logo on the back  
of the printer), Energy Saver causes printer power consumption to  
drop to less than 45 W. If you don’t have the Energy Star version  
of the printer, thenEnergySavercausesprinter powerconsumption  
to drop to about 147 W. When a print job is received, the printer  
returns to normal power in about 90 seconds.  
NOTE: The addition of some optional interfaces, in some  
combinations, may cause the product to become  
non-Energy Star compliant.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 4 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Administration/Miscellaneous  
The Miscellaneous menu (fig. 4.12) allows you to restore factory  
defaults, protect current defaults, and choose a message window  
language.  
ADMINISTRATION  
MISCELLANEOUS  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
MISCELLANEOUS  
RESTORE DEFAULTS  
MISCELLANEOUS  
MISCELLANEOUS  
PERMANENT CHANGE  
KEYPAD LANGUAGE  
Fig. 4.12 Miscellaneous Submenu  
Administration/Miscellaneous/Restore Defaults  
This option allows you to reset all configuration values to their  
original factory defaults. The choices are yes and no; the factory  
default is no. During this process, which takes several minutes to  
complete, the printer reinitializes itself.  
If the Configuration menu locks up and you cannot access this  
option, you can reset all configuration values to their factory  
defaults by simultaneously holding down the and Online/Offline  
keys (for about 10 seconds) while turning the printer off and on  
again.  
Administration/Miscellaneous/Permanent Change  
If set to off, this option prevents a print job from making permanent  
4 - 5 0  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
configuration changes to the printer’s non-volatile memory. PS  
Executive Series Utilities (the host software that comes with your  
printer) is an example of a program that generates print jobs to  
change the printer’s non-volatile memory, where printer defaults  
are stored. Non-volatile means data in this memory remains even  
if the printer is turned off and back on. Setting this option to on  
allows print jobs to change the non-volatile memory. The choices  
are on and off; the factory default is off.  
Administration/Miscellaneous/Keypad Language  
This option allows you to set the language in the message window  
to English, French, German, or Spanish. The factory default  
message window language is English. Changing the keypad  
language will cause the printer to re-initialize automatically.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 5 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Administration/Disk Operations  
This menu (fig. 4.13) controls the internal hard disk as well as any  
optional hard disk(s) attached to the printer’s SCSI port. See  
chapter 8, “Printer Options,” for more information about using the  
Disk Operations menu. The QMS Crown Technical Reference (an  
optional manual available from your QMS vendor) also contains  
information about hard disks.  
ADMINISTRATION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
DISK OPERATIONS  
INSTALL OPTION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
COLLATION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
REMOVE OPTION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
SPOOL OVERFLOW  
DISK OPERATIONS  
FORMAT DISK  
Fig. 4.13 Disk Operations Submenu  
NOTE: If an error occurs during disk operations, an error  
message displays until the Menu key is pressed. The  
operation must then berestarted from the beginning.Two  
error messages you may see are READ FAILURE(the  
drive has encountered a read error) and WRITE ERROR  
(either the hard disk had a write error or there is no room  
for data on the hard disk or in RAM).  
4 - 5 2  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
CAUTION: If you connect to this printer an external hard disk you  
previously used with an earlier QMS Crown printer, this QMS  
magicolor LX printer software automatically reorganizes the files  
on the hard disk when the printer is turned off and back on again.  
After this reorganization, the files on the hard disk can no longer  
be accessed if the hard disk is reattached to the earlier QMS Crown  
printer. This reorganization takes time. Don’t interrupt the reor-  
ganization, because all files on the disk might be lost.  
Administration/Disk Operations/Install Option  
The Install Option command is used to add options, such as fonts  
and emulations, to the hard disk. See “Installing an Optional Card  
Font or Emulation” in chapter 8 for more details.  
Administration/Disk Operations/Remove Option  
The Remove Option command is used in removing options  
previously installed on the hard disk. Selecting this option removes  
all the files that are a part of the option. See “Removingan Optional  
Card Font or Emulation” in chapter 8 for more details.  
Administration/Disk Operations/Format Disk  
The Format Disk command is used to format a hard disk.  
If the FORMAT FAILEDmessage displays in themessagewindow  
during the Format Disk operation, the disk cannot be used. Press  
the Menu key to remove the message and contact your QMS  
vendor. See “Formatting the Internal Hard Disk” and “Formatting  
an External Hard Disk” in chapter 8 for more details.  
Administration/Disk Operations/Spool Overflow  
The Spool Overflow submenu allows you to specify which disk  
and how much disk space is to be used to spool print jobs when the  
job cannot be accommodated by RAM. Memory for spool buffers  
is defined in the K Mem for Spool menu option (in the  
Administration/Memory menu, which is explained earlier in this  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 5 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
chapter). The printer must be turned off and on again for the new  
value to take effect.  
Size (Meg)  
Use this option to choose the number of megabytes of  
disk spaceallocated (inadditiontoRAM)tospoolprint  
job data. Values range from 0 to 256 with a default of  
10 MB.  
Location  
Use this option to specify which disk to use for  
temporary spooling storage when an additional hard  
disk is available. The choices are DSK0 through DSK6  
(the internal hard disk, the default).  
Administration/Disk Operations/Collation  
The Collation submenu allows you to specify which disk and how  
much of that disk should be used to store collated print jobs when  
the jobs can’t be accommodated by RAM. Collation is selected in  
the Operator Control/Collation menu (described earlier in this  
chapter). Turn the printer off and back on again for the value to  
take effect. (See “Collating” in chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily  
Operations” for more details.)  
Size (Meg)  
Use this option to choose the number of megabytes of  
disk space allocated (in addition to RAM) on which to  
store collated print jobs. Ten megabytes of collation  
disk space is probably sufficient for most printing  
applications. Values range from 00 to 50 with a default  
of 10 MB.  
Location  
Use this option to specify which disk to use for  
temporary storage of collated jobs when an additional  
hard disk is available. The choices are DSK0 through  
DSK6 (the internal hard disk, the default).  
The Optional Features Menus  
If you install a printer option (for example, a network interface  
card), it may affect printer configuration and the Configuration  
4 - 5 4  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 4  
menu. Depending on what option you install, you may have new  
menus and options in the Configuration menu, which allow you to  
control the new option. See the documentation accompanying your  
option to learn exactly how it affects the Configuration menu.  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 5 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4  
Document Option Commands  
Your printer offers a wide range of capabilities for designing and  
printing documents. However, applications and printer emulations  
differ in their ability to access some of these document printing  
capabilities. Document Option Commands (DOCs) provide a way  
to access printer features that cannot be accessed by your  
application or your printer emulations.  
System administratorscanuseDOCsalong with the host’snetwork  
management software to generate personalized header pages for  
custom print queues or to activate special printer features for each  
user.  
Following is a list of DOCs supported by the QMS magicolor LX  
printer. For more informationonthesecommands,see QMS Crown  
Document Option Commands, an optional manual available from  
your QMS vendor.  
Header/Trailer Page Commands  
Header pages  
Trailer pages  
%%IncludeFeature: header  
%%IncludeFeature: trailer  
Header/Trailer Information Commands  
Application used  
Copyright statement  
Current date  
%%Creator:  
%%CopyRight:  
%%Date:  
Date and time created  
Host computer  
Owner  
%%CreationDate:  
%%Host:  
%%For:  
Routing information  
Title  
%%Routing:  
%%Title:  
Version and revision  
%%Version:  
4 - 5 6  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 4  
HP-GL Emulation Features Commands  
Enhanced mode  
Expanding plots  
Original paper size  
Pen width and color selection  
Plotter selection  
Reverse image  
%%IncludeFeature: enhanced  
%%IncludeFeature: expand  
%%IncludeFeature: size  
%%IncludeFeature: pen  
%%IncludeFeature: plotter  
%%IncludeFeature: reverse  
%%IncludeFeature: scaling  
%%IncludeFeature: origin  
Scaling plots  
Shifting origin  
HP-PCL Emulation Features Commands  
Carriage returns*  
Font selection*  
Font by id*  
%%IncludeFeature: criscrlf  
%%IncludeFeature: font  
%%IncludeFeature: fontid  
Font storage*  
Line feeds*  
Lines per inch*  
Point size*  
Remove from disk*  
Reset to defaults  
Symbol set*  
%%IncludeFeature: resource  
%%IncludeFeature: lfiscrlf  
%%IncludeFeature: linesperinch  
%%IncludeFeature: pointsize  
%%IncludeFeature: remove  
%%IncludeFeature: reset  
%%IncludeFeature: symbolset  
Retain temporary macros/fonts %%IncludeFeature:retaintemporary  
Select monochrome  
Enable scalable fonts*  
%%IncludeFeature:monochromegl  
%%IncludeFeature:scalablefonts  
Establish resource/def. object ID* %%IncludeFeature:install  
*Indicates a DOC about which updated information is provided in  
appendix D, “Additional Technical Information.”  
Lineprinter Emulation Features Commands  
Automatic text wrap  
Carriage returns  
Font selection  
Form feed  
Line feeds  
Lines per page  
%%IncludeFeature: autowrap  
%%IncludeFeature: criscrlf  
%%IncludeFeature: font  
%%IncludeFeature: ffiscrff  
%%IncludeFeature: lfiscrlf  
%%IncludeFeature: linesperpage  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
4 - 5 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 4  
Map using ASCII or EBCDIC  
Margins  
%%IncludeFeature: map  
%%IncludeFeature: lpmargins  
Number on for 5-digit numbers %%IncludeFeature: number  
Orientation  
Point size  
Tabs selection  
%%IncludeFeature: lporientation  
%%IncludeFeature: pointsize  
%%IncludeFeature: tabs  
PostScript Emulation Features Commands  
Choose Level 1 or 2  
Default dither pattern  
%%IncludeFeature: languagelevel  
%%IncludeFeature: ditherdefault  
Printer Features Commands  
Collating print jobs  
Color model selection  
Color separations  
Copies, number of  
Emulation selection  
Media type selection  
Orientation selection  
Paper selection  
%%IncludeFeature: collate  
%%IncludeFeature: colormodel  
%%IncludeFeature: colorseparation  
%%IncludeFeature: numcopies  
%%IncludeFeature: emulation  
%%IncludeFeature: mediatype  
%%IncludeFeature: orientation  
%%IncludeFeature: input  
Output tray selection  
Resolution selection  
%%IncludeFeature: output  
%%IncludeFeature: resolution  
4 - 5 8  
P r i n t e r C o n f i g u r a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Print Media and Daily Operations  
Chapter highlights:  
Refilling the media cassette  
Manual feed  
Printing transparencies  
Printing labels  
Printing envelopes  
Printing on thick paper stocks  
Selecting and storing print media  
Collation  
Changing printer resolution  
Adjusting print density  
Cancelling and ending print jobs  
Using diagnostic and special pages  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Introduction  
This chapter covers print media handling, printing, and other daily  
printing operations.  
Refilling the Media Cassette  
This section explains how to refill the paper cassette.  
Tosee illustrationsofthesteps describedin this section, seechapter  
2, “Initial Printer Setup.”  
1. Pull the paper cassette out of the printer.  
2. Make sure the cassette size key (the slide on the back end of  
the cassette) is set for the media size that you’re loading (fig.  
5.1).  
EX LT A4 LG  
Fig. 5.1 Set the Cassette Size Key  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
5 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5  
3. From the wrapping, determine which is the printing side of  
the media; then remove a stack of media 1" (approx. 27 mm)  
or less.  
If you’re using paper, fan it to prevent the sheets from sticking  
together. (Don’t fan transparencies or labels because this can  
cause jams.)  
4. Align the edges of the stack on a flat surface and load it in the  
cassette so the top edge will lead into the printer and the  
printing side is up.  
You can load up to 250 sheets of paper or 50 transparencies.  
Label stock varies in thickness; just make sure it does not  
exceed the upper-limit load mark on the cassette.  
5. Adjust the paper guides on each side of the media so that they  
rest lightly against it without causing it to buckle.  
6. Slide the filled cassette into the printer until it is flush with the  
front of the printer.  
NOTE: Make sure the printer is configured for the media type  
(paper or transparency) you have in the cassette or print  
quality could degrade. Media type can be selected  
through the printer’s front panel.  
5 - 2  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Manual Feed  
You can feed a single sheet at a time to the printer using the  
manual-feed tray. This allows you to print ona differentmedia type  
without changing the media in the cassette, or to print on media not  
supported by the standard cassette (envelopes or thick stock).  
1. Use your application’s print setup feature to select the  
manual-feed tray and the media type you plan to use (paper  
or transparency).  
If your application doesn’t allow this, you can do it at the  
printer front panel:  
a. Press the Tray Select key until the Manual Feed LED is lit.  
b. Press the Media key until the LED for the media type you want  
(paper or transparency) is lit. (Choose the Paper setting for label  
and envelope printing.)  
If you’re printing on thick stock (paper that’s between 24 and  
43 lb [90 g/m2 and 163 g/m2]), then use the Operator  
Control/Media menu to select this media type.  
NOTE: If you select media type from the driver, the tray you’re  
printing to must already have been set from the printer’s  
front panel for the desired media type.  
2. Use your application’s print setup feature to select any other  
printing options you want.  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
5 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5  
3. Open the manual-feed tray by lightly pressing on the top-right  
corner to release the spring latch (fig. 5.2) and then tilting the  
tray out and down.  
Fig. 5.2 Open the Manual Feed Tray  
4. Move the paper guides on the manual feed tray to fit the size  
of the chosen media.  
5. Determine the printing side of the media (an arrow on the  
media wrapping should point to the printing side). Make sure  
the media is in good condition, free of folds, tears, and  
wrinkles.  
5 - 4  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
6. Insert a single sheet of media, printing side up, with the top  
edge leading into the printer, in the manual feed tray (fig. 5.3)  
until it reaches the rear of the tray inside the printer and lies  
flat.  
If you’re printing envelopes, load the envelopes printing-side  
up, so that the flap side will be on the left when the envelope  
is pulled into the printer.  
Fig. 5.3 Insert a Single Sheet  
7. Through your application, print your document.  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
5 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Printing Transparencies  
1. See “Refilling the Media Cassette” or “Manual Feed,” earlier  
in this chapter, for information on loading media.  
2. If you haven’t previously, set up the tray you want to use for  
transparency printing:  
a. At the printer front panel, press the Online/Offline key.  
b. Press the Tray Select key until the LED for tray you want to use  
for transparencies is lit on the front panel.  
c. Press the Media key until the Transparency LED is lit on the  
front panel.  
d. Press the Online/Offline key.  
3. Use your application’s print setup feature to select  
Transparency printing, and select any other printing options  
you want.  
Ifyou’reprinting from aWindowsoraMacintosh application,  
you can select transparency printing from your application if  
you use the QMS-supplied Windows orMacintosh driver. See  
chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer,” for information on  
installing the driver. Then, in the driver, select Overhead from  
the QCOLOR setup options to print from the tray you set up for  
transparencies. (YoucanselectanyoftheQCOLOR colorsetup  
options for transparency printing if you select the  
Transparency option in the Color Setup dialog box in the  
Windows driver—or, in the Macintosh driver, select  
Transparency from the Media listbox—without changing any  
other options. If you do this, the Customize option will appear  
in the QCOLOR setup listbox.)  
NOTE: Any time you select a media type from the driver, the tray  
you’re printing to must already have been set from the  
front panel for the desired media type.  
5 - 6  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5  
4. Send your job.  
Printing Labels  
For best results when printing labels, format labels through your  
application and then run a test print on plain paper to check  
formatting and avoid wasting label sheets.  
1. See “Refilling the Media Cassette” or “Manual Feed,” earlier  
in this chapter, for information on loading media in the  
cassette. Make sure you place the labels printing-side up with  
the top edge feeding into the printer first.  
2. If you haven’t previously, set up the tray you want to use for  
printing on Paper:  
a. At the printer front panel, press the Online/Offline key.  
b. Press the Tray Select key until the LED for tray you want to use  
for labels is lit on the front panel.  
c. Press the Media key until the Paper LED is lit on the front panel.  
d. Press the Online/Offline key.  
3. Use your application’s print setup feature to select Paper  
printing and any other printing options you want.  
NOTE: Any time you select a media type from the driver, the tray  
you’re printing to must already have been set from the  
front panel for the desired media type.  
4. Send your job.  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
5 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5  
Printing on Letterhead or Other Preprinted  
Media  
Print letterhead or other preprinted media the same way labels are  
printed. Make sure you place the media printing-side up with the  
letterhead edge feeding into the printer first.  
Printing on 3-Hole or Other Pre-punched  
Media  
Print 3-hole or other pre-punched media the same way labels are  
printed. Make sure you place the media printing-side up with the  
top edge feeding into the printer first.  
Printing Envelopes  
Envelopes can be printed from the manual-feed tray or from the  
optional envelope cassette. If you purchased the optional envelope  
cassette for your printer, see “Using the Envelope Cassette” in  
chapter 8, “Printer Options.”  
To print envelopes from the manual-feed tray, see “Manual Feed,”  
earlier in this chapter. Envelopes are loaded with the printing side  
up, so that the top of the envelope (the flap side) is on the left as  
the envelope is pulled into the printer.  
Printing on Thick Paper Stocks  
To print on heavy paper stocks (between 24 and 43 lb [90 g/m2 and  
163 g/m2]  
1. Set up the manual-feed tray for printing thick stock:  
5 - 8  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5  
a. Press the Online/Offline key to take the printer off line. (The  
Online/Offline LED goes out and IDLEappears in the message  
window.)  
b. Press the Menu key to enter the Configuration menu. Then press  
the Next key until the following message displays:  
CONFIGURATION  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
c. Press the Select key to choose the Operator Control menu. Then,  
press the Next key until the following message displays:  
OPERATOR CONTROL  
MEDIA  
d. Press theSelect keytoenter theMedia menu;thenpress theNext  
key until the following message displays:  
MEDIA  
FOR MANUAL BIN  
e. Press the Select key to enter the Manual Bin menu; then press  
the Next key until Thick Stock appears in the message window:  
FOR MANUAL BIN  
THICK STOCK  
f. Press the Select key to choose Thick Stock.  
g. Press the Online/Offline key to exit the Configuration menu or  
press the Menu key to back out of the Configuration menu one  
level at a time. The message window displays  
SAVE CHANGES?  
*NO  
h. Press the Next key until Yes appears in the message window;  
then press the Select key. The following message displays  
OFFLINE  
i. Press the Online/Offline key to put the printer back on line. (The  
Online LED lights.)  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
5 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
2. See “Manual Feed,” earlier in this chapter, for instructions on  
feeding media manually to the printer.  
Page Sizes, Imageable Regions and Margins  
Page Sizes  
Your printer can print on the following media sizes: letter, legal,  
executive, A4, and envelopes (DL and COM 10). (Appendix B,  
“Technical Specifications,” lists measurements for each of these  
sizes.)  
Imageable Regions and Margins  
Each size has a certain imageable region—the maximum page area  
the printer can print on. The imageable region is subject to  
hardware limits (physical page size and margins required by the  
printer engine) and to software constraints (amount of printer  
memory available). As you set page margins in your application,  
remember that they must be equal to or fall inside the printer’s  
imageable region for the page size you’re using. (Appendix B,  
“Technical Specifications,” lists measurements of imageable  
regions and margins for each media size.)  
About Legal-Sized Imageable Region  
There are two imageable regions for legal-sized pages: one for  
black and one for color. The imageable region for black on  
legal-sized pages is 8.11" x 13.61" (205.90 mm x 345.60 mm). The  
imageable region for color on legal-sized pages is an 8.11" x 11.7"  
(205.90 mm x 297.18 mm) region at the top of the page. We  
recommend that you compose color legal-sized pages so that color  
images stay in this 8.11" x 11.7" area near the top of the page, and  
use the imageable region below this for black only.  
5 - 1 0  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5  
Working Within Imageable Regions and Margins  
If you experience problems withyourfilebeingcut off(notprinting  
to the expected margins), it might be due to an imageable region  
constraint. There are two ways to compensate for imageable region  
constraints:  
1. Adjust margins, page size, or scale through your application.  
2. Use the PostScript translate and scale operators to reduce  
image size and change its placement on the page. The QMS  
Crown Technical Reference (an optional manual available  
from your QMS vendor) contains information on using  
PostScript operators.  
Selecting and Storing Media  
Media Selection  
Media versatility is one of the biggest benefits of the QMS  
magicolor LX printer. It can print on plain or laser paper,  
transparencies, labels, envelopes and thicker stocks (between 24  
and 43 lb [90 g/m2 and 163 g/m2].  
Make sure that the media you select meets the specifications listed  
in the “Media Handling” section of appendix B, “Technical  
Specifications.”  
Media Storage  
Store media according to the manufacturer’s instructions to  
optimize printer output and decrease the chance of jams during  
printing. See appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” for  
additional media storage recommendations.  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
5 - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5  
Collating  
Collating means printing multiple copies of a job in numeric order.  
The printer can deliver multiple copies of your files in collated  
order to the top cover. Figure 5.4 illustrates collated and uncollated  
stacking for two copies of a four-page file. You can select collating  
through your application, if its driver supports this option (such as  
the QMS-provided Macintosh or Windows driver), or through the  
printer front panel (see chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for  
information).  
Fig. 5.4 Collated and Uncollated Output  
Configuring the Printer for Collation  
Since a hard disk is already installed, using the hard disk for  
collation instead of system RAM greatly improves performance.  
To specify which disk and how much of that disk should be used  
for storing collated print jobs, use the Administration/Disk  
Operations/Collation menu.  
5 - 1 2  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5  
Theincreased disk spaceallowsmorecomplexandlongercollation  
sequences. However, there’s a limit on how much can be collated  
at one time. When 100 sheets are received for a print job, or when  
a complex print jobs consumes all the collation disk space, chunk  
collation occurs.  
Chunk collation breaks a print job into smaller, more manageable  
collation sections. For example in figure 5.5, copies “a” and “b” of  
each collation section must be manually combined to create one  
collated print job.  
Fig. 5.5 Chunk Collation  
The main advantages of collation are user convenience and time  
saved from not having to separate and sort individual copies of a  
print job. Each copy exists as a whole unless chunk collation  
occurs. If you print multiple jobs and choose collating, you may  
want to add header and trailer pages to separate the jobs. (See the  
“Administration/Special Pages” section in chapter 4 for details on  
how to print header and trailer pages.)  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
5 - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Changing Print Job Resolution  
You can configure the printer to use either 600 or 300 dpi  
resolution. This can be done through your application, if its driver  
supports this option (such as the QMS-provided Macintosh or  
Windows driver), or through the printer front panel (see chapter 4,  
“Printer Configuration,” for information).  
If you purchased a printer with 12 MB RAM, you can print color  
or monochrome documents in 300 dpi or monochrome documents  
in 600 dpi. To print monochrome documents in 600 dpi with 12  
MB RAM, in addition to configuring the printer for 600 dpi  
resolution, you must also configure it for monochrome printing.  
This can be done through your application or through the printer  
front panel (Administration/Engine/Default Resolution and  
Operator Control/Color Model menus).  
To print color documents in 600 dpi, you must install additional  
RAM in the printer. See appendix B, “Technical Specifications,”  
for specific information on RAM requirements and color  
resolution.  
5 - 1 4  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5  
Adjusting Print Density  
Normally, your laser printer produces a rich black or color image.  
However, you may occasionally notice a color is printing a bit light  
or dark. In this case, you may want to increase the print density (or  
contrast) setting for that color.  
NOTE: Changing the print density affects the resident color  
management system and should be done only as a last  
step to improve print quality. The normal setting is the  
center position.  
Each toner color has its own adjustment dial, so you can adjust  
colors individually. To change density settings, use the following  
procedure:  
1. Remove the top cover by lifting it up and out. Then, set the  
cover aside for now.  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
5 - 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5  
2. Locate the adjustment dials inside the printer to the front left  
(fig. 5.6).  
K
C
M
Y
Fig. 5.6 Print Density Adjustment Dials  
3. Turnthe density adjustment dialtothe left(counterclockwise)  
to lighten the print or to the right (clockwise) to darken the  
print.  
5 - 1 6  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Cancelling and Ending Print Jobs  
The Cancel key allows you to cancel the “oldest” job(s) compiling  
or printing in the printer, or to send an end-of-job indicator for a  
print job.  
NOTE: If you accidentally press the Cancel key, press the Menu  
key to tell the printer to stop cancelling a job.  
Cancelling a Print Job  
To cancel a job currently printing or compiling data, use the  
following procedure:  
1. Press the Cancel key. The following message displays in the  
message window:  
CANCELLING JOB?  
YES  
2. Press the Select or Cancel key to confirm your choice. The  
message  
YES  
IS SELECTED  
displays briefly. Then  
CANCELLING JOB  
displays until the job currently printing or compiling data is  
removed from the printer.  
Sending an End-of-Job Indicator  
To send an end-of-job indicator to the currently compiling job if  
WAITING FOR INPUT  
END JOB?  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
5 - 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 5  
displays in the message window, use the following procedure:  
NOTE: Selecting End Job won’t end a job that is still receiving  
data.Itsonlypurposeistoprovideanend-of-jobindicator  
for jobs that do not have one.  
1. Press the Cancel key. The following message displays in the  
message window:  
CANCELLING JOB?  
YES  
2. Press the Next key. The following message displays:  
CANCELLING JOB?  
END JOB  
3. Press the Select or Cancel key to confirm that jobs waiting for  
input are ended.  
5 - 1 8  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5  
Diagnostic and Special Pages  
There may be times when you want to check the current status of  
your printer, adjust the quality of your printed copy, or monitor  
print jobs. To help you do this, the printer has several types of  
diagnosticandspecialpages.Theseincludethestart-uppage, status  
pages (standard and advanced), the registration, and sample pages,  
and the header and trailer pages.  
The Start-up Page  
When you turn on your printer a start-up page prints in  
approximately 4 minutes (unless you disable this feature). This  
page gives the following information about the printer:  
The printer name  
The PostScript Level 2 emulation version number  
The firmware revision number  
The interface port settings (emulation, communication  
protocols)  
The number of typefaces stored in the printer  
The number of pages printed to date  
The amount of resident RAM  
The printer name (user-definable through PS Executive  
Series Utilities)  
A color block for each of the process colors  
The current halftone selected  
The highest possible resolution (for monochrome and  
four-color jobs) that can be printed on the currently  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
5 - 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5  
selected page size with the amount of printer RAM  
currently installed  
Disabling the Start-up Page  
After you install the printer and establish communication between  
the printer and the host, you may want to disable the start-up page  
to conserve toner, developer, and print media. You can do this  
through the printer front panel (see chapter 4, “Printer  
Configuration”) or through PS Executive Series Utilities (see the  
on-line help).  
The Status Pages  
There are twotypes of statuspages, thestandardstatus page (1page  
that gives the general setup), and the advanced status page (5 or  
more pages that lists all menu settings and fonts and emulations).  
You select the type (standard or advanced) to print through the  
Administration/Special Pages/Status Page Type menu. Then, you  
can print the selected type through the front panel  
Administration/Special Pages/Print Status menu. (See chapter 4,  
“Printer Configuration,” for details on printing from the front  
panel.)  
The standard status page lists printer identification informationand  
settings, current memory configuration, timeout values,  
communication settings, input buffer sizes, and the hard disk(s)  
status.  
The standard status page also has alignment tickmarks in the  
lower-leftcorner. When the printer is properlyaligned, these marks  
are 0.5" from the left edge and 0.5" from the bottom of the page.  
Use the Image Alignment option (located in the  
Administration/Engine menu), described in chapter 4, “Printer  
5 - 2 0  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5  
Configuration,” to change the placement of images on the page if  
necessary.  
The advanced status page has the same information as the standard  
status page, plus it lists configuration menu settings, fonts, and  
loadable emulations.  
NOTE: The sizes listed on the status pages are in bytes, so you  
must divide the numbers on the status pages by 1024 to  
get the equivalent number of kilobytes entered through  
the front panel.  
The Sample Page  
You can print a sample page through the front panel  
Administration/Special Pages menu. This page lists the current  
default halftone settings for the printer, and allows you to see the  
effect of the currently selected default halftone on shades of cyan,  
magenta, yellow, black, blue and green.  
The Registration Page  
You can print a registration page through the front panel  
Administration/SpecialPages menu. This page allowsyou tocheck  
color registration (placement of each of the process colors on the  
page). You also can print a registration page through PS Executive  
Series Utilities. See the utilities on-line documentation for more  
details, and see chapter 9, “Troubleshooting,” for information on  
troubleshooting registration problems.  
Header and Trailer Pages  
Header and trailer pages help you monitor individual jobs. Think  
of them as an accounting or tracking system.  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
5 - 2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 5  
For example,theheader (orbanner page)containsthe printername,  
selectedinterface, jobidentification,title, submittingcomputer,job  
owner, routing message, start time/date, application used, creation  
time/date, copyright date, versionnumber,jobsubmission time,job  
start time, and printer product name/logo.  
You can enable a header page through the front panel  
Administration/Special Pages/Header Page menu. See chapter 4  
for details.  
Trailer pages contain the printer’s name, selected interface, job  
identification, title, submitting computer, job owner, routing  
message, start time/date, application used, creation time/date,  
copyright date, version number, jobsubmissiontime,job starttime,  
job finish time, number of sheets printed, and printer product  
name/logo. The trailer page also lists any printer errors generated  
while processing or printing your document.  
You can enable a trailer page through the Administration/Special  
Pages/Trailer Page menu. See chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,”  
for details.  
5 - 2 2  
P r i n t M e d i a a n d D a i l y O p e r a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Consumables and Preventative Maintenance  
Chapter highlights:  
Storing and replacing consumables  
Moving the printer  
Performing preventative maintenance  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Introduction  
This chapter covers storing and replacing major consumables and  
performing preventative maintenance on your printer.  
Storing and Handling Consumables  
This section covers storing and handling the major consumables  
for your printer except for print media. Print media is covered in  
chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily Operations.”  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6  
Storing Consumables  
Table 6.1 covers storage specifications for toner, developer, and  
OPC belt cartridges.  
Storage Specifications  
Toner, Developer, and OPC Belt Cartridges  
Characteristic Normal Conditions*  
Severe Conditions**  
Temperature  
Humidity  
32˚ to 95˚ F (0˚ to 35˚ C)  
10-80% RH  
Low 14˚ to 32˚ F (-10˚ to 0˚ C)  
High 95˚ to 104˚ F (35˚ to 40˚ C)  
80-90% RH  
Period of  
Storage  
2 years after production date (includes operation life)  
Storage  
Conditions  
Unopened in a cool, dry, well-ventilated, dark place.  
Away from direct sunlight, corrosive gases, and solvents  
(alcohol, thinner, diazole).  
Away from liquids.  
* More than 90% of the entire storage period.  
** Less than 10% of the entire storage period; 48 continuous hours at most  
during any one period.  
Tab. 6.1 Storage Specifications for Cartridges  
Handling Consumables  
The following list covers handling the consumables for your  
printer.  
WARNING!  
Toner and developer are highly combustible;  
never burn them. Also, avoid inhaling loose powder or getting  
it around your eyes; it can cause respiratory problems and eye  
irritation.  
6 - 2  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6  
ACHTUNG!  
Bei Entwickler und Toner handelt es sich um  
gefährliche Pulver, die leicht entzündlich sind; sie dürfen  
deshalb niemals mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen.  
Einatmen oder Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls  
zu vermeiden, da dieses zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege,  
Haut- oder Augenreizungen führen könnte.  
Handling Conditions  
Toner and  
Developer  
Cartridges  
Dispose of toner and developer in a safe manner,  
meeting all local and federal regulations.  
Handle only one color of toner and developer at a time  
to avoid contaminating other colors.  
Use a toner vacuum to clean up powder spills in the  
printer, if necessary.  
If toner gets on your hands or clothing, lightly dust off  
as much as possible. If some remains, rinse your hands  
or washable clothing with cool water (hot water sets  
toner) to remove the rest.  
OPC Belt  
Cartridge  
Do not touch the belt with your hands; hold the  
cartridge by its green end-handle or the two green  
side-handles.  
Do not expose the belt to direct sunlight.  
Do not expose the belt to room light for longer than 2  
minutes.  
Keep the belt surface free of foreign material, such as  
dust, solvents, moisture, or corrosives.  
Avoid abrupt changes of temperature and humidity for  
the cartridge.  
Keep exposure to casual light to a minimum; for  
example, remove the top cover of the printeronly when  
necessary and replace the cover as soon as possible.  
Reinstall the pressure release and tension release pin  
sets (one on the left side and one on the right) in the  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
cartridge if it will be out of the printer for any extended  
time period. These pins protect and relieve tension on  
the belt and cleaning blade.  
Replacing Consumables  
This section explains how to replace the consumables, including  
toner, developer, OPC belt cartridges, cleaning pad, oil bottle, and  
waste toner pack. If you want to see illustrations of all the steps  
described in this section on replacing consumables, see chapter 2,  
“Initial Printer Setup.”  
NOTE: When you see status messages, including those regarding  
consumables, you do not have to turn off the printer  
unless the message calls for service intervention.  
Replacing a Toner Cartridge  
This section covers replacing a toner cartridge in your printer. You  
should replace a toner cartridge when the x TONER EMPTY  
message displays in the message window on the control panel. The  
x represents the color of the empty toner cartridge.  
The industry standard for toner measurement is quoted at 5%  
coverage for letter- or A4-size media.  
NOTE: Occasionally, you may see the x TONER EMPTY  
message when there is still toner in the cartridge, but the  
toner has merely settled so it can’t distribute evenly. This  
may happen if the printer sits without use for over several  
days.If you thinkthis maybe thecase,removethecurrent  
cartridge, shake it horizontally to redistribute the toner,  
and place the cartridge back in the printer. Then, run a  
6 - 4  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6  
test file for that color to see if it prints correctly. This  
procedure can extend the life of your cartridges.  
To replace a toner cartridge, use the following procedure:  
1. Remove the top cover (fig. 2.5).  
WARNING!  
The toner is a highly combustible powder; never  
burn it. Also, avoid inhaling loose toner or getting it around  
your eyes; it can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation.  
ACHTUNG!  
Bei dem Toner handelt es sich um ein gefähr-  
liches und leicht entzündliches Pulver; es darf deshalb niemals  
mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen. Einatmen oder  
Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu vermeiden, da  
dies zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege, Haut- oder Augen-  
reizungen führen könnte.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
2. Remove the old toner cartridge by holding it across the center,  
squeezing the sides to loosen the pins on the back side from  
the developer cartridge notches. Then, lift the toner cartridge  
straight up and out of the printer (fig. 6.1), and dispose of it  
following safety laws and regulations.  
Fig. 6.1 Remove the Old Toner Cartridge  
3. Remove the new toner cartridge from its protective bag.  
(Toner cartridges are color-coded on the top. Be sureyouhave  
the correct color cartridge.)  
4. Hold the cartridge by the ends, and shake it horizontally (fig.  
2.10). This distributes toner evenly inside the cartridge and  
helps assure quality printing.  
5. Hold and squeeze the toner cartridge across the center, and  
alignit withthedevelopercartridgeofthecorrespondingcolor  
(fig. 2.11). Make sure the toner cartridge’s color-coded pins  
line up with the notches on the developer cartridge.  
6 - 6  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
CAUTION: Neverforcea tonercartridgeonto thewrongdeveloper  
cartridge. This can damage the cartridges and the printer.  
6. Lower the toner cartridge until it fits firmly onto the notches  
on the developer cartridge.  
7. Press the top of the toner cartridge until it snaps into place  
under the two securing latches.  
8. Grasp the tab on the top of the toner cartridge.  
9. Holding the toner cartridge in place, pull the tab and attached  
clear tape straight up and completely out of the cartridge (fig.  
2.12). Then discard the tape.  
10. Set the print density dial (fig. 5.6) for the changed toner  
cartridge in the center if necessary.  
11. Replace the printer’s top cover.  
Replacing a Developer Cartridge  
A message on the control panel window, X DEV LOWindicates  
when it is time to change a developer cartridge. The x indicates  
which color should be changed. Cyan, yellow, and magenta  
developer cartridges last for approximately 15,000 pages, and  
black developer cartridges last for approximately 30,000 pages.  
NOTE: The industry standard for developer measurement is  
quoted at 5% coverage for letter- or A4-size media.  
To replace a developer cartridge, use the following procedure:  
1. Remove the printer’s top cover (fig. 2.5).  
2. Remove the toner cartridge by holding it across the center,  
squeezing the sides to loosen the pins on the back side from  
the developer cartridge notches (fig. 6.1). Then, lift the toner  
cartridge straight up and out of the printer.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
3. Set the toner cartridge aside for now, being careful to keep it  
level. Also, be sure to place it on something, such as a large  
sheet of paper, to catch loose residue.  
4. Grasp the green latches at each end of the used developer  
cartridge and raise them straight up to open them.  
5. Release the developer cartridge from its securing latches by  
pressing back on the latches while pulling forward on the  
cartridge (fig. 6.2). The securing latches are color coded  
(black, cyan, magenta, or yellow) to the color of the developer  
cartridge.  
Fig. 6.2 Release the Developer Cartridge  
6. Holding the developer cartridge by the green end-latches,  
gently lift it straight up and out of the printer, being careful  
not to spill any of the developer material. Then, discard the  
cartridge following safety laws and regulations.  
WARNING!  
The developer is a highly combustible powder;  
never burn it. Also, avoid inhaling loose developer or getting it  
6 - 8  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
around your eyes; it can cause respiratory problems and eye  
irritation.  
ACHTUNG!  
Bei dem Entwickler handelt es sich um ein ge-  
fährliches und leicht entzündliches Pulver; es darf deshalb  
niemals mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen. Einatmen  
oder Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu ver-  
meiden, da dies zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege, Haut-  
oder Augenreizungen führen könnte.  
7. Remove the new developer cartridge from its protective bag.  
8. Grasp the green latches at each end of the new developer  
cartridge and raise them straight up to open them.  
9. Holding the new developer cartridge by the green latches,  
gently lower it into the empty slot until it is securely in place  
(fig. 2.7).  
10. Close the cartridge latches by pushing them down (fig. 2.8).  
11. Grasp the green tab attached to the top of the developer  
cartridge. Then, pull the tab and attached clear tape straight  
up and out of the cartridge, and discard it (fig. 2.9).  
12. Replace the toner cartridge that you removed in step 2.  
13. Replace the printer’s top cover.  
14. Clear the x DEV LOWmessage through the control panel  
using the Administration/Engine/Clear Warning menu. See  
chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for details on using the  
control panel.  
Replacing the OPC Belt Cartridge  
This section covers replacing the OPC (Organic Photoconductor)  
belt cartridge in your printer. See “How Your Printer Works” in  
appendix D for details on what part the OPC belt plays in printing.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
A message on the control panel window, REPLACE BELT,  
indicates when it is time to change the OPC belt cartridge. This  
cartridge should be replaced every 50,000 planes or 12 months,  
whichever comes first. (A plane is a pass of the OPC belt for one  
color, so a one-color page makes one pass, a two-color page makes  
two passes, and so forth.) Changing the belt ona regular basis helps  
prevent the print quality from deteriorating.  
NOTE: You may want to clean the paper guide and the register  
and paper exit rollers at this time also. They should be  
cleaned every 20,000 copies or 12 months, whichever  
comes first. The procedures for cleaning these parts are  
given later in this chapter.  
Illustrations for many of the steps described in this section on  
replacing the OPC belt cartridge are in chapter 2, “Initial Printer  
Setup.”  
To replace the OPC cartridge, use the following procedure:  
1. Open the manual feed tray.  
2. Lift the handle of the old OPC belt cartridge up to unlock it.  
3. Pull the cartridge straight out of the printer, and discard it.  
CAUTION: The OPC belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights  
and direct sunlight. Do not remove the new cartridge from its  
protective bag until you are ready to install it. Limit exposure to  
800 lux (the average fluorescent lighting in an office) of light to  
under 2 minutes. If exposure exceeds this, put the belt in a dark  
place to recover; depending on exposure, recovery may take up to  
2 hours.  
Also, handle the belt cartridge carefully by either the two green  
side-handles or by the green end-handle. The belt is extremely  
6 - 1 0  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
sensitive to hand oils and scratches, both of which reduce print  
quality.  
4. Remove the new OPC belt cartridge from its protective bag.  
5. Remove the pressure release and tension release pin sets (one  
set on the left and one on theright)fromtheOPC beltcartridge  
by pulling them straight out (fig. 2.25).  
NOTE: These pins protect the belt and cleaning blade in the  
OPC belt cartridge by relieving tension during shipment or if  
the belt is out of the printer longer than a few hours.  
6. Make sure the green end-handle on the cartridge is turned up  
(unlocked).  
7. Slide the cartridge approximately three-quarters of the way  
into the printer until the notches on each side of the bottom  
rest on the lip of the manual feed tray (fig. 2.26).  
8. Remove the black light-shield paper from the OPC belt by  
grasping the tab on the front and pulling the paper straight out  
of the printer (fig. 2.27).  
9. Holding the cartridge by the green handle, firmly slide it the  
rest of the way into the printer until it snaps into place. It is in  
place when you can see the green arrows inside the metal  
frame of the printer.  
10. Turn the green handle on the OPC belt cartridge down to lock  
the cartridge in place.  
11. Close the manual feed tray.  
12. Clear the REPLACE BELT status message through the  
controlpanelusingtheAdministration/Engine/ClearWarning  
menu. See chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for details on  
using the control panel.  
This completes the steps for replacing the OPC belt cartridge.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Replacing the Cleaning Pad and Oil Bottle  
This section covers replacing the cleaning pad and oil bottle in your  
printer. The cleaning pad removes printing debris (such as excess  
toner and paper dust) from the fusing unit. The oil helps prevent  
toner from sticking to the fuser rollers.  
Replace the oil bottle and cleaning pad when FUSER OIL LOW  
or OUT OF OILappears in the printer’s message window. The  
first oil bottle and cleaning pad change is required atapproximately  
1,500 pages. After that, changes are required at approximately  
3,000-page intervals. Changingtheseona regular basis helps retain  
optimal print quality.  
Illustrations for many of the steps described in this section are in  
chapter 2, “Initial Printer Setup.”  
To replace the cleaning pad and oil bottle  
1. Turn off the main power switch on the back of the printer.  
2. Remove the top cover (fig. 2.5).  
3. Pull up on the paper exit unit latch and then tilt the unit back  
to open it (fig. 2.13).  
4. Pull back the two latches (one on each side) of the separator  
pawl unit to unlock it; then tilt the pawl unit back towards the  
paper exit unit (fig. 2.14).  
WARNING!  
The fuser unit can become extremely hot and  
cause severe burns. Make sure the unit is cool before handling  
it.  
ACHTUNG!  
Die Fixiereinheit kann sehr heiß werden, so daß  
Verbrennungsgefahr besteht. Bitte lassen Sie die Fixiereinheit  
einige Zeit abkühlen, bevor Sie diese berühren.  
6 - 1 2  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
5. Locate the cleaning pad in the slot above the heat roller. Then,  
while carefully avoiding the surface of the fuser unit, which  
may be hot, grasp the pad by its center tab (towards the rear  
of the unit), pull it out of the printer, and discard it (fig. 6.3).  
Fig. 6.3 Remove the Cleaning Pad  
6. Removethe newcleaning padand thenewoilbottle fromtheir  
protective bags.  
7. Holding the new cleaning pad by its center tab (towards the  
rear of the unit), align the triangle mark on the pad with the  
one on the fusing unit (fig. 2.17).  
8. Being careful to avoid any hot surface in the fuser unit, slide  
the new pad into the slot above the heat roller. The pad is  
correctly positioned when it is centered snugly in the slot.  
9. Snap the separator pawl unit closed.  
10. Pull open the spring latch on the outer edge of the oil bottle  
retainer, and lift the retainer up and toward the center of the  
printer (fig. 2.19).  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
NOTE: Normally, a little oil remainsinthe fuser slot in which  
the oil bottle rests, and the spout of the oil bottle has a seal to  
prevent oil from spilling while you remove or install a bottle  
on the pin in the fuser slot. However, if oil accidentally spills  
beyondthatslot,usea clean,dry, lint-freecloth orsome cotton  
swabs to wipe up the excess.  
11. Grasp the top tab on the oil bottle, then lift the bottle out of  
the printer, and discard it.  
NOTE: If you are replacing an oil bottle after a move, remove  
and discard the wadded paper towel from the place normally  
occupied by the oil bottle.  
12. Hold the new oil bottle, spout end down, bottle label toward  
the front of the printer, over its slot in the fuser unit (fig. 2.19).  
13. Lower the bottle into place, making sure the spout on the  
bottom aligns with the pin in the fuser slot. The bottle is  
positioned correctly when it fits snugly into the slot and is  
flush with the fuser unit.  
14. Close and latch the oil bottle retainer.  
15. Close the paper exit unit.  
16. Replace the printer’s top cover.  
17. Turn on the main power switch.  
Replacing the Waste Toner Pack  
This section covers replacing the waste toner pack in your printer.  
The packcollects excess toner fromthe printingprocess and should  
be replaced when the window on the control panel displays the  
message CHECK WASTE TONER.  
Illustrations for many of the steps described in this section are in  
chapter 2, “Initial Printer Setup.”  
6 - 1 4  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
To replace the waste toner pack  
1. Open the waste toner cover by pushing the cover on the  
top-right corner (fig. 2.22).  
2. Remove the new waste toner pack from its protective bag and  
assemble it according to the instructions accompanying it.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
3. Gently tap the old waste toner pack on its side to settle the  
toner down into the pack (fig. 6.4).  
Fig. 6.4 Tap the Waste Toner Pack  
WARNING!  
The toner is a highly combustible powder; never  
burn it. Also, avoid inhaling loose toner or getting it around  
your eyes; it can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation.  
ACHTUNG!  
Bei dem Toner handelt es sich um ein gefähr-  
liches und leicht entzündliches Pulver; es darf deshalb niemals  
mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen. Einatmen oder  
Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu vermeiden, da  
dies zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege, Haut- oder Augen-  
reizungen führen könnte.  
4. Grasp the tab on the top edge of the old waste toner pack, and  
pull it out of the printer.  
6 - 1 6  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
5. Place the old pack into the empty bag from the new waste  
toner pack and dispose of the old one following safety laws  
and regulations.  
6. Holding the new waste toner pack by the side tab on the top,  
insert the pack into the printer until it fits securely. Then, lift  
up slightly on the tab to be sure the pack is level and centered  
(fig. 6.5).  
Fig. 6.5 Lift up on Waste Toner Pack  
7. Close the waste toner cover.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Moving the Printer  
CAUTION: The printer is heavy: be sure you have help when  
moving it. Never lift it by the paper cassette slot, and always lift it  
by the four corners that have ridges for a safer, more secure grip.  
Be sure to close the manual tray.  
If there’s any chance the printer may not remain level or may be  
jostled during the move you need to do the following to protect the  
printer:  
Remove the toner and developer cartridges  
Remove the OPC belt cartridge and reinstall the pressure  
release and tension release pin sets in the cartridge  
Remove the fuser unit and the oil bottle and drain the oil  
from the unit.  
Replace the pressure-release pieces  
See the sections on replacing the toner, developer, and OPC belt  
cartridges (earlier in this chapter) and the “Removing and  
Replacing Pressure-Release Pieces” section (later in this chapter)  
for details.  
CAUTION: Make sure the OPC belt cartridge is protected while it  
is not in the printer. The belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights  
and direct sunlight. Limit exposure to 800 lux (the average fluores-  
cent lighting in an office) of light to under 2 minutes. If exposure  
exceeds this, put the belt in a dark place to recover; depending on  
exposure, recovery may take up to 2 hours. Also, handle the OPC  
belt cartridge carefully by either the two green side-handles or by  
the green handle on the end. The belt is extremely sensitive to hand  
oils and scratches, both of which reduce print quality. When you  
6 - 1 8  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
must set it down, gently lay it on a clean, lint- and dirt-free surface,  
such as on fresh paper.  
During the move, store the partially used toner and developer  
cartridges in their original shipping bags. If you do not have these  
bags, wrap the cartridges in pieces of sturdy cloth or plastic that  
cannot be harmed by loose residue. Carefully wrap the OPC belt  
cartridge in a piece of dark, heavy cloth and place it in a safe place  
where it will not get scratched or damaged.  
Removing the Fuser Unit and Oil Bottle  
Before you move the printer, you must remove the fuser unit and  
the oil bottle and drain the remaining oil from the oil tray. To do  
this  
1. Turn off the main power switch on the back of the printer.  
2. Remove the top cover (fig. 2.5).  
3. Pull up on the paper exit unit latch and then tilt the unit back  
and down to open it.  
WARNING!  
The fuser unit can become extremely hot and  
cause severe burns. Make sure the unit is cool before handling  
it.  
ACHTUNG!  
Die Fixiereinheit kann sehr heiß werden, so daß  
Verbrennungsgefahr besteht. Bitte lassen Sie die Fixiereinheit  
einige Zeit abkühlen, bevor Sie diese berühren.  
4. Pull open the spring latch on the outer edge of the oil-bottle  
retainer, and lift the retainer up and toward the center of the  
printer (fig. 2.19).  
5. Grasp the top tab on the oil bottle, then lift the bottle out of  
the printer. The bottle may leak slightly, so place it in an  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
oil-proof container, such as a plastic bag, until you are ready  
to reinstall it after the move.  
NOTE: Normally, a little oil remains in the tray in which the  
oil bottle rests. If oil accidentally spills beyond this tray into  
the printer, use a clean, dry, lint-free cloth or some cotton  
swabs to wipe up the excess.  
6. Close the oil bottle retainer.  
7. Grasp the fuser unit by the two handles, one at each end (fig.  
6.6), and lift it up and out of the printer.  
Fig. 6.6 Remove the Fuser Unit  
6 - 2 0  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
8. Align the fuser unit over an appropriate waste container, such  
as an old jar, and tilt the unit so the excess oil pours into the  
container (fig. 6.7). Then, dispose of the oil following safety  
laws and regulations.  
Fig. 6.7 Drain Oil from Fuser Unit  
9. Use a clean, dry, lint-free cloth or some cotton swabs to wipe  
any remaining oil out of the tray.  
10. Replace the fuser unit.  
11. Stuff a clean, wadded paper towel into the place normally  
occupied by the oil bottle to act as a cushion and to absorb any  
residual oil during the move.  
12. After the move, see “Replacing the Cleaning Pad and Oil  
Bottle,” earlier in this chapter, for instructions on reinstalling  
the oil bottle.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Removing and Replacing Pressure-Release Pieces  
The pressure-release pieces help relieve the tension on the fuser  
rollers to protect the roller from accidental damage during a move  
(or prolonged storage). They must be installed for the move and  
removed again before printing.  
Illustrations of many of the steps described in this section are in  
“Removing the Pressure-Release Pieces” in chapter 2, “Initial  
Printer Setup.”  
Use the following procedure to remove and replace these pieces:  
1. Open the paper exit unit by pulling up on the unit latch and  
then tilting the unit back and down (fig. 2.13).  
2. Open the separator pawl unit by pulling back the two latches  
(one on each side) to unlock them and tilting the pawl unit  
back in the direction of the paper exit unit (fig. 2.14).  
3. Open the pressure-release lever on the end of the fuser unit  
(fig. 2.15).  
6 - 2 2  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
CAUTION: If you are replacing the pressure-release pieces after  
the printer has been running, make sure the fuser unit has cooled.  
The fuser gets very hot and can damage these pieces.  
4. If you are replacing the two pressure-release pieces (one at  
each end of the fuser roller), skip to step 5.  
If you are removing the pressure-release pieces, grasp the tab  
end of one of the pieces and gently pull it up and out of the  
printer(fig. 6.8). Removethepieceattheother endofthefuser  
roller in the same manner; then, skip to step 6.  
Fig. 6.8 Remove the Pressure-Release Pieces  
WARNING!  
The fuser unit can become extremely hot and  
cause severe burns. Make sure the unit is cool before handling  
it.  
ACHTUNG!  
Die Fixiereinheit kann sehr heiß werden, so daß  
Verbrennungsgefahr besteht. Bitte lassen Sie die Fixiereinheit  
einige Zeit abkühlen, bevor Sie diese berühren.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
CAUTION: If you are replacing the pressure-release pieces after  
the printer has been running, make sure the fuser unit has cooled.  
The fuser gets very hot and can damage these pieces.  
5. If you are replacing the pressure-release pieces, hold one of  
the pieces down close to its base and firmly slide the base  
between the fuser rollers on one end (fig. 6.9). Then, repeat  
the process with the second pressure-release piece at the other  
end of the fuser rollers. When correctly positioned, the pieces  
fit snugly between the rollers.  
Fig. 6.9 Replace the Pressure-Release Pieces  
6. Close the pressure-release lever on the end of the fuser unit.  
7. Close the separator pawl unit.  
8. Close the paper exit unit.  
6 - 2 4  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Preventative Maintenance  
Table 6.2, below, shows when preventative maintenance  
procedures (described in this chapter) should be performed:  
Preventative Maintenance Schedule  
At this time...  
You should...  
Whenever print quality diminishes.  
Clean the Charger Unit.  
Clean the Precharger Unit.  
When you have printed 20,000  
copies or 12 months have passed  
since the last cleaning (whichever  
comes first).  
Clean the Register and Transfer  
Rollers.  
Clean the Paper Exit Rollers and  
Plates.  
Clean the Paper-Feed Rollers and  
Manual-Feed Belts.  
When a message mentioning a  
consumable appears in the control  
panel.  
Look up the message in chapter 9,  
“Troubleshooting,” and take the  
action recommended.  
WARNING!  
Remove the printer’s power cord from the power  
outlet before cleaning or an injury may result.  
ACHTUNG!  
Ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose  
bevor Sie den Drucker reinigen.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 2 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
General Tips for Extending Printer Life  
Do not place anything on the top of the printer.  
Keep the outputlevels in thetop cover at 150 sheets or less,  
depending upon the type of media.  
If media stacks too high, you may experience trouble with  
paper jams and excessive curl.  
If you are not going to use the printer for an extended  
period of time unplug the power cord from the power  
source outlet and close the manual feed tray.  
Cleaning the Printer  
When cleaning the printer, follow these guidelines:  
Read all caution and warning labels carefully, making sure  
to follow any instructions contained in them.  
Use a lint-free cloth dampened with a mild general cleaner  
on the exterior of the printer; do not use any organic  
solvent, such as thinner or benzene, as these can cause  
discoloration, alteration, spots on the transfer drum, or  
other problems.  
Use only lint-free paper towels, cloths, or swabs.  
After cleaning, allow all parts to dry before closing the  
printer, reattaching the power cord, and turning on the  
power switch.  
Make sure any parts removed during cleaning are replaced  
before reconnecting the power cord and turning on the  
printer.  
6 - 2 6  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 6  
Cleaning the Charger Unit  
Clean the charger unit whenever the print quality diminishes. To  
clean this unit you need several cotton cloths and swabs, and the  
wire cleaner located in the OPC belt tray (see figure 6.11 for  
location). To clean the charger unit  
1. Open the manual feed tray by lightly pressing on the top-right  
corner (fig. 6.10), and then tilt the tray out and down.  
Fig. 6.10 Open the Manual Feed Tray  
CAUTION: The OPC belt is extremely sensitive to bright lights  
and direct sunlight. Limit exposure to 800 lux (the average fluores-  
cent lighting in an office) of light to under 2 minutes. If exposure  
exceeds this, put the belt in a dark place to recover; depending on  
exposure, recovery may take up to 2 hours.  
Also, handle the OPC belt carefully, using either the two green  
side-handles or using the green end-handle when possible. It is  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 2 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
extremely sensitive to hand oils and scratches both of which reduce  
print quality. When you must set it down, gently lay it on a clean,  
lint- and dirt-free surface, such as on fresh paper for the printer.  
2. Lift the OPC belt cartridge handle up to unlock it, and pull the  
cartridge straight out of the printer (fig. 6.11).  
3. Remove the wire cleaner from the cartridge (fig. 6.11).  
Fig. 6.11 Remove the OPC Belt Cartridge  
6 - 2 8  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
4. Holding the cartridge by its edges, fold the green end-handle  
back down and set the cartridge up on that end. The cartridge  
will tilt slightly to one side.  
5. Locate the three brass-colored latches, which hold the charger  
unit in place. Then, swing each latch to the side to free the  
charger unit (fig. 6.12).  
6. Grasp the green handle on the end of the charger unit and lift  
the unit out of the cartridge (fig. 6.12). Then, place the OPC  
belt cartridge in its protective bag or a dark area to protect it  
from light and set it aside until you are ready to reinstall it.  
Fig. 6.12 Open Charger Unit Brass Latches  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
7. Use clean, dry cotton cloths to gently wipe up any loose toner  
from the OPC belt cartridge area in the printer.  
8. Clean the charger unit by sliding the wire cleaner along the  
groove in the top of the unit several times; then, flip the unit  
over and run the wire cleaner several times across the grid  
plate (a metal screen) on the bottom (fig. 6.13).  
Fig. 6.13 Clean the Charger Unit  
9. Turn the OPC belt cartridge up on the handle end again, and  
place the charger unit back into its slot.  
10. Swing the three brass latches back over the charger unit to  
hold it in place.  
11. Lift the OPC belt cartridge up and swing the green end-handle  
open.  
12. Holding the cartridge by its handle, slide it back into the  
printer until it snaps in place. The cartridge is in place when  
you can see the green arrows inside the metal frame of the  
printer.  
6 - 3 0  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
13. Push the green end-handle down to lock the cartridge in place.  
14. Close the manual feed tray.  
Cleaning the Pre-Charger Unit  
Clean the pre-charger unit whenever the print quality diminishes.  
To clean this unit you need several cotton cloths and swabs, and  
the wire cleaner located in the OPC belt tray (see figure 6.11 for  
location).  
To clean the pre-charger unit  
1. Remove the waste toner pack. (See “Replacing the Waste  
Toner Pack” in this chapter.) Then, set it aside on a surface  
that toner residue can’t hurt, such as on a piece of paper.  
WARNING!  
The toner is a highly combustible powder; never  
burn it. Also, avoid inhaling loose toner or getting it around  
your eyes; it can cause respiratory problems and eye irritation.  
ACHTUNG!  
Bei dem Toner handelt es sich um ein gefähr-  
liches und leicht entzündliches Pulver; es darf deshalb niemals  
mit offenem Feuer in Berührung kommen. Einatmen oder  
Berührung mit Haut und Augen ist ebenfalls zu vermeiden, da  
dies zu Beeinträchtigungen der Atemwege, Hautoder Augen-  
reizungen führen könnte.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
2. Grasp the end of the pre-charger unit, and pull it downward  
and then straight out of the printer (fig. 6.14).  
Fig. 6.14 Remove the Pre-Charger from the Printer  
6 - 3 2  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
3. Insert the wire cleaner into the recess on the pre-charger unit,  
and slide the cleaner back and forth as shown in figure 6.15.  
Fig. 6.15 Clean the Pre-Charger Unit  
4. Clean the inside corners of the pre-charger unit with cotton  
swabs.  
5. Making sure the pre-charger unit aligns on the runners inside  
the printer, slide it back into the printer.  
6. Reinstall the waste toner pack, and close the waste toner  
cover.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
Cleaning Register and Transfer Rollers  
Clean the metal and rubber register rollers and the transfer roller  
every 20,000 copies or 12 months, whichever comes first. This is  
roughly the same time schedule as replacing the OPC belt cartridge  
and cleaning the paper exit rollers, so you may want to do all of  
these procedures at the same time.  
All you need for this procedure are 2 or 3 pieces of lint-free, cotton  
cloth. To clean the rollers  
1. Open the back cover by pressing the top-right corner (fig.  
6.16).  
Fig. 6.16 Open the Back Cover  
6 - 3 4  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
2. Open the transfer unit by pulling the green latch handle in the  
center toward you and down (fig. 6.17).  
Fig. 6.17 Open the Transfer Unit  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 3 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
3. Using dry cotton cloths, wipe the metal register roller in the  
transfer unit and the rubber register roller in the inner section  
of the printer. Then, wipe the transfer roller in the top section  
of the transfer unit (fig. 6.18). Rotate this roller to clean all  
sides with the cloth to remove paper dust, toner buildup, and  
other debris.  
Fig. 6.18 Clean the Register Rollers  
6 - 3 6  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
4. Close the transfer unit (fig. 6.19).  
Fig. 6.19 Close the Transfer Unit  
5. Close the back cover.  
Cleaning the Paper Exit Rollers and Plates  
Clean the paper rollers and plates every 20,000 copies or 12  
months, whichever comes first. This is roughly the same time  
schedule as replacing the OPC belt cartridge and cleaning the  
register and transfer rollers, so you may want to do all of these  
procedures now too.  
All you need for this procedure are 2 or 3 pieces of dry, lint-free,  
cotton cloth. To clean the paper exit roller  
1. Open the paper exit unit (fig 2.13).  
2. Use a dry, lint-free, cotton cloth and gentle pressure to clean  
the paper exit rollers and plates (fig. 6.20). Turn the coupling  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 3 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
gear on the left end of the fuser unit to access all sides of the  
rollers.  
Fig. 6.20 Clean the Fuser Exit Rollers  
3. Close the paper exit unit.  
Cleaning the Paper-Feed Roller and the Manual-  
Feed Belts  
Clean the paper-feed roller and the manual-feed belts every 20,000  
copies or 12 months, whichever comes first, to prevent misfeeds  
and jams. This is roughly the same time schedule as replacing the  
OPC belt cartridge and cleaning the other rollers, so you may want  
to do all of these procedures at the same time.  
You need a lint-free cotton cloth, lightly dampened with water, to  
perform this procedure. To clean the rollers  
6 - 3 8  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
1. Turn off the printer and remove the power cord and all  
interface cables.  
2. Remove the media cassette.  
3. Reach into the back of the cassette slot and locate the roller:  
it’s on the top of the slot at the rear (fig. 6.21).  
4. Use the damp cloth the wipe the roller. Rotate the roller so  
that the entire surface is cleaned.  
5. Locate the manual-feed platform: it’s a black plastic tray at  
the top of the cassette slot (fig. 6.21).  
Fig. 6.21 Locate the Manual-Feed Platform  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 3 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
6. Remove the manual-feed platform by lifting it up and forward  
at the front of the platform until it drops out (fig. 6.22).  
Fig. 6.22 Remove the Manual-Feed Platform  
6 - 4 0  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6  
7. Locate the two manual-feed belts at the top of the cassette slot  
(fig. 6.21).  
8. Use the damp cloth the wipe the belts. Advance the belts so  
that the entire surface is cleaned.  
9. Slide the manual-feed platform back into place. Push it back  
into the printer until it is secure.  
10. If you have the optional 250-sheet feeder installed, repeat  
steps 2 through 4 for that cassette.  
11. Replace the media cassette.  
12. Replace the cables you removed in step 1 and replace the  
power cord.  
Cleaning the Exterior of Your Printer  
At times it may be necessary to clean the outside of your printer.  
Be sure read all of this section before cleaning your printer.  
WARNING!  
Remove the printer’s power cord from the power  
outlet before cleaning or an injury may result.  
ACHTUNG!  
Ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose  
bevor Sie den Drucker reinigen.  
To protect your printer and to maintain its appearance, make sure  
you use the following guidelines:  
Use only mild household cleaning solutions that do not  
contain alcohol or solvents.  
Use only a dry or slightly damp, lint-free cloth. Never use  
sharp or rough implements,suchaswireorplasticcleaning  
pads.  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
6 - 4 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 6  
Always spray the cleaning solution on a cloth, not directly  
on the printer.  
Always test the solution on a small area of your printer to  
check the solution’s performance.  
After cleaning, allow all parts to dry before closing the  
printer, reattaching the power cord, and turning on the  
power switch.  
6 - 4 2  
C o n s u m a b l e s a n d P r e v e n t a t i v e M a i n t e n a n c e  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optimizing Color Output  
Chapter highlights:  
QCOLOR automatic color control  
Fine-tuning color output  
Color matching  
The resident fonts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Introduction  
This chapteroffershints forautomaticcolorcontrolandfine-tuning  
color output,discussescolormatching,and lists the printer-resident  
fonts.  
QCOLOR Automatic Color Control  
As with any form of color reproduction, many variables can  
contribute to the final appearance of color laser prints. To take the  
guesswork out of optimizing color output, QMS developed  
QCOLOR, which dynamically configures the magicolor LX for the  
best output quality based on the contents of the document (text, line  
art, photographs, or scans) and the media it will be printed on.  
QCOLOR technology is accessed through our Windows or  
Macintosh driver.  
Enabling QCOLOR for Windows  
To use QCOLOR for Windows, first follow the instructions in  
“Installing the Windows 3.1 Driver” in chapter 3, “Connecting the  
Printer,” if you haven’t already. After the QMS Windows driver is  
installed, do the following to optimize color printing:  
1. Open the PostScript Printer driver dialog box.  
You can do this from the Windows Control Panel by  
double-clicking the Printers icon and then choosing the Setup  
button.Also,youcangetto thePostScript Printerdriverdialog  
box from within most Windows applications—usually by  
choosing Print Setup from the File menu, and then choosing  
the Setup or the Options button. Check your application help  
or documentation for details.  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
7 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 7  
2. In the PostScript Printer dialog box, choose your printer  
(magicolor LX) in the Printers drop-down list.  
3. Choose the Color Setup button.  
4. In the Color Control Center dialog box, choose one of the  
following:  
Automatic Color Control (if you’re printing a  
combination of document types)  
Automatic Color Control is the best option for most jobs,  
because it’s designed to provide the best color output for  
a large variety of documents. However, if for some reason  
the Automatic setting doesn’t provide satisfactory color  
output fora particular page element ordocument type, then  
select a more specific QCOLOR setting (for example,  
Overhead for overhead transparencies or Photographic for  
scanned images).  
Graphics (if you’re printing color graphics)  
Grayscale (if you’re printing images with gray shades)  
Photographic (if you’re printing photographic images)  
Text and Spot Color (if you’re printing text or spot  
colors)  
Third-Party Color Management System (CMS) (to  
allow your application to control color settings)  
Overhead (if you’re printing overhead transparencies)  
You can use any of the QCOLOR color setup options for  
transparency printing if you choose the Customize button  
and then select the Transparency option in the Color Setup  
dialog box (without changing any other options). If you do  
this,the Customizeoptionwill appearintheQCOLOR setup  
7 - 2  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
listbox when you return to the Color Control Center dialog  
box.  
NOTE: The media tray you’re using must be configured for  
themedia typeit contains. This canbedonethroughtheprinter  
front panel (in the Operator Control/Media menu). See  
chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily Operations,” for more  
information on media.  
5. Choose OK.  
NOTE: The settings chosen through Windows override settings  
chosen through the printer’s front panel. Also, some applications  
(like Aldus PageMaker and Ventura Publisher) specify color  
outside the Windows driver, in which case the color settings in the  
Windows driver are ignored.  
Because QCOLOR automatically adjusts the Halftone, CRD,  
Calibration, Gamma Correction, Dithering, Color Model, and  
Media Selection, these settings in the Color Setup dialog box do  
not have to be adjusted. To get more information about these and  
other options in the driver, choose the Help button, or see the  
“Fine-Tuning Color Output” section later in this chapter.  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
7 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Enabling QCOLOR for the Macintosh  
Touse QCOLOR for Macintosh applications, follow the instructions  
in “Installing LaserWriter 8.x and the magicolor LX 4.1 PPD” in  
chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer.” After the QMS PPD is  
installed, do the following to optimize color printing:  
1. In your application’s Print dialog box, choose Options.  
2. In the Options dialog box, in the QCOLOR Setup listbox, select  
one of the following options:  
Printer’s Default (to use the settings chosen at the printer  
front panel)  
Graphics (if you’re printing color graphics)  
Photographic (if you’re printing photographic images)  
Text and Spot Color (if you’re printing text or spot  
colors)  
Third-Party Color Management System (CMS) (to  
allow your application to control color settings)  
Overhead (if you’re printing overhead transparencies)  
You can select any of the QCOLOR color setup options for  
transparency printing if you select Transparency from the  
Media listbox without changing any other options.  
NOTE: The media tray you’re using must be configured for the  
media type it contains. This can be donethroughtheprinter front  
panel (in the Operator Control/Media menu). See chapter 5,  
“Print Media and Daily Operations,” for more information on  
media.  
3. Choose the Save button to save the QCOLOR settings between  
print jobs.  
4. Choose OK.  
7 - 4  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7  
Because QCOLOR automatically adjusts the Halftone, Gamma  
Correction, CRD, and (for the Overhead setting) Media Type,  
these individual settings in the Options dialog box do not have  
to be adjusted, so they are grayed out when a QCOLOR option  
is chosen.  
To be able to access individual settings such as Gamma  
Correction and CRD, then QCOLOR must be turned off  
(choose Printer’s Default from the QCOLORlist box to turn off  
QCOLOR.) If you want information about the individual  
settings, see the “Fine-Tuning Color Output” section later in  
this chapter. To get more information about the standard  
LaserWriter options, choose the Help button in the driver  
window.  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
7 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Fine-Tuning Color Output  
We’ve configured your printer so that most users don’t have to  
change the default settings to get excellent color output, and we’ve  
provided QCOLOR technology (through the QMS-supplied  
Macintosh or Windows driver) to make it easy to automatically  
optimize color output. (See “QCOLOR Automatic Color Control,”  
earlier in this chapter, for more information.) However, the printer  
is designed to allow you to change individual print-quality features  
if you wish to, or if your application requiresyoutouse a non-QMS  
Macintosh or Windows driver.  
This section gives more detailed information about the individual  
color settings available:  
Printer default halftone  
Dither pattern (not available in the Macintosh driver)  
Gamma correction  
Color rendering dictionary (CRD)  
These settings can be changed in the printer configuration menu or  
in the QMS-supplied Macintosh or Windows driver. See chapter  
3, “Connecting the Printer,” for information on installing these  
drivers.  
Printer Default Halftone Settings  
Halftone settings, such as screen line frequency and screen angles,  
play an important part in the appearance of a color print. For  
example, incorrect halftone angles can cause prints to have a  
mottled appearance, called moiré.  
7 - 6  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7  
Screen frequency (also known as screen lines) is the number of  
halftone cells per inch. The higher the frequency, the higher the  
quality of the color print. Screen angles are the angles at which  
halftone screens are placed in relation to one another to avoid  
undesirable moiré patterns.  
Although your application probably gives you the ability to  
fine-tunehalftonesettings,wehaveprovidedseveralprinterdefault  
settings that we have found to optimize print quality for different  
printing tasks at different resolutions:  
Enhanced Halftone  
This halftone setting, which is the factory default setting, gives the  
best results for most jobs, providing fine detail, with no banding,  
rosettes, or moirés. The enhanced halftone has an effective line  
screen of up to 95 lpi (at 600 dpi) with 161 halftone gray levels,  
which allows theprinter to produceupto 4.2 millioncolors.Choose  
this halftone setting in the following situations:  
If your jobs contain a mixture of text, graphics, and/or  
sampled images.  
If you are using the Pantone POCE or Apple ColorSync  
color management system, or if you are producing  
PANTONE * simulations.  
For optimum color matching whenusing a printer-resident  
Color Rendering Dictionary.  
* Pantone Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials.  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
7 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
106 lpi x 45° Halftone  
This is the best halftone setting for printing halftone (as opposed  
to spot color) graphics and text at 600 dpi resolution. We  
recommend that you select Gamma106 gamma correction when  
using this halftone (see “Gamma Correction,” later in this chapter,  
for information).  
71 lpi x 45° Halftone  
This setting minimizes visible gradations (banding) at 600 dpi, but  
provides less detail than the 106 lpi x 45° halftone setting. We  
recommend that you select Gamma71 gamma correction when  
using this halftone (see “Gamma Correction,” below, for  
information).  
80 lpi x 45° Halftone  
This halftone setting optimizes halftone (as opposed to spot color)  
graphics and text at 300 dpi resolution. We recommend that you  
select Gamma80 gamma correction when using this halftone (see  
“Gamma Correction,” below, for information).  
53 lpi x 45° Halftone  
This setting minimizes visible gradations (banding) at 300 dpi but  
provides less detail than the 80 lpi x 45° halftone setting. We  
recommend that you select Gamma53 gamma correction when  
using this halftone (see “Gamma Correction,” below, for  
information).  
These halftone settings are available through the QMS-supplied  
Macintosh or Windows driver (see chapter 3, “Connecting the  
Printer,” for installation instructions and see the driver help for  
more information), through the printer configuration menu  
7 - 8  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
(Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Default Halftone  
submenu), and through PS Executive SeriesUtilities (Color/Screen  
Angles menu).  
To see the effect of the currently selected default halftone, print a  
Sample Page(from the Administration/Special Pages/Sample Page  
submenu in the printer’s front panel or from PS Executive Series  
Utilities).  
NOTE: A halftone selection made in an application or a driver  
overrides the printer default halftone setting.  
Dither Pattern  
NOTE: When using the Enhanced Halftone setting, the Dither  
option should be set to Standard.  
Dithering refers to the way halftone dots are placed on the page.  
When printing halftones, increasing screen frequency results in  
finer detail, but decreases the number of dots per halftone cell,  
which decreases the number of colors that can be printed. With  
fewer colors available, color shifts are lesssmooth and banding can  
appear on prints.  
To offset this effect, we’ve provided enhanced dithering settings  
to smooth color transitions and decrease the banding that can occur  
when using higher screen frequencies (lines per inch). In the  
Administration/Emulations/PostScript/Default Dither menu, you  
can choosefromStandard, Enhanced Low, EnhancedMedium, and  
Enhanced High dithering. Standard, the factory default setting, is  
PostScript-compatible dithering. Enhanced dithering reduces the  
banding sometimes seen in PostScript-compatible dithering, with  
enhanced high producing the least banding.  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
7 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7  
Gamma Correction  
NOTE: When using the Enhanced Halftone setting, Gamma  
Correction should be set to None.  
As with most other printer settings, gamma correction (which is a  
means of optimizing gray scales and shades of color) can probably  
be set through your application (see your application  
documentation for more information.) However, we provide a  
default gamma setting for each of the printer default halftone  
settings: Gamma53, Gamma71, Gamma80, and Gamma106. We  
also provide a None setting to turn off gamma correction.  
Often in images, gray scaling or shades of color may be too light  
or dark to show details clearly. Using gamma correction on a  
gray-scale image is similar to using a graphic equalizer on a home  
stereo: the range of gray levels is adjusted for the best possible  
result. This sharpens overall midrange contrast while shadows and  
highlights keep their original values.  
Printer-Resident Color Rendering Dictionaries  
If you use the QMS-supplied Windows or Macintosh driver (or an  
application capable of PostScript Level 2 printing, such as Adobe  
PhotoShop), the printer-resident CRDs allow you to achieve  
device-independent color. Your printer comes with a Colorimetric  
CRD, a Business CRD, and a Photographic CRD.  
Each CRD is provided in a 300 dpi and a 600 dpi version. Choose  
a 300 CRD setting (along with the Enhanced halftone) when  
printing in 300 dpi resolution. Choose a 600 CRD setting (along  
with the Enhanced halftone) when printing in 600 dpi resolution.  
7 - 1 0  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7  
The Colorimetric CRD  
The Colorimetric CRD is designed for very basic color matching  
and one-to-one conversion from CIE color to CMYK color. With  
Colorimetric chosen as the printer default CRD, all colors are  
reproduced exactly unless a specified color is “out of gamut” (out  
of the printer’s range). For out of gamut colors, the Colorimetric  
CRD substitutes the closest “in-gamut” color. The result is that  
exact color matches between the two devices are maintained  
wherever possible, but the printed image may have a smaller range  
of colors than the original image (since several image colors may  
be mapped to a single printer color). We recommend that you use  
this CRD for printing spot colors.  
The Business CRD  
The Business CRD matches the images on a monitor as closely as  
possible (WYSIWYG). Use the Business CRD for  
computer-generated graphics.  
The Photographic CRD  
QMS developed the Photographic CRD to optimize the quality of  
photographic images and other images with many subtle color  
shifts. Like the Colorimetric CRD, the Photographic CRD  
substitutes out-of-gamut colors with in-gamut colors, but it also  
adjusts (compresses) all other colors (whether in-gamut or  
out-of-gamut) as necessary to maintain the proportional  
relationship between the colors.  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
7 - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
Color Management  
A major concern in the color publishing industry today is keeping  
color consistent across devices with different color models. For  
example, when you scan a color photograph, the scanner sends the  
image data to the computer in an RGB (Red-Blue-Green) format.  
The computer then converts the data into another RGB format to  
display it on the monitor. When the image data is sent to the printer,  
it is converted into CYMK (Cyan-Magenta-Yellow-blacK) format  
by the printer driver or application. Because of these conversions,  
a color output device (like your printer) may produce colors  
dramatically different from those seen on the computer screen, or  
in the original image.  
To keep colors more consistent, you can use color management.  
Color management involves two processes: calibration and color  
matching.  
Device Calibration  
Calibration ensures that the hardware of a targeted device produces  
consistent color every time.  
Color Matching  
Even if you calibrate your color-generating devices, these devices  
still speak different color languages unless you have a color  
management system to translate between them. Color matching  
uses software to describe colors for different devices in a common  
language to make sure that color is produced in the same shade on  
all devices.  
7 - 1 2  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7  
There are currently three methods of color matching:  
Color management systems  
PostScript Level 2  
PANTONE *Color matching.  
Methods of Color Matching  
Color Matching with a CMS  
Color management systems (CMSs) work by translating color  
information from different devices into a common language. A  
CMS firstgetsinformationabout the waythese devices create color  
and the range of colors they can produce. (This information is  
contained in device profiles.) Then, using this information, the  
CMS maps each device’s color descriptions to the CIE model,  
which is an international, device-independent standard for color.  
For example, to make a printer’s color output look the same as the  
colors on your computer monitor, a CMS translates the monitor’s  
RGB colors into device-independent CIE color, and then translates  
from the CIE color into the printer’s CMYK colors. A CMS can  
warn you (or automatically adjust color) when the colors you  
specify are outside the output device’s range, and they can show  
you on screen how the printed output will look.  
The advantages of using a CMS are that you get consistent color  
across all devices, and an on-screen preview of output. However,  
* Pantone Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials.  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
7 - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 7  
CMSs are not portable acrossplatforms, theycanbe expensive, and  
they do consume processing time and power at the host.  
A few well-known color management systems include Kodak  
ColorSense, Agfa FotoFlow, Electronics for Imaging EFIColor,  
Pantone POCE, and Apple ColorSync. The following are shipped  
with your printer:  
A ColorSync device profile  
A Pantone POCE CMM (Color Matching Method)  
A Pantone POCE device profile  
An ICC (International Color Consortium) device profile  
If this profile is not included with your printer, call QMS  
Customer Technical Assurance to check for availability.  
Instructions for installation and use are included on the Pantone  
disk provided with the printer.  
Color Matching with PostScript Level 2  
Your printer’s PostScript Level 2 capabilities allow it to accept  
device-independent CIE color specification directly (in addition to  
CMYK or RGB color specifications). This means that if you have  
an application that supports PostScript Level 2 printing (such as  
Adobe PhotoShop) or if you use the QMS-developed driver for  
Windows or Macintosh, your printer will perform color matching  
automatically. QMS drivers for Windows and Macintosh were  
shipped on disks with your printer: see chapter 3, “Connecting the  
Printer,” of this manual for installation information. These drivers  
workwith the printer-resident colorrenderingdictionariestomatch  
colors. See “Printer-Resident Color Rendering Dictionaries”  
earlier in this chapter for more information on CRDs.  
7 - 1 4  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7  
The advantages of Level 2 color matching are that it is portable, it  
is application- and printer-resident (there’s nothing else to buy),  
and it is performed at the printer level (so it doesn’t tie up your  
host). However, no on-screen preview of output is provided, and  
you are not warned if a color is out of printer’s gamut (color range).  
PANTONE * Color Matching  
Your printer has been approved by Pantone Inc. to simulate  
PANTONE Colors. Pantonespecifieshundredsofspotcolors, each  
identified by a unique number. Each of these spot colors can be  
simulated on the printer with the appropriate combination of  
process (CMYK) colors.  
Within a Pantone-licensed application (such as Aldus FreeHand or  
Adobe Illustrator), youcan choose a PANTONEColor numberand  
the corresponding CMYK simulation is printed. Pantone tables for  
supporting applications are shipped on a Pantone disk with the  
printer, including the following:  
Aldus FreeHand (Macintosh and Windows)  
Adobe Illustrator (Macintosh and Windows)  
QuarkXpress (Macintosh only)  
CorelDRAW (Windows only)  
Instructions for installation and use are included on the Pantone  
disk provided with the printer. (If you did not receive a Pantone  
disk with your printer, call QMS Customer Technical Assurance.)  
* Pantone Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials.  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
7 - 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7  
If  
a
particular application does not support  
PANTONE *-identified colors, but does allow process color  
specification, the CMYK values may be entered directly to  
simulate PANTONE Colors. For this purpose, the following  
PANTONE Color look-up charts—containing four-color  
simulationsof Pantone-identifiedcolorsandthepercentage of each  
process color used to create them—are included with your printer:  
PANTONE.PS (for PCs)  
This a PostScript file containing a PANTONE Color  
look-up chart.  
Pantone Prism Demo (for Macintosh)  
This is autility forprintingouta PANTONEColor look-up  
chart.  
Pantone Professional Color Toolkit (for Macintosh)  
This an application that is required for Pantone support for  
QuarkXpress for the Macintosh, which also provides a  
PANTONE Color look-up chart.  
Instructions for installation and use of these files are included on  
the Pantone disk shipped with your printer.  
The formulas in the PANTONE Color look-up charts result in  
Pantone-approved color only under the following conditions:  
A Pantone-licensed application (such as Adobe Illustrator,  
QuarkXPress, and Aldus FreeHand) is used to create the  
color.  
The colors are printed with QMS-supplied toner.  
* Pantone Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials.  
7 - 1 6  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
The colors are printed on Hammermill Laser Print white  
paper.  
The printer’s Administration/Emulations/PostScript/  
Default Halftones option is set to Enhanced (if you have a  
magicolor LX with system software version3.x or higher).  
NOTE: The formulas listed in the Pantone charts are only for the  
magicolor LX printer. Also, the PANTONE * Colors  
generated by this printer are four-color process  
simulations and may not exactly match  
Pantone-identified solid color standards. Use current  
PANTONE Color Reference Manuals (available from  
Pantone, Inc.) for accurate color.  
The advantages of using PANTONE Color matching are that it is  
easy to use, it is widely supported, and that it is good for spot color.  
However, it is not as accurate as other methods of color matching,  
it can’t be used for photographs, and it is only supported by  
applications.  
* Pantone Inc.’s check-standard trademark for color reproduction and color reproduction materials.  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
7 - 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
The Resident PostScript Fonts  
This section lists thefonts resident inyour printer. All of these fonts  
are authentic: they are licensed and carry the true name. See your  
QMS vendor if you are interested in obtaining more fonts.  
Serif  
ITC Bookman Light  
ITC Bookman Light Italic  
ITC Bookman Demibold  
ITC Bookman Demibold Italic  
Courier  
Courier Oblique  
Courier Bold  
Courier Bold Oblique  
New Century Schoolbook  
New Century Schoolbook Italic  
New Century Schoolbook Bold  
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic  
Palatino  
Palatino Italic  
Palatino Bold  
Palatino Bold Italic  
Times Roman  
Times Italic  
Times Bold  
Times Bold Italic  
Sans  
Serif  
ITC Avant Garde Book  
ITC Avant Garde Book Oblique  
ITC Avant Garde Demibold  
ITC Avant Garde Demibold Oblique  
Helvetica  
Helvetica Oblique  
Helvetica Bold  
Helvetica Bold Oblique  
7 - 1 8  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 7  
Helvetica Condensed  
Helvetica Condensed Oblique  
Helvetica Condensed Bold  
Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique  
Helvetica Narrow  
Helvetica Narrow Oblique  
Helvetica Narrow Bold  
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique  
Script  
Pi  
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic  
Symbol  
ITC Zapf Dingbats  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
7 - 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7  
The Resident HP PCL Fonts  
The following typefaces are included with your printer for use with  
the HP PCL emulation. Courier 10 is 10 point, 12 pitch; Courier  
12 is 12 point, 10 pitch. The Courier and Lineprinter fonts are  
bitmapped; the others are scalable. The default is Courier 12.  
Courier 10 Medium  
Courier 10 Bold  
Courier 10 Italic Medium  
Courier 12 Medium  
Courier 12 Bold  
Courier 12 Italic Medium  
Line Printer Medium (8.5 point, 16.66 pitch)  
Linotype Times Roman Medium  
Linotype Times Roman Italic Medium  
Linotype Times Roman Bold  
Linotype Times Roman Italic Bold  
Linotype Univers Medium  
Linotype Univers Italic Medium  
Linotype Univers Bold  
Linotype Univers Italic Bold  
Linotype Univers Condensed Medium  
Linotype Univers Condensed Italic Medium  
Linotype Univers Condensed Bold  
Linotype Univers Condensed Italic Bold  
ITC Zapf Dingbats Medium  
7 - 2 0  
O p t i m i z i n g C o l o r O u t p u t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printer Options  
Chapter highlights:  
Installing the optional sheet feeder  
Using an envelope cassette  
Using font and emulation cards  
Using a security card  
Installing Single In-line Memory Modules (SIMMs)  
Installing a direct network interface  
Converting the parallel port to Dataproducts  
Replacing the internal hard disk  
Internal and external hard disks  
Loading print system software  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Introduction  
This chapter discusses installing printer options. If your QMS  
vendor cannot offer these options for your printer, see the “QMS  
World-wide Offices” section in appendix A, “QMS Customer  
Support,” for telephone numbers to call for information.  
The Sheet Feeder  
The optional sheet feeder holds up to 250 sheets of media, which  
means less operator time spent refilling cassettes. It also provides  
printing flexibility; for example, you can load laser paper in the  
standardcassetteandplain paperin thesheetfeeder’scassette. Plus,  
this compact unit fits directly under the printer, so it requires no  
additional desktop space. Media and envelope cassettes are  
interchangeable between the printer and the optional sheet feeder.  
Installing the Sheet Feeder  
Unpack the sheet feeder and make sure you received the following:  
Sheet feeder unit  
Two small metal brackets  
Four large plastic corner brackets  
NOTE: There may be several other pieces with the sheet feeder,  
but they are not required for this procedure.  
WARNING!  
Your printer weighs approximately 106 lbs (48  
kg) without consumables. Be sure to have help when lifting and  
moving it. If consumables are installed, be sure to keep the  
printer level when moving it to prevent accidental spills.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 8  
ACHTUNG!  
Das Gewicht dieses Druckers beträgt ohne Ver-  
brauchsmaterial ca. 48 kg. Bitte versuchen Sie niemals, den  
Drucker alleine anzuheben oder zu transportieren. Achten Sie  
bitte darauf, daß der Drucker mit eingebauten Tonerkar-  
tuschen nur waagerecht transportiert wird.  
1. Turn the printer off, remove the power cord, and disconnect  
all interface cables from the printer.  
2. With the help of another person, pick upthe printer by the four  
corners and align it above the sheet feeder (fig. 8.1).  
3. Keeping the printer level, lower it onto the sheet feeder (fig.  
8.1). The bottom side edges of the printer rest inside the sides  
of the sheet feeder.  
Fig. 8.1 Lower Printer onto the Sheet Feeder  
4. Install the two small metal brackets using the following  
procedure:  
a. Align one of the metalbrackets with the outside of the metalpost  
on the front right side of the sheet feeder (fig. 8.2). Make sure  
8 - 2  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
the holes on the post and bracket are centered and that the flange  
on the bottom of the bracket goes into the slot on the post.  
b. Attach the bracket to the post using one of the two small metal  
screws that came with the sheet feeder (fig. 8.2).  
c. Align and attach the second metal bracket to the rear left sheet  
feeder post in the same way as you did the first bracket (fig. 8.2).  
Fig. 8.2 Install the Metal Brackets  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
5. Check the inside of the four plastic corner brackets. Each is  
labeled to indicate which corner of the sheet feeder it fits in.  
6. Snap the plastic brackets onto the appropriate corners of the  
sheet feeder (fig. 8.3). These brackets have small rims on the  
bottom that fit inside the edges of the sheet feeder.  
Fig. 8.3 Attach the Corner Brackets  
The sheet feeder is now installed. See chapter 5, “Print Media and  
Daily Operations,” for information on handling media and filling  
cassettes.  
NOTE: If you move the printer with the sheet feeder attached, lift  
the unit by the four bottom corners, not by the sheet  
feeder’s cassette slot. Before moving the printer, be sure  
to read “Moving the Printer” in chapter 6.  
8 - 4  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Using the Envelope Cassette  
You can purchase an envelope cassette from your QMS vendor.  
2
The envelope cassette holds up to 30 24-lb (90 g/m ) DL and Com  
10envelopes. Itfits in the slot forthestandardor the optional media  
tray, but we recommend it be used in the standard slot. To use the  
envelope cassette  
1. Remove the paper cassette from the printer (fig. 8.4).  
Fig. 8.4 Remove the Paper Cassette  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
2. On the envelope cassette, set the back and side envelope  
stackers (figs. 8.5 and 8.6) to the correct envelope size.  
Fig. 8.5 Set the side stackers  
Fig. 8.6 Set the rear stacker  
8 - 6  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
3. Setthe envelope-sizekeyto the correctenvelope size (fig.8.7)  
Fig. 8.7. Set the size key  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
4. Lift the stacker arm and load 30 or fewer envelopes  
printing-side up, so that the flap side will be on the left when  
the envelope is pulled into the printer (fig. 8.8).  
Fig. 8.8 Load the envelopes  
5. Lower the stacker arm.  
8 - 8  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
6. Slide the envelope cassette into the printer (fig. 8.9).  
Fig. 8.9 Slide the cassette into the printer  
7. Make sure you select the correct envelope size through your  
driver when printing.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Font and Emulation Cards  
You can purchase cards containing emulations or fonts not resident  
on the printer. The printer can support two cards at once, either two  
font cards or a font and an emulation card. Fonts and emulation  
cards may go in either of the two slots located on the front of the  
printer, below the control panel. For a complete list of currently  
available cards, contact your QMS vendor.  
CAUTION: Usually, the printer must be off line before you insert  
or remove a card. Press the Online/Offline key to turn the LED off.  
If you forget to take the printer off line, turn the printer power off  
and back on to regain access to the printer’s resident fonts and the  
data stored in the printer’s memory.  
However, before installing or removing the LN03 Plus or the  
ProCollection font card, you must turn off your printer rather than  
just take it off line. Then turn the printer back on after you finish.  
Using Font and Emulation Cards  
Use the following procedure to install a font or emulation card:  
1. If you are installing an LN03 Plus or a ProCollection card,  
turn off the printer. Otherwise, press the Online/Offline key  
to take the printer off line (the LED should be off).  
CAUTION: Font and emulationcards fit in only onedirection,with  
the front label facing left, toward the center of the printer. Do not  
force them in backwards; this could damage the card and printer.  
8 - 1 0  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 8  
2. Insert the card into either slot (fig. 8.10) with the front label  
side facing left toward the inside of the printer.  
Fig. 8.10 Insert the Font or Emulation Card  
3. Depending on the type of card you are installing, either turn  
the printer on again or put it back on line.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
To remove a card, use the following procedure:  
1. If you are removing an LN03 Plus or a ProCollection card,  
turn off the printer. Otherwise, press the Online/Offline key  
to take the printer off line (the LED should be off).  
2. Pull the card out gently.  
3. Depending on the type of card you are removing, either turn  
the printer on again or put it back on line.  
NOTE: If you are using an application, make sure the printer  
driver installed supports the fonts on the card, if you want  
to use those fonts. If not, contact your application  
manufacturer for support.  
8 - 1 2  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Security Cards  
An optional security card allows the Operator Control and  
Administration menus to be password protected, so that only users  
who know the password can change printer configurations. When  
a security card is installed, a new menu, Installation, appears in the  
printer’s Configuration menu. The Installation menu is used to  
password-protect the printer.  
CAUTION: The printer must be off line before you insert or  
remove a security card. If you forget to take the printer off line  
before you insert or remove a security card, turn the printer off and  
back on again to regain access to the data stored in the printer’s  
memory.  
Using a Security Card  
A security card uses the same slots as font and emulation cards.  
The card slots are located on the front of the printer below the  
control panel. The following instructions explain how to use a  
security card:  
1. Take the printer off line.  
CAUTION: A security card fits inonly one direction, withthe front  
label facing left, toward the center of the printer. Do not force the  
card in backwards; this could damage the card and printer.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 8  
2. Insert the security card into either slot with the card’s front  
label facing left, toward the inside of the printer (fig. 8.11).  
Fig. 8.11 Insert the Security Card  
3. Press the Menu key to enter the Configuration menu. Press  
the Next key until the following message displays in the  
control panel message window:  
CONFIGURATION  
INSTALLATION  
8 - 1 4  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
4. Press the Select key to enter the Installation menu, then use  
the Next key to view the menu options:  
OPERATOR PASSWRD  
USE OPERATOR PWD  
ADMIN PASSWORD  
USE ADMIN PWD  
5. To password-protect the Operator Control menu, press Select  
to display the message  
INSTALLATION  
OPERATOR PASSWRD  
Then, specify the password. (See the section “Entering  
Alphanumeric Values” in chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,“  
for detailed instructions for entering alphanumeric values.)  
6. When you have entered the complete password, press the  
Select key. This saves the password and returns you to the  
Installation menu.  
7. To turn on the Password option, press the Next key to display  
the message  
INSTALLATION  
USE OPERATOR PWD  
8. Press the Selectkeytoenter this submenu. ThenpresstheNext  
key to display the message  
USE OPERATOR PWD  
YES  
9. Press the Select key. This activates the password option and  
returns you to the Installation menu.  
10. To password-protect the Administration menu, press the Next  
key to display  
INSTALLATION  
ADMIN PASSWORD  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
11. Press Select, then specify the password. (See the section  
“Entering Alphanumeric Values” in chapter 4, “Printer  
Configuration,” for detailed instructions for entering  
alphanumeric values.)  
12. When you have entered the complete password, press the  
Select key. This saves the password and returns you to the  
Installation menu.  
13. To turn on the Password option, press the Next key to display  
the message  
INSTALLATION  
USE ADMIN PWD  
14. Press Select to enter this submenu. Press the Next key to  
display  
USE ADMIN PWD  
YES  
15. Press Select. This returns you to the Installation menu.  
16. Once the passwords are entered and activated, press the Menu  
key to return to the Main menu. The following message is  
displayed:  
SAVE CHANGES?  
*NO  
17. Press the Next key to display  
SAVE CHANGES?  
YES  
18. Press Select. Remove the security card from the card slot, and  
put the printer back on line.  
8 - 1 6  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Once a menu is password-protected, you cannot enter it or make  
changes in it until you enter a valid password. You know a menu  
is password protected if  
ENTER PASSWORD  
appears on the message window when you try to enter the  
Configuration menu. If you enter an invalid password, the message  
window flashes  
INVALID PASSWORD  
for three seconds, and then returns to the parent menu. If you forget  
the password, the system administrator can easily recover it by  
repeating the “Using a Security Card” procedure.  
If you enter the correct password, you are allowed to enter the  
menu. The password for the two menus may be the same or  
different.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Removing the Controller Board  
The first step in installing many printer options is removing the  
printer’s controller board.  
The following instructions for removing the controller board are  
written for advanced users. Do not attempt this procedure if you  
have no experience working with circuit boards.  
CAUTION: It’s very important to protect the printer controller  
board from electrostatic damage while performing this task.  
If an anti-static wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit,  
attachone endofittoyour wrist andthe otherend toanyconvenient  
electrical ground (for example, the bare metal chassis of equip-  
ment, as on the back of a computer, that is plugged in but turned  
off). Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an  
electrical current present. Turn off all power switches first. Plastic,  
rubber, wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are not ac-  
ceptable grounding points. The printer isn’t an acceptable ground-  
ing point either because it must be unplugged before you perform  
this task.  
If you don’t have an anti-static wrist strap, discharge your body’s  
static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you  
handle any printer boards or components and before removing the  
tray assembly cover. Redischarge your body each time after walk-  
ing around and before touching the printer tray assembly again.  
Handle the tray carefully, and try to handle it by the edges only.  
8 - 1 8  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
1. Turn the printer off and remove the power cord. Disconnect  
all interface cables from the printer.  
2. Position the printer so that the back is facing you.  
3. Using a screwdriver, loosen the two mounting screws that  
hold the controller board to the printer (fig. 8.12).  
4. Grasping the board by the top and bottom metal rims, gently  
pull the controller board straight out and lay it on a flat surface  
(fig. 8.12).  
Fig. 8.12 Remove the Mounting Screws  
5. Install your printer option and then refer to the following  
section, “Replacing the Controller Board.”  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Replacing the Controller Board  
This section explain how to replace the controller board after  
installing a printer option.  
The following instructions are written for advanced users. Do not  
attempt this procedure if you have no experience working with  
circuit boards.  
CAUTION: It’s very important to protect the printer controller  
board from electrostatic damage while performing this task.  
If an anti-static wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit,  
attachone endofittoyour wrist andthe otherend toanyconvenient  
electrical ground (for example, the bare metal chassis of equip-  
ment, as on the back of a computer, that is plugged in but turned  
off). Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an  
electrical current present. Turn off all power switches first. Plastic,  
rubber, wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are not ac-  
ceptable grounding points. The printer isn’t an acceptable ground-  
ing point either because it must be unplugged before you perform  
this task.  
If you don’t have an anti-static wrist strap, discharge your body’s  
static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you  
handle any printer boards or components and before removing the  
tray assembly cover. Redischarge your body each time after walk-  
ing around and before touching the printer tray assembly again.  
Handle the tray carefully, and try to handle it by the edges only.  
8 - 2 0  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
1. Using both hands, carefully reinsert the controller board (fig.  
8.13) making sure the controller board is properly seated in  
its connectors.  
2. Retighten the two mounting screws you loosened previously  
(fig. 8.13).  
Fig. 8.13 Reinstall the Controller Board  
3. Reconnect all interface cables and the power cord, and then  
turn on the printer.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Single In-Line Memory Modules (SIMMs)  
Additional printer memory allows you to increase data transfer and  
processing speed. To install SIMMs,  
1. Follow the instructions in “Removing the Controller Board”  
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to discharge  
electrostatic buildup before you begin.  
2. Turn the controller board so that the side where the SIMMs  
are located is closest to you and the SIMMs are located on  
your right side.  
3. If there are enough open connectors for the additional SIMMs  
you are installing, skip to step 6. However, if you need to  
remove existing SIMMs to make space for new ones, follow  
the instructions in steps 4 and 5.  
4. If you need to remove a SIMM to make room for  
larger-memory SIMMs: Use the clips located on each side of  
the connector to gently release the SIMM.  
CAUTION: If you are removing SIMMs, remember that printer  
operation requires at least 12 MB of total memory, with at least 4  
MB of that memory in the slot closest to the center of the board.  
8 - 2 2  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
5. Tilt the SIMM back to a 45° angle and slide it up and out of  
the connector (fig. 8.14).  
Fig. 8.14 Tilt the SIMM Back and Remove It  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
6. Remove the new SIMM from the anti-static bag.  
7. Hold the new SIMM at a 45° angle, with the notch on the  
right-hand side (fig. 8.15). Insert the bottom edge of the new  
SIMM into an open connector.  
Fig. 8.15 Insert the SIMM into the Connector  
8 - 2 4  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
8. Gently pull the SIMM forward to a 90° angle until you feel it  
fit into place (fig. 8.16) behind the clips on either side of the  
connector. (You may need to use your fingers to open these  
clips.) Whenseated, the SIMM stands upright, firmlyin place.  
CAUTION: If you cannot easily fit the SIMM into place, do not  
force it. Reposition it, making sure that the bottom of the SIMM  
is seated completely in the connector. If there’s not enough room  
between SIMMs to properly tilt and insert the new ones, first  
remove all the SIMMs, install the new ones, then re-install the old  
ones. Steps 4 and 5, above, explain how to remove SIMMs.  
90  
Fig. 8.16 Pull the SIMM Forward into Position  
9. Follow the instructions in “Replacing the Controller Board”  
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to follow the directions  
for eliminating electrostatic buildup.  
NOTE: You may want to print out an advanced status page  
(Administration/Special Pages submenu) so you have a  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 2 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
record of your changesbefore you go to the next step. See  
chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for information on  
using the configuration menu.  
10. In the printer configuration menu, use the Administration/  
Miscellaneous/Restore Defaults option to make the printer  
recognize the additional memory.  
The Administration/Memory section in chapter 4, “Printer  
Configuration,” and Appendix D, “Additional Technical  
Information,” contain information about printer memory.  
Installing a Network Interface  
This section describes how to install a network interface.  
NOTE: The QMS magicolor LX printer is compatible only  
magicolor LXnetwork interfaces. If anon-magicolor LX  
interface is installed,thefollowingerrormessage appears  
on the start-up page: “Incompatible network option  
installed.” Also, depending on which type of interface  
you are installing, the interface card in the illustrations  
accompanying these instructions may look slightly  
different from your interface card, but the installation  
procedure is the same.  
Make sure you have all the parts necessary for the interface  
installation. The network interface kit includes the following:  
An anti-static wristband  
A network interface card and two plastic support posts  
A daughterboard and two plastic support posts  
8 - 2 6  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
An external power supply box (not needed for all  
interfaces)  
An interface plate  
Your kit may contain additional parts not required for network  
interface installation on this particular printer.  
1. Follow the instructions in “Removing the Controller Board”  
(earlier in this chapter), beingcarefulto eliminate electrostatic  
buildup before you begin.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 2 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the two screws from the  
blank optional I/O plate, and then remove the plate from the  
interface panel and set it aside (fig. 8.17).  
Fig. 8.17 Remove the Optional I/O Plate  
8 - 2 8  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
3. Examine the ends of the two plastic support posts that come  
with the smaller network interface card: one end has a slightly  
larger diameter and the other end is slightly more tapered.  
Insert the larger ends into the controller board (fig. 8.18).  
4. Snap the network interface card onto the plastic support posts  
(fig. 8.18). (If you have trouble snapping the interface board  
onto the support posts, you probably inserted the wrong ends  
of the posts into the controller board in step 3.)  
5. Using the two screws you removed in step 2, fasten the new  
interface plate to network interface card to hold the card in  
place (fig. 8.18).  
Fig. 8.18 Attach Support Posts to Controller Board  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
6. Hold the plastic ribbon cable so that the notch (key) on one  
endfaces upwardand slide it onto the interface card connector  
(fig. 8.19). Fold the plastic ribbon cable over so that the notch  
(key) on the other end is facing to the right and slide it into  
the controller board connector to the left of the network  
interface card. (You may have to open the ejector latches on  
the connectors to be able to connect the ribbon cable.)  
Fig. 8.19 Connect Both Ends of the Cable  
8 - 3 0  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
7. Examine the ends of the two plastic support posts that come  
with the daughterboard: one end has a slightly larger diameter  
and the other end is slightly more tapered. Insert the larger  
ends into the controller board.  
8. Attach the daughterboard to the two support posts and the two  
48-pin connectors (fig. 8.20). (The daughterboard is keyed so  
that it fits only one way.)  
Fig. 8.20 Attach the Daughterboard to Support Posts  
9. Follow the instructions in “Replacing the Controller Board”  
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to eliminate static  
electricity.  
10. If your interface kit came with an external power supply box,  
attach it to the round connector next to the network interface  
port; then connect the box to a power cord and plug the power  
cord into an electrical outlet.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Using an Optional Network Interface  
After you have correctly installed an optional network interface,  
refer to the following for more information:  
The “Administration/Communications/Serial” section of  
chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” contains information  
about the PS Protocol option in the new optional network  
interface submenu that appears in the Administration/  
Communications menu.  
The manualthat comes with the optionalnetwork interface  
contains information about all other options in the new  
network interface submenu, as well as instructions for  
connecting the printer to the network and for printing over  
the network.  
Your network documentation alsocontainsinformation on  
printing over the network.  
8 - 3 2  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
Centronics to Dataproducts Conversion  
Your printer is shipped with a Centronics parallel port, but a kit for  
converting it to Dataproducts is available from your QMS vendor.  
Make sure you have all the parts necessary for the conversion. The  
Dataproducts conversion kit includes the following:  
An anti-static wristband  
Two 2-pin shunts (small plastic pieces lined with metal)  
Two DIP resistors (a 220 ohm and a 330 ohm)  
Two SIP resistors (not necessary for this procedure)  
A 50-pin to 36-pin cable  
1. Follow the instructions in “Removing the Controller Board”  
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to eliminate static  
electricity before you begin.  
2. Orient the controller board so that the side with the SIMMs is  
closest to you and the parallel port is located on your left side.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
3. If you don’t have an network interface board installed, skip to  
step 4. If you do have an network interface board installed,  
follow the instructions below for removing it:  
a. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the two screws from the  
interface plate (fig. 8.21).  
b. Detach the plastic ribbon cable from the interface card.  
c. Remove the network interfacecard from its plastic support posts  
and put it aside (fig. 8.21).  
Fig. 8.21 Remove the Network Interface Board  
8 - 3 4  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
4. Place the two shunts on jumpers JP1 and JP2 (fig. 8.22). Make  
sure both sets of pins are covered by the shunts.  
JP2  
JP1  
Fig. 8.22 Place the Shunts on the Jumpers  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 3 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
5. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to remove the existing 1K-ohm  
DIP resistor from the RP1 socket (fig. 8.23). Gently slide the  
screwdriver under the resistor and lift it up and off the  
controller board.  
Fig. 8.23 Remove the DIP Resistor  
8 - 3 6  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
6. Line up the notch on the 220-ohm DIP resistor with the notch  
on the RP1 socket. Carefully insert the resistor’s pins in the  
socket. Then align and install the 330-ohm DIP resistor in the  
RP2 socket the same way (fig. 8.24).  
220 ohm  
330 ohm  
RP1  
RP2  
Fig. 8.24 Insert the New DIP Resistors  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 3 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
7. If you didn’t remove a network interface board, skip to step  
8. If you need to replace your network interface board  
installed, follow the instructions below:  
a. Snap the network interface card onto the plastic support posts  
(fig. 8.18).  
b. Using the two screws you removed earlier, refasten the interface  
plate to hold the network card in place (fig. 8.18).  
c. Hold the plastic ribbon cable so that the notch (key) on one end  
faces upward and slide it onto the interface card connector (fig.  
8.19).  
8. Make sure no components on the board shifted or loosened  
during the procedure, especially the SIMMs.  
9. Follow the instructions in “Replacing the Controller Board”  
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to eliminate static  
electricity.  
10. Use the 50-pin to 36-pin cable included in your kit to connect  
the Dataproducts cable to the parallel port.  
8 - 3 8  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Internal Hard Disk Installation  
These instructions explain how to replace the internal hard disk.  
Make sure you have all the parts necessary for the procedure. The  
internal hard disk upgrade kit includes the following:  
An internal hard disk  
An antistatic wristband  
1. Follow the instructions in “Removing the Controller Board”  
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to eliminate static  
electricity before you begin.  
2. Orient the controller board so that the side with the SIMMs is  
closest to you and the parallel port is located on your left side.  
3. Disconnect the ribbon cable from the hard disk but leave the  
cable attached to the controller board.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 3 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
4. Remove the old disk by pulling up on each corner while  
steadying the board near the disk with one hand (fig. 8.25).  
CAUTION: This disk fits tightly, so you have to pull firmly, but  
be careful not to flex the controller board while doing so.  
Fig. 8.25 Remove the Old Hard Disk  
8 - 4 0  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
5. Hold the new disk vertically (connector-side down with the  
bracket facing the SIMMs) and connect it to the ribbon cable  
(fig. 8.26). Inspect the connection from all four sides to make  
sure each pin is seated in the connector (no pins are  
exposed).  
Fig. 8.26 Install the New Hard Disk  
6. Align the new disk over its position on the board, then attach  
it to the boardbypressingfirmly onthecorners(notthecenter)  
with one hand while steadying the board with the other hand  
as you snap the disk in place.  
7. Make sure no other components on the board shifted or  
loosened during the installation procedure, especially the  
SIMMs and any optional interface boards.  
8. Follow the instructions in “Replacing the Controller Board”  
(earlier in this chapter), being careful to eliminate static  
electricity.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 4 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
If the printer fails to work properly after you replace the hard disk,  
check the following:  
Make sure the power cord and all interface cables are  
connected correctly and tightly, and that the printer power  
is on.  
Make sure that you didn’t miss any pins when you  
reattached the ribbon cable (no pins should be exposed).  
Make sure no other components shifted or loosenedduring  
the installation procedure, especially the SIMMs and any  
optional interface boards.  
If you’ve checked all of the above and the printer still doesn’t work  
properly, see appendix A, “QMS Customer Support,” for  
information on how to contact us.  
8 - 4 2  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Using External Hard Disks  
In addition to the internal hard disk, your printer supports up to six  
optional external hard disks through its SCSI port. When an  
external hard disk is connected to the printer, you control the disk  
through the Administration/Disk Operations submenu (fig. 8.27).  
This section explains how to use the Disk Operations submenu to  
download and remove fonts or emulations. (You can also load  
optional fonts and emulations from cards asdescribedearlier in this  
chapter in “Using Font and Emulation Cards.”)  
ADMINISTRATION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
Se le c t  
Pre vio us  
Ne xt  
DISK OPERATIONS  
INSTALL OPTION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
COLLATION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
REMOVE OPTION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
SPOOL OVERFLOW  
DISK OPERATIONS  
FORMAT DISK  
Fig. 8.27 Disk Operations Submenu  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 4 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
CAUTION: If you connect to this printer an external hard disk you  
previously used with an earlier QMS Crown printer, this QMS  
magicolor LX software automatically reorganizes the files on the  
external hard disk when the printer is turned off and back on. Once  
this reorganization is done, the files on the hard disk can no longer  
be accessed if the hard disk is reattached to an earlier QMS Crown  
printer. The printer release number is indicated on the status and  
start-up pages.  
This reorganization takes time. Don’t interrupt the reorganization,  
because all files on the disk might be lost.  
NOTE: If an error occurs during these operations, an error  
message displays until you press theMenu key. You must  
then restart the operation from the beginning. Two error  
messages you may see are READ FAILURE (the disk  
hasencounteredareaderror) and WRITE ERROR(either  
the hard disk had a write error or there is no room for data  
on the hard disk or in RAM).  
8 - 4 4  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Identifying External Hard Disks  
The external hard disks are identified by their device numbers;  
these numbers can range from DSK0 to DSK5 (fig. 8.28). The  
internal disk in your printer is always DSK6. Device numbers of  
external disks can be configured by the installer.  
Fig. 8.28 External Hard Disk Device Numbers  
Formatting an External Hard Disk  
You have two methods of formatting an external hard disk:  
Formatting via the Control Panel  
Formatting via PS Executive Series Utilities  
CAUTION: Be extremely careful when formatting hard disks.  
Only format DSK6, which contains the system software, if there is  
a specific reason to do so. For example, you might reformat the  
disk to clear up unexplained disk behavior or toavoid a servicecall.  
If you want to format DSK6, use the procedure in “Formatting the  
Internal Hard Disk” in this chapter. If you do format DSK6, you  
will not be able to use the printer until you reload the system  
software (provided on a with your printer). See “Installing Print  
System Software and Fonts” later in this chapter for details.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 4 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
Formatting an External Hard Disk via the Control Panel  
Use the following procedure to format an external hard disk using  
the printer’s control panel.  
NOTE: If the FORMAT FAILED message displays in the  
message window during the Format Disk operation, the  
disk cannot be used. Press the Menu key to remove the  
message and contact your printer vendor.  
1. With the printer off line (the Online LED is off), press the  
Menu and Next keys to display the message  
ADMINISTRATION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
2. Press the Select key to enter the Disk Operations menu. Then,  
if necessary, press the Next key to display the message  
DISK OPERATIONS  
FORMAT DISK  
3. Press the Select key to enter the Format Disk submenu.  
4. Press the Next key until the address of the hard disk you want  
to format displays in the message window; then press the  
Select key.  
5. When you are prompted  
ARE YOU SURE?  
NO  
press the Next key to display the message  
ARE YOU SURE?  
YES  
6. Press the Select key to start the format procedure.  
8 - 4 6  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
CAUTION: During the formatting procedure, various messages  
mayappear, the printer automatically restarts, andthecontrol panel  
lights flash. Do not interrupt this process because the formatting  
will be incorrect.  
7. When the format procedure is complete, the following  
message momentarily displays:  
FORMAT DISK  
FORMAT COMPLETE  
and then message window displays  
IDLE  
Formatting an External Hard Disk via PS Executive  
PS Executive Series Utilities offer formatting options for both  
Macintosh and PC setups. See the README file on the PS  
Executive disk for information on installing the utilities and see the  
on-line documentation for details on formatting disks.  
Installing an Optional Card Font or Emulation  
To install optional fonts and emulations on a hard disk, use the  
following procedure:  
1. Make sure the printer is off line. Press the Menukey to display  
CONFIGURATION  
ADMINISTRATION  
2. Press the Select key to enter the Administration menu; then  
press the Next key to display  
ADMINISTRATION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
3. Press the Select key to enter the Disk Operations menu. Press  
the Next key to display  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 4 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
DISK OPERATIONS  
INSTALL OPTION  
4. Press the Select key to enter the Install Option submenu. Press  
the Nextkey until the harddiskdestinationof the optional font  
or emulation displays in the message window.  
5. Press Select to enter the destination. Then, press the Next key  
until the source of the optional font or emulation displays in  
the message window.  
6. When you are prompted, insert the font or emulation card into  
a slot on the front of the printer.  
7. Press the Select key to enter the source. The printer copies the  
contents of the card to the hard disk.  
8. When the copying process is complete, press the Menu key to  
exit the menu.  
9. To remove the card, use the following procedure:  
a. If you are removing an LN03 Plus or a ProCollection font card,  
turn off the printer. Otherwise, make sure the printer is off line  
(use the Online/Offline key to turn off the LED).  
b. Pull the card out gently.  
c. Turn on the printer, if it’s off, and put it back on line.  
NOTE: To use these fonts or emulations from an application,  
make sure the printer driver installed supports them. If  
not, contact your application manufacturer for a driver  
that supports them.  
Removing an Optional Card Font or Emulation  
To remove an installed option from a hard disk, you need the  
original font or emulation card containing the files. Use the  
following procedure:  
8 - 4 8  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
1. Make sure the printer is off line. Press the Menukey to display  
CONFIGURATION  
ADMINISTRATION  
2. Press the Select key to enter the Administration menu; then  
press the Next key to display  
ADMINISTRATION  
DISK OPERATIONS  
3. Press the Select key to enter the Disk Operations submenu.  
Then press the Next key to display  
DISK OPERATIONS  
REMOVE OPTION  
4. Press the Select key to enter the Remove Option submenu.  
Press theNext keyuntiltheaddressoftheharddisk containing  
the optional font or emulation displays in the message  
window, then press the Select key.  
5. When you are prompted, insert the card into the card slot. The  
printer compares the contents of the disk with the contents of  
the card and deletes the matching files from the hard disk.  
6. When the file removal process is complete, press the Menu  
key to exit the menu.  
7. To remove the card, use the following procedure:  
a. If you are removing an LN03 Plus or a ProCollection card, turn  
off the printer. Otherwise, make sure the printer is off line (use  
the Online/Offline key to turn off the LED).  
b. Pull the card out gently.  
c. Turn on the printer, if it’s off, and put it back on line.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 4 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Formatting the Internal Hard Disk  
If you experience unexplained or erratic problems with the internal  
hard disk, you may want to reformat the hard disk and reload the  
print system software.  
NOTE: If you reformat the internal hard disk, all files on that disk  
are erased, and the system software and fonts must be  
reloaded.  
To format the internal hard disk, follow these instructions:  
1. Turn off the printer and then on again. The following message  
displays in the window:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
READY TO BOOT  
2. Once this message appears, you have 10 seconds to press the  
Select key. When you press the Select key, the following  
message appears in the message window:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
BOOT SYSTEM  
NOTE: If 10 seconds passes before you press the Select key,  
the IDLEmessage appears. You must return to step 1.  
3. Press the Next key until FORMAT DISK appears on the  
second line of the message window:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
FORMAT DISK  
4. Press the Select key to enter the Format Disk submenu. Then  
press the Next key until the following message appears in the  
message window:  
FORMAT DISK  
DISK 6  
8 - 5 0  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
5. Disk 6 is the printer’s internal hard disk. Press the Select key.  
The following message displays:  
FORMAT  
ARE YOU SURE?  
NOTE: If you decide not to format the internal hard disk,  
press the Menu key to back out of the submenus. When you  
reach the top level, you can use the Next or Previous key to  
select the menu you want.  
6. Press the Selectkeyto begin formatting.Themessagewindow  
displays:  
FORMAT DISK  
FORMATTING  
Then when formatting is finished, the message window  
displays:  
FORMAT DISK  
COMPLETED  
7. Press the Menu key until the following message appears:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
INSTALL TO DISK  
8. Go to the next section for information on reinstalling the  
system software and fonts.  
Installing Print System Software and Fonts  
NOTE: The system software and fonts provided with the  
magicolor LX printer will not function in other versions  
of the magicolor printer (such as the magicolor or the  
magicolor Plus). If magicolor LX software or fonts are  
downloaded to a non-magicolor LX printer, an error  
message will appear on the start-up page.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 5 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 8  
Print system software and font backup disks are supplied with the  
printer in case you ever need to reinstall them. For example, if the  
printer’s internal hard disk is reformatted, the system software and  
fonts will need to be reinstalled.  
The procedure for downloading system software depends on  
whether the printer software is functional (the printer starts up  
normally and IDLE appears in the message window) or  
non-functional (the system software cannot start up), and whether  
you are sending from a PC or a Macintosh. Printer fonts wouldonly  
ever need to be reinstalled if the printer software is not functional.  
NOTE: When you reload the system software, the printer  
configuration is returned to its factory default settings, so  
you may want to print out an advanced status page from  
the Administration/Special Pages submenu so you have  
a record of current configuration-menu settings. See  
chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” of your User’s Guide  
for information on using the configuration menu..  
Installing System Softwarefrom a PC toa Functional  
Printer  
1. Make sure you have PS Executive Series printer utilities  
(provided on a disk with your printer) installed on your PC.  
Installation instructions are in the README file on the PS  
Exec disk.  
2. Make sure the printer is on and that the system software is  
functioning normally (IDLE appears in the message  
window). If the system software is not functioning, see  
“Installing System Software and Fonts from a PC to a  
Non-Functional Printer,” below.  
3. Insert the System Software/DOS disk (provided with your  
printer) into your PC’s floppy disk drive.  
8 - 5 2  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
4. At the DOS C:\ prompt, type the following commands to  
extract the system software file to your PC’s hard disk:  
NOTE: This file takes up about 2.5 MB of disk space when  
extracted.  
md \qmssys↵  
cd \qmssys↵  
a:system↵  
If the system software disk is in another floppy disk drive,  
substitute the name of that drive for a.  
5. At the DOS C:\QMSSYS prompt, type the following  
command to make sure the SYSTEM.DL file is in the  
QMSSYS directory:  
dir↵  
6. Start PS Exec.  
7. Choose Download System Code from the PS Exec File menu.  
The Download System Code dialog box appears.  
8. In the Download System Code dialog box, find and select  
SYSTEM.DL.  
9. Choose the Send button to start the download.  
When downloading is complete, IDLE appears on the  
printer’s message window.  
10. When the software has finished installing, turn the printer off  
and on again to activate the new code.  
11. At the DOS C:\QMSSYS prompt, type the following  
command to delete the SYSTEM.DL file from the QMSSYS  
directory:  
del *.dl↵  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 5 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
Installing System Software and Fonts from a PC to a  
Non-Functional Printer  
Follow these instructions to download system software and fonts  
from a PC to a non-functional printer:  
NOTE: These files take up about 5.5 MB of disk space when  
extracted.  
1. Insert the System Software/DOS disk (provided with your  
printer) into your PC’s floppy disk drive.  
2. At the DOS C:\ prompt, type the following command to  
extract the system software file to your PC’s hard disk:  
md \qmssys↵  
cd \qmssys↵  
a:system↵  
If the system software disk is in another drive, substitute the  
name of that drive for a.  
3. InserttheSystemFonts 1/DOSdiskinto yourPC’sfloppydisk  
drive.  
4. Type the following command to extract the first PostScript  
fonts file to your PC’s hard disk:  
a:af2psfn1↵  
5. InserttheSystemFonts 2/DOSdiskinto yourPC’sfloppydisk  
drive.  
6. Type the following command to extract the second PostScript  
fonts file to your PC’s hard disk:  
a:af2psfn2↵  
7. Insert the PCL 5 Fonts/DOS disk into your PC’s floppy disk  
drive.  
8 - 5 4  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
8. Type the following command to extract the PCL 5 fonts file  
to your PC’s hard disk:  
a:af2pclfn↵  
9. At the DOS C:\QMSSYS prompt, type the following  
command to make sure these files are in the QMSSYS  
directory: SYSTEM.DL, AF2PSFN1.DL, AF2PSFN2.DL,  
and AF2PCLFN.DL:  
dir↵  
10. Turn the printer off and then on again. The following message  
displays in the window:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
READY TO BOOT  
11. Immediately press the Select key (before this message  
disappears). When you press the Select key, the following  
message appears in the message window:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
BOOT SYSTEM  
NOTE: If 10 seconds passes before you press the Select key,  
the IDLEmessage appears, and you must return to step 2.  
12. Press the Next key until INSTALL TO DISKappears on the  
second line of the message window:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
INSTALL TO DISK  
13. Press the Select key to enter the Install to Disk submenu. Then  
press the Next key until the name of the communication port  
you’re using appears in the second line of the message  
window, for example:  
INSTALL TO DISK  
PARALLEL  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 5 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
14. Press theSelectkeyto enter thecommunicationportsubmenu.  
The following appears on the second line of the message  
window:  
TARGET DISK 6  
15. Press the Select key. The following message appears in the  
window:  
INSTALL TO DISK  
CONNECTING....  
16. At your PC, at the C:\QMSSYS prompt, send the files you just  
extracted to the parallel port using the DOS copy command  
with the /b (binary file) option:  
copy /b *.dl lpt1:↵  
The software is installed when the following message  
appears:  
INSTALL TO DISK  
COMPLETE  
Once you have completed installing the system software, you  
are ready to restart the system as described here:  
17. Press the Menu key. The message window displays the  
following message:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
INSTALL TO DISK  
18. Press the Next key until the message window displays the  
following message:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
BOOT SYSTEM  
19. Press the Select key to enter the Boot System submenu. The  
following message appears in the message window:  
8 - 5 6  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
BOOT SYSTEM  
HARD DISK  
20. Press the Select key and the following message appears:  
BOOT SYSTEM  
HARD DISK 6  
21. Press the Select key. The system begins loading, and the  
following message displays:  
BOOT SYSTEM  
LOADING  
22. At this point, DO NOT TOUCH ANY KEYS until the  
following message appears:  
IDLE  
NOTE: If you do touch some keys during this step, you must  
go back to step 9 and start from there again.  
23. At the DOS C:\QMSSYS prompt, type the following  
command to delete the system and font files from your PC’s  
hard disk:  
del *.dl↵  
Installing System Software from a Macintosh to a  
Functional Printer  
NOTE: This installation procedure uses the LocalTalk port.  
1. Turnon the printerandwaitforIDLEtoappear in the message  
window.  
If the current printer system software is not functioning, see  
“Installing System Software and Fonts from a Macintosh to a  
Non-Functional Printer,” below.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 5 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
2. Make sure you have PS Executive Series utilities (provided  
on a disk with your printer) installed on your Macintosh.  
Installation instructions are in the README file on the PS  
Exec disk.  
3. Usethefollowing procedureto decompresstheSystemLoader  
program and install it on your Macintosh’s hard disk:  
a. Insert the System Software/Macintosh disk (provided with your  
printer) in your Macintosh’s floppy disk drive.  
b. Double-click the SystemLoader icon.  
c. Specify a folder when the program asks for a place to install  
SystemLoader.  
d. Choose the Save button.  
4. Start PS Exec.  
5. Choose Download System Code from the PS Exec File menu.  
The Download System Code dialog box appears.  
6. In the Download SystemCode dialogbox, find SystemLoader  
and select it.  
7. Choose the Send button to start the download.  
When downloading is complete, the message “Download  
Complete!appears on the Macintosh screen, and IDLE  
appears on the printer’s message window.  
8. Restart the printer to activate the new system software.  
Installing System Software and Fonts from a Macin-  
tosh to a Non-Functional Printer  
If the current printer system software is not functioning, you must  
connect your Macintosh to the printer’s serial port to reinstall the  
system software and the printer fonts. The download will not work  
over the LocalTalk interface in this case. Your Macintosh vendor  
8 - 5 8  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
can provide you with a cable (with DIN-8 female and DB-25 male  
connectors) for this, or you can see appendix B, “Technical  
Specifications,” for the correct cable pinouts.  
NOTE: If you have access to a PC, printer system software and  
fonts can also be downloaded from the PC to the printer’s  
parallel or serial port. See “Installing System Software  
and Fonts from a PC to a Non-Functional Printer,” earlier  
in this chapter, for instructions.  
1. Connect the printer serial port to the Macintosh’s printer or  
modem port. The modem port provides the fastest download.  
2. Usethefollowing procedureto decompresstheSystemLoader  
program and install it on your Macintosh’s hard disk:  
a. Insert the System Software/Macintosh disk (provided with your  
printer) in your Macintosh’s floppy disk drive.  
b. Double-click the SystemLoader icon.  
c. Specify a folder when the program asks for a place to install  
SystemLoader.  
d. Choose the Save button.  
3. Turnthe printer off and then on again. Waituntil thefollowing  
message displays in the message window:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
READY TO BOOT  
Then immediately press the Select key. The following  
message appears:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
*BOOT SYSTEM  
4. Press the Next key until INSTALL TO DISK appears on the  
second line of the message window:  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 5 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
INSTALL TO DISK  
5. Press the Select key to enter the Install to Disk submenu.  
6. Press the Next key until SERIALappears in the second line  
of the message window:  
INSTALL TO DISK  
SERIAL  
7. Press the Select key to enter the Serial submenu. The  
following message appears:  
SERIAL  
TARGET DISK 6  
8. Press the Select key. The following message appears in the  
window:  
INSTALL TO DISK  
CONNECTING....  
9. At the Macintosh, start SystemLoader from your hard disk by  
double-clicking the SystemLoader icon.  
10. Inthedialogboxthatappears, make surethe correct download  
port is selected; then choose the Send button to start the  
download.  
When the downloading process is complete, the message  
“Download Complete!” appears on the Macintosh  
screen and the following appears in the printer message  
window:  
INSTALL TO DISK  
COMPLETE  
Now use the following procedure to install the printer  
PostScript fonts:  
8 - 6 0  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
11. At the printer control panel, press the Menu key. The  
following appears in the printer message window:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
INSTALL TO DISK  
12. Press the Select key to enter the Install to Disk submenu.  
13. Press the Next key until SERIALappears in the second line  
of the message window:  
14. Press the Select key to enter the SERIAL submenu. The  
following message appears:  
SERIAL  
TARGET DISK 6  
15. Press the Select key. The following message appears in the  
window:  
INSTALL TO DISK  
CONNECTING....  
16. At the Macintosh, insert the disk labeled System Fonts  
1/Macintosh (shipped with your printer) in your Macintosh’s  
floppy disk drive.  
17. Start FontLoader from the floppy disk drive by  
double-clicking the FontLoader icon.  
NOTE: It’s not necessary to copy FontLoader to the hard drive.  
This does not speed up the downloading process.  
18. Inthedialogboxthatappears, make surethe correct download  
port is selected; then choose the Send button.  
When the font downloading is complete, the message  
“Download Complete!” appears on the Macintosh  
screen and the following appears in the printer message  
window:  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 6 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
INSTALL TO DISK  
COMPLETE  
19. Repeat steps 11 through 18 to install the rest of the printer  
fonts on the disk labeled System Fonts 2/Macintosh.  
20. When the system software and fonts are loaded use the  
following procedure to restart the printer:  
a. At the printer control panel, press the Menu key. The following  
appears in the printer message window:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
INSTALL TO DISK  
b. Press the Next key until the message window displays the  
following message:  
QMS SOFTLOAD x.x  
BOOT SYSTEM  
c. Press the Select key to enter the Boot System submenu. The  
following message appears in the message window:  
BOOT SYSTEM  
HARD DISK  
d. Press the Select key and the following message appears:  
BOOT SYSTEM  
HARD DISK 6  
e. Press the Select key. The system begins loading, and the  
following message displays:  
BOOT SYSTEM  
LOADING  
At this point, DO NOT TOUCH ANY KEYS until the following  
message appears in the printer message window:  
IDLE  
8 - 6 2  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
NOTE: If you do touch some keys during this step, you must go  
back to step 20a and start from there again.  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
8 - 6 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8  
8 - 6 4  
P r i n t e r O p t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Chapter highlights:  
Responding to status messages  
Clearing media jams  
Preventing media jams  
Internal hard disk problems  
Miscellaneous problems: a quick check  
Mechanical problems  
Print quality problems  
Placing a service call  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Introduction  
This chapter explains how to deal with control panel messages,  
remove jams, cancel jobs, and troubleshoot printer problems.  
Responding to Status Messages  
The following status messages may appear in the control panel  
message window:  
x ACTIVE  
JOBS  
The printer is on line, and one or more jobs are in  
progress. The x is replaced by the number of jobs in the  
queue.  
ADJUST  
xxxxx BIN  
A media cassette is either not installed or installed  
incorrectly. The xxxxx indicates the cassette in  
question. Either install or reinstall the indicated  
cassette.  
BACK PANEL The back coverover the transferunit is notfully closed.  
OPEN  
Close the back cover.  
BELT  
The OPC belt cartridge is either not installed or  
CARTRIDGE incorrectly installed. Either install a cartridge if one is  
MIS- not present or reinstall the current one correctly. (See  
INSTALLED chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative  
Maintenance,” for information on replacing the OPC  
belt cartridge.)  
CANCELLING The Cancel key has been used to cancel the current job.  
JOB  
This message is displayed until the job is cancelled.  
CHECK  
WASTE  
TONER  
The waste toner pack is full and needs to be replaced  
or is not installed properly. See “Replacing the Waste  
Toner Pack” in chapter 6 for details.  
CLOSE  
MANUAL  
The manual feed tray is open when a file is being sent  
to print from another cassette. Close the manual feed  
FEED TRAY tray.  
x DEV LOW  
A developer cartridge is running low and needs to be  
replaced. Thex is replaced by thecolorofthe developer  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 9  
cartridge that needs attention. After installing the new  
cartridge, you have to clear this message through the  
control panel using the Clear Warning option. (See  
chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative  
Maintenance,” for details on replacing the developer  
cartridge and “Administration/Engine” in chapter 4 for  
details on clearing the warning.)  
x DEVELOPER A developer cartridge is not installed or installed  
UNIT MIS- incorrectly. The x is replaced by the color of the  
INSTALLED developer unit that needs attention. Either install a  
developer cartridge if one is not present or reinstall the  
current one correctly. (See chapter 6, “Consumables  
and Preventative Maintenance,” for information on  
replacing the developer cartridge.)  
FUSER  
OIL LOW  
The oil bottle for the fuser unit is running low. If you  
have a new bottle on hand, you may want to change the  
bottle now. (See chapter 6, “Consumables and  
Preventative Maintenance,” for information on  
replacing the oil bottle.) If not, order a replacement  
bottle now. A limited number of copies (approximately  
100) will still run. However, when the oil runs out, the  
printer stops and the FUSER OIL EMPTY status  
message appears.  
FUSER  
OIL EMPTY  
The oil bottle for the fuser unit is empty. The printer  
will not run anymore copies until the bottle is replaced.  
(See chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative  
Maintenance,” for information on replacing the oil  
bottle.)  
IDLE  
No jobs are in progress.  
IDLE INPUT The system is on line and printing previously accepted  
PRINTING  
jobs. No new jobs are arriving at the communication  
interfaces.  
INNER  
JAM  
Media has jammed leavingtheOPC beltcartridge area.  
Remove the jam (see the “Inner Jam” section later in  
this chapter for details).  
INITIALIZING The printer is warming up and getting ready to go on  
line.  
9 - 2  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
MISFEED  
JAM  
Mediahasjammed leaving themedia cassette. Remove  
the jam (see the “Misfeed Jam” section later in this  
chapter for details).  
OUTER  
JAM  
Media has jammed leaving the paper exit unit. Remove  
the jam (see the “Outer Jam” section later in this  
chapter for details).  
PRINTING  
STATUS  
A status page has been requested via the Print Status  
option in the Administration/Special Pages menu. This  
does not necessarily mean that the status page is  
printing at the particular moment the message is  
displayed since other jobs may be ahead of it in the job  
queue.  
PRINTING  
TEST  
A sample page or a registration page has been  
requested. This does not necessarily mean that the page  
is printing as the messageis being displayed (other jobs  
may be ahead of it in the job queue).  
PUT xxxxxx  
PAPER IN  
A media cassette is empty; reload the cassette. xxxxxx  
PAPER is the media size the cassette is currently  
xxxxx INPUT configured for. xxxxx INPUT BIN is the empty  
BIN  
cassette. (See chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily  
Operations,” for information on refilling cassettes.)  
REPLACE  
BELT  
The OPC belt cartridge needs to be replaced. After  
installing the new cartridge, you have to clear this  
message through the control panel using the Clear  
Warning option. (See chapter 6, “Consumables and  
Preventative Maintenance,for details onreplacingthe  
OPC belt cartridge and “Administration/Engine” in  
chapter 4 for details on clearing the warning.)  
SIDE PANEL The waste toner cover is not fully closed. Close the  
OPEN cover.  
TOP COVER The top cover of the printer is either off or partially  
OPEN  
open. Make sure it is seated properly and fully closed.  
x TONER  
EMPTY  
A toner cartridge is empty. The x is replaced by the  
color of the toner cartridge that needs to be replaced.  
(See chapter 6, “Consumables and Preventative  
Maintenance,” for information on replacing a toner  
cartridge.)  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
WAITING ON The printer compiler is waiting on incoming data for  
INPUT  
END JOB?  
the first job in the job queue. It is possible that the job  
did not end with an end-of-job indicator and therefore  
cannot end by itself. The message is displayed in case  
you want to cancel the job or send an end-of-job  
indicator. Themessage disappears if moreinputarrives  
from the port, if the relevant specified timeout elapses,  
or if you send an end-of-job indicator. No other jobs  
can be printed until this job has ended.  
WARMING  
UP  
The printer is warming up; the fuser is at a low  
temperature. Wait until the printer has warmed up  
before you print.  
Service Call Messages  
CALL FOR  
SERVICE  
A mechanical error has occurred and a service call is  
required. Before calling for service, make a note of the  
full message in the message window. See appendix A,  
“QMS Customer Support,” for information on how to  
contact QMS. When a CALL FOR SERVICE x  
appears, the printer stops until the required service is  
complete.  
100K  
CHECKUP  
Approximately 100,000 copies have been printed. It’s  
time for periodicmaintenance and parts replacement to  
protect your printer and maintain print quality.  
REPLACE  
FUSER  
Approximately 60,000 copies have been printed. It’s  
time to replace the fuser to ensure print quality and  
reduce wear on your printer.  
The 100K CHECKUPand the REPLACE FUSERmessages can  
be cleared through the Clear Warning option in the  
Administration/Engine menu. Then, you can continue to use the  
printer. (See “Administration/Engine” in chapter 4 for details on  
clearing the warning.)  
CAUTION: We strongly recommend that you have the fuser  
replaced or the 100,000 copy checkup done as soon as possible  
after a message appears. If you clear one of these messages, the  
9 - 4  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 9  
counter that tracks that particular service resets to 0 and the mes-  
sage does not reappear until after another complete cycle. If you  
continue to use the printer without the proper maintenance or part  
replacement, print quality can deteriorate and the wear on the  
printer can shorten the printer’s life.  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Clearing Media Jams  
When a jam occurs, the message window on the control panel  
displays one of three messages, MISFEED JAM, INNER JAM,  
or OUTER JAM. The following sections contain procedures for  
clearing each type of jam.  
Clearing Misfeed Jams  
When the control panel message window displays MISFEED  
JAM,media has jammed while leaving the media cassette or the  
manual feed tray. To clear this jam, use the following procedure:  
1. Pull out the media cassette (fig. 9.1), and check the  
media-cassette slot. If media is there, skip to step 4. If not,  
continue to step 2.  
Fig. 9.1 Remove the Paper Cassette  
9 - 6  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 9  
2. Locate the manual-feed platform: it’s a black plastic tray at  
the top of the media-cassette slot.  
3. Remove the manual-feed platform by lifting it up and forward  
at the front until it drops out (fig. 9.2).  
Fig. 9.2 Remove Top Tray of Cassette Slot  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
4. Remove any jammed media you see (fig. 9.3).  
Fig. 9.3 Remove the Jammed Media  
5. Check to be sure no other pieces of media are lodged farther  
back in the slot. Then, if you removed the manual-feed  
platform, replace it. (Push it back into the printer until it is  
secure.)  
6. Make sure the media in the cassette is in good condition, lies  
flat, and does not exceed the upper-limit mark on the cassette.  
7. Slide the cassette back into the printer until it’s secure.  
8. Open and close the top cover to clear the jam message in the  
control panel window.  
When the control panel message window displays IDLE, the  
printer is ready to print.  
9 - 8  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Clearing Inner Jams  
When the control panel message window displays INNER JAM,  
media has jammed leaving the OPC belt cartridge, and the leading  
edge has jammed around the transfer area. To clear this jam, use  
the following procedure:  
1. Openthe backcoverbypressingthe top-right cornerto release  
the spring latch (fig. 9.4).  
Fig. 9.4 Open the Back Cover  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 9  
2. Open the transfer unit by grasping it in the center by the green  
handle and pulling it toward you and down (fig. 9.5).  
Fig. 9.5 Open the Transfer Unit  
NOTE: To avoid damage to the rollers, always remove  
jammed media gently. Also, toner images on the media aren’t  
fused (set), which means toner is still loose. Avoid getting  
toner on your hands and clothes while removing the jammed  
media. If you accidentally get toner on your hands or clothes,  
lightly dust off as much as possible. If some toner remains,  
use cool, not hot water, to rinse it off your hands or washable  
clothing.  
9 - 1 0  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
3. Remove the jammed media if the media is around the drum  
by using the following procedure. Otherwise, skip to step 4.  
a. Open the manual feed tray by pressing the top, right corner (fig.  
9.6).  
Fig. 9.6 Open the Manual Feed Tray  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
b. Pull up the green handle on the OPC belt cartridge and then pull  
the cartridge out about 2" (5 cm) to relieve tension on the drum.  
c. Remove the media from the transfer unit end of the printer (fig.  
9.7).  
Fig. 9.7 Remove the Jammed Media  
d. Close the transfer unit and the back cover.  
e. Firmly push the OPC belt cartridge back into the printer until it  
snaps into place. The cartridge is in place when you can see the  
green arrows on the left and right inside metal frame of the  
printer. Then, push down the green handle to lock the OPC  
cartridge in place, and close the manual feed tray.  
f. Skip to step 5.  
4. Remove the jammed media if the media is around the fuser  
roller by using the following procedure.  
9 - 1 2  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
WARNING!  
The fuser unit is hot! Do not remove a jam in this  
area until the fuser unit cools.  
ACHTUNG!  
Die Fixiereinheit wird sehr heiß! Bitte achtenSie  
darauf, daß sie diese einige Zeit abkühlen lassen, bevor Sie  
einen Papierstau beseitigen.  
a. Open the paper exit unit. (See “Installing the Cleaning Pad and  
Oil Bottle” in chapter 2 if you are not sure how to do this.)  
b. Remove the jammed media by pulling it straight out from above  
the transfer unit (fig. 9.8).  
Fig. 9.8 Remove Media from the Transfer Unit Area  
5. Close the transfer unit, and then the back cover.  
6. Close the paper exit unit.  
When the control panel message window displays IDLE, the  
printer is ready to print.  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Clearing Outer Jams  
When the control panel message window displays OUTER JAM,  
media has jammed leaving the paper exit unit. To clear this jam,  
use the following procedure:  
1. Openthe backcoverbypressingthe top-right cornerto release  
the spring latch (fig. 9.9).  
2. Open the transfer unit by grasping the green handle in the  
center and pulling it toward you and down (fig. 9.9).  
Fig. 9.9 Open the Transfer Unit  
WARNING!  
The fuser unit is hot! Do not remove a jam in this  
area until the fuser unit cools.  
ACHTUNG!  
Die Fixiereinheit wird sehr heiß! Bitte achtenSie  
darauf, daß sie diese einige Zeit abkühlen lassen, bevor Sie  
einen Papierstau beseitigen.  
9 - 1 4  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 9  
3. Open the paper exit unit (fig. 2.13).  
4. Open the pressure-release lever on the fuser unit (fig. 9.10).  
Fig. 9.10 Open the Pressure-Release Lever  
CAUTION: If you can see the outer jam in the transfer unit, always  
remove it by pulling the media out through the transfer unit, not up  
and out the paper exit unit. This prevents the unfused toner from  
coming off on the exit rollers and getting down into the printer.  
Sincetoner imagesonthemediaaren’tset, avoidgetting loosetoner  
on your hands and clothes while removing the jammed media. If  
you accidentally get toner on your hands or clothes, lightly dust off  
as much as possible. If some toner remains, use cool, not hot water,  
to rinse it off your hands or washable clothing. To avoid damage  
to the rollers, always remove jammed media gently.  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
5. Remove the jammed media by pulling it straight out from  
above the transfer unit (fig. 9.11).  
Fig. 9.11 Remove the Jammed Media  
6. Close the transfer unit, and then the back cover.  
7. Close the pressure release lever on the fuser unit.  
8. Close the paper exit unit.  
When the control panel message window displays IDLE, the  
printer is ready to print.  
9 - 1 6  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
If the Media Jam Message Stays On  
1. If a jam message displays in the control panel message  
window, clear the jam using the appropriate procedure from  
the “Clearing Media Jams” section earlier in this chapter. If  
the message is still there, make sure cassettes have the correct  
size media, the size key slide on the back end of the cassette  
is set correctly, and all covers and doors are completely  
closed.  
2. If the message displays when no jam is evident, make sure the  
printer is configured for the media size and type currently in  
the cassette. (See chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily  
Operations,” or chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” to learn  
how to use the Paper and the Media keys.)  
3. As a last resort, try turning the printer off and on (this will  
cause jobs to be lost).  
Jam Recovery  
The printer has automatic jam recovery, so if a media jam occurs,  
once you remove the jammed media, the printer reprints the  
jammed page and then continues with the print job, as long as the  
printer power has not been turned off. The Jam Recovery option is  
located in the Administration/Engine section of the printer  
configuration menu.  
NOTE: Because jam recovery requires system memory, it can  
slow print jobs.  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 9  
Preventing Media Jams  
Some printer problems are caused by improper handling of media  
or use of the wrong media and consumables. The following section  
provides information about correctly handling media and  
preventing jams.Several things you can do to reduce print media  
jamming in your printer are  
Set the printer for the print media type and size currently  
in the cassette. (See chapter 5, “Print Media and Daily  
Operations,orchapter4,PrinterConfiguration,” to learn  
how to use the Tray Select and Media keys.)  
Use QMS supplied toner and developer, and use  
QMS-recommended print media (See appendix B,  
“Technical Specifications.”)  
Make sure print media is not torn, folded, or wrinkled.  
Do not overfill the media cassette: it holds 250 sheets of  
paper, 50 transparencies, or label stock up to the  
upper-limit mark on the cassette.  
NOTE: If the printer is operating in a low-humidity  
environment, we recommend printing fewer than 20  
consecutive transparencies to prevent jamming.  
If you have problems with double feeding, remove the  
paper from the cassette and fan the edges. The sheets may  
be sticking together. (However, do not fan transparencies;  
this can create electrostatic buildup that can cause  
jamming.)  
Store print media away from moisture and humidity.  
Moisture and humidity may cause media to turn up at the  
edges or wrinkles to occur. The recommended relative  
humidity during operation is 60%-70%.  
9 - 1 8  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 9  
Load media printing side up, top edge first. The printing  
side of media is indicated on the wrapping, so leave it in  
its wrapping until you are ready to load it.  
Keep the paper-feed rollers and the manual-feed belts  
clean. Dirtyrollersand beltscandrawmedia unevenly into  
the printer. See “Cleaning the Paper-Feed Roller and the  
Manual-Feed Belts” in chapter 6, “Consumables and  
Preventive Maintenance.”  
Preventing Envelope Jams  
To prevent envelope jams  
Keep envelopes in their original box to protect them until  
they’re used. Don’t use damaged envelopes.  
Store envelopes in a low-humidity environment.  
Use only the envelope types specified in “Media  
Handling” in appendix B, “Technical Specifications.”  
Don’t use envelopes with windows.  
If you’re using the optional envelope cassette, use it in the  
standard cassette slot (not the optional feeder), and don’t  
place more than 30 envelopes in the cassette at once.  
Internal Hard Disk Problems  
If you experience unexplained or erratic problems with the internal  
hard disk, you may want to reformat the hard disk and reload the  
print system software. See chapter 8, “Printer Options,” for  
information.  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 9  
Miscellaneous Problems: A Quick Check  
If you have just installed your printer and are having problems, be  
sure you have correctly followed the setup steps outlined in chapter  
2, “Initial Printer Setup,” and chapter 3, “Connecting the Printer.”  
Then, check the following:  
1. Is there a status message in the control panel window?  
If so, go to question 2.  
If not, check the following:  
Is the power cord plugged into both the power outlet and  
the printer?  
Are both power switches on?  
Is the power outlet working?  
Does the line voltage from the power outlet match the  
printer’spowerrequirements? See appendixB,Technical  
Specifications.”  
2. Can you print a status page? (This option is located in the  
Administration/Special Pages menu.)  
If so, go to question 3.  
If not, check the following:  
Is the printer off line before you try to enter the menu? It  
should be.  
Is the cassette empty? If it is out of media, the message  
PUT xxxxxx PAPER IN xxxxx BINis displayed  
in the control panel message window and the Message  
LED is lit.  
9 - 2 0  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 9  
Is the toner or developer depleted?  
Are all printer doors and covers closed securely?  
Is there a media jam?  
3. Is the printer receiving data from the computer? If the Data  
LED blinks after sending the file, the printer is receiving the  
data.  
If so, go to question 4.  
If not, check the following:  
Are the interface cables securely fastened?  
Is the printer on line? The Online LED should be lit.  
Is your application set correctly? Are the communication  
parameters the same as those on your host and printer?  
If you are using the serial interface, is the baud rate (speed  
of data transmission) of the printer, the computer, andyour  
application the same?  
If you still cannot identify the problem, contact your QMS  
vendor.  
4. Is the printer printing codes or not printing at all when in ESP  
mode?  
Reconfigure the port for the emulation in which you are  
trying to print. See chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for  
information on configuring the printer.  
If ASCII or text files won’t print, make sure the ESP  
Default option (in the Administration/Emulations menu)  
is set to PCL5, the factory default.  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
If you continue to have problems with the ESP mode  
selecting printer emulation, contact your QMS vendor.  
IBM PC and Compatible Computer Checklist  
If you are experiencing problems with printing from a PC (not  
related to print quality), check the following:  
Does your application setup match the printer interface  
settings?  
Have yousetup yourprinter portatthesystemlevel(DOS)  
and installed a color PostScript driver within your  
application? (Refer to your DOS, Windows, and  
application documentation.)  
Do you need an end-of-job for the previous job?  
If you are using a serial interface, are you experiencing a  
protocol problem? Set the printer to DTR/DSR protocol.  
If that does not work, check your serial interface cable.  
You mayalsowant to try setting the printer to XON/XOFF  
protocol.  
Does your application support color PostScript Level 2?  
(Check the application manual. If your application  
supports color PostScript Level 1 but not Level 2, try  
setting the printer to Level 1 in the Administration/  
Emulations/PostScript/Emulation Level menu.)  
Apple Macintosh Checklist  
If you are experiencing problems with printing from a Macintosh  
(not related to print quality), check the following:  
9 - 2 2  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Chapter 9  
Is the printer properly connected via LocalTalk-type cable  
and transformer boxes? (See chapter 3, “Connecting the  
Printer,” for information.)  
Is LaserWriter (and Laser Prep, if you are using  
LaserWriter6.0.xorlater)installedin yourSystemFolder?  
IntheChooser, haveyou selectedtheLaserWriter icon and  
highlighted the correct printer?  
Is AppleTalk active in the Chooser dialog box?  
Are the screen fonts installed?  
Is your application compatible with color PostScript Level  
2? (Check the application manual. If your application  
supports color PostScript Level 1 but not Level 2, try  
setting the printer to Level 1 in the Administration/  
Emulations/PostScript/Emulation Level menu.)  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Mechanical Problems  
Control Panel Selections Don’t Take Effect  
Make sure you’re saving menu selections before exiting  
the menu. (See “Saving Configuration Selections” in  
chapter 4, “Printer Configuration.”)  
Some configuration selections do not take effect until the  
printer has been rebooted. Look in chapter 4, “Printer  
Configuration,” to see if the selection you are making  
requires a reboot.  
Data LED Stays Lit  
After the printer warms up, if the Data LED stays on, two problems  
may exist.  
1. If you are downloading additional fonts, too many can  
overload the printer’s memory causing the printer to reset and  
lose information previously downloaded to RAM. Make sure  
you have enough printer memory for the additional fonts.  
Additional memory (RAM) is available and easily installed.  
Contact your QMS vendor for informationonRAMupgrades.  
See chapter 8, “Printer Options.”  
2. On an AppleTalk network, Macintosh computers sometimes  
interfere with each other. If this happens often, check all the  
Macintosh computers on the network to make sure they are  
using the same version of LaserWriter and Laser Prep. If  
neither of these files is the problem, contact your QMS  
vendor.  
No Start-up Page  
If no start-up page prints, check the following:  
9 - 2 4  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter 9  
1. Is the printer on line?  
2. Has the start-up page been disabled? Check the Do Start Page  
option in the Administration/Startup Options menu to make  
sure the start-up page is on. If the start-up page is turned on,  
go to step 3.  
3. Turn the printer off, then back on. It takes approximately 4  
minutes for the printer to warm up from a cold start or less  
than aminute from a warmstart. Be sureyou wait longenough  
for a start-up page to print before suspecting a problem.  
4. Check to be sure the media cassette is in place and secure.  
5. Check for a media jam. See “Clearing Media Jams” earlier in  
this chapter for details.  
6. Make sure all toner and developer cartridges are installed and  
not depleted.  
7. Make sure the fuser oil is not depleted.  
If you have not solved the problem and no status message displays,  
call your QMS vendor for help.  
Printer Resets  
1. Different versions of LaserWriter and Laser Prep being used  
on a network can cause printer reinitialization.  
2. Downloading too many fonts can overload the printer’s  
memory and cause the printer to reset to default. Additional  
memory (RAM) is availableand easilyinstalled. Contact your  
QMS vendor for information on RAM upgrades. See chapter  
8, “Printer Options.”  
3. If the printer resets in other circumstances, call your QMS  
vendor for service.  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 2 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 9  
Printer Locks Up  
If the INITIALIZINGmessage remains in the message window,  
and you are not be able to enter the Configuration menu or print  
even after you turn the printer off and on again, the printer has  
probably been incorrectly configured. You can reset to factory  
defaults by simultaneously holding down the Select and  
Online/Offline key (for about 10 seconds) while turning the printer  
off and on again. The reset process takes several minutes to  
complete.  
Blank Pages  
1. Check for a status message to be sure the printer is not out of  
toner or developer.  
2. Be sure you removed the sealing tapes on newly installed  
toner and developer cartridges.  
3. If no toner cartridges are empty and sealing tapes have been  
removed, toner may have become packed down. Take the  
toner cartridges out and gently shake them horizontally to  
loosen the toner. Then, reinstall the cartridges, making sure  
the cartridges go into the correct color slots. (See “Replacing  
the Toner Cartridge” in chapter 6 for details.)  
4. If these solutions do not work, contact your QMS vendor.  
Not All Pages Print  
1. Check your cable. You could have the wrong kind of cable,  
or your printer may not be configured for the correct cable and  
port.  
2. Make sure no one pressed the Cancel key while your job was  
printing.  
3. Check the control panel message window to see if the media  
cassette is empty.  
9 - 2 6  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 9  
4. Increase the emulation timeout (for HP PCL andHP-GL files)  
or the PS wait timeout (for PostScript files).  
5. If you are using a PC, make sure that the mode statement in  
your AUTOEXEC.BAT file ends in a p so that print jobs are  
sent until the printer accepts them:  
mode lpt1:,,p  
6. Send an end-of-job in case a previous job lacked this  
command.  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 2 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Print Quality Problems  
Generally Poor Print Quality  
Make sure the printer is set for the type of media (paper,  
transparency film, or thick stock) you are printing on: use  
the Media key on the printer’s control panel to tell the  
printer whether paper or transparencies have been loaded  
in the currently selected cassette. See chapter 4, “Printer  
Configuration,” forinformationonusing thecontrolpanel.  
Make sure the media is in good shape and meets all the  
specifications in appendix B, “Technical Specifications.”  
Remove the toner cartridges and shake them horizontally.  
Toner can settle, and this procedure redistributes the toner.  
Reinstall the cartridges in the printer and try to print again.  
If the print appears too light or dark, change the print  
density dial settings for the toner cartridges as necessary  
(see “Adjusting Print Density” in chapter 5 for details).  
Then, try reprinting.  
NOTE: Changing the print density affects the resident  
color management system and should be done only as a  
last step to improve print quality.  
See chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output,” for more information  
on optimizing print quality.  
Specific Print Quality Problems  
The following section addresses specific print quality problems.  
Try the solutions in the sequence given. If these do not solve the  
problem, place a service call.  
9 - 2 8  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Chapter 9  
600 dpi Jobs Print at 300 dpi  
Make sure the printer is configured for 600 dpi.  
See chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for information.  
Make sure you have enough RAM installed for the job you  
are trying to print.  
If your printer has 12 MB RAM, color documents print in  
300 dpi. Monochrome documentscan beprinted in 600dpi  
if you configure the printer for monochrome printing,  
either through your application (if its driver, like the  
QMS-provided Windows and Macintosh drivers, supports  
this option) or through the printer control panel. You can  
print color and monochrome documents in 600 dpi if you  
install additional RAM in the printer. See appendix B,  
“Technical Specifications,” for a chart showing RAM  
requirements for different page sizes and numbers of  
colors.  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 2 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
White or Light Lines  
Remove each toner cartridge, shake it as you do before  
installing a new cartridge to redistribute toner, and then  
reinstall the cartridge.  
Install a new cartridge if necessary.  
Light Image (Entire Page)  
Increase the print density for any color(s) used on the page  
(see “Adjusting Print Density” in chapter 5 for details).  
Remove each toner cartridge for a color used on that page,  
and shake it as you do before installing a new cartridge.  
Then, reinstall the cartridge.  
Install a new toner cartridge if necessary. (See “Replacing  
a Toner Cartridge” in chapter 6 for details.)  
Light Image on the Left or Right Side of the Page (all colors)  
Make sure the printer is level (maximum 1° slant).  
Dark Image (Entire Page)  
Decreasetheprint density foranycolor(s)usedon thepage  
(see “Adjusting Print Density” in chapter 5 for details).  
Install a new cartridge if necessary. (See “Replacing a  
Toner Cartridge” in chapter 6, “Consumables and  
Preventative Maintenance,” for details.) The old cartridge  
may be defective, releasing too much toner.  
9 - 3 0  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Blurry Images, Scratches, or Missing Dots  
Make sure the media is in good shape and meets all the  
specifications in the “Media Handling” section of  
Appendix B, “Technical Specifications.”  
Check for a status message on the control panel. The toner  
or developer may be low. Replace cartridges as necessary.  
Make sure the paper path is clean. See the “Preventative  
Maintenance” section in chapter 6, “Consumables and  
Preventative Maintenance,” for details on cleaning the  
charger unit, various rollers, and plates.  
Check the OPC belt for dirt and scratches. Replace the  
OPC belt cartridge if necessary. (See the “Replacing the  
OPC Belt Cartridge” section in chapter 6.)  
If whole blocks or portions of the page are missing, there  
may be a mechanical problem; contact your QMS vendor.  
Image is Not Centered on the Page  
Make sure you aren’t printing outside the printer’s  
imageable region for the media size you’re using (see  
“Media Handling” in appendix B, “Technical  
Specifications”). You may need to change to a larger size  
media, or adjust the margin(s) through your application.  
If images are not printing within the imageable area for the  
pagesizeyou’re using, theprinter may be out ofalignment.  
See “The Status Pages” in chapter 5, “Print Media and  
Daily Operations,” for information on checking printer  
alignment.  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 3 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Color Jobs (or Portions of Jobs) Print in Monochrome  
Make sure you have enough RAM installed for the job you  
are trying to print.  
See appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” for a chart  
showing RAM requirements for different page sizes and  
numbers of colors.  
If you’re printing legal-sized pages, note that there are  
different imageable areas for black and color printing. See  
“Media Handling” section of Appendix B, “Technical  
Specifications.”  
Colors Not Registering Properly  
Check to make sure the printer is on a hard, level surface.  
Check for damage to the OPC belt cartridge. Replace it if  
necessary.  
Smudges on the Back of Pages  
Make sure the size key on the media cassette is set to the  
right size for each job. Smudges can occur if the wrong  
size was selected on the previous job causing the image to  
print off the side of the page onto the transfer roller. If this  
happens, run a few more pages through the printer to clean  
off the remaining toner.  
Dark Vertical Lines  
Check the OPC belt cartridge. Something may be caught  
under the cleaning blade or the cartridge may need to be  
replaced. Install a new OPC belt cartridge.  
9 - 3 2  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Sharp Horizontal Lines (across the feed direction)  
Place a service call.  
Partial Images or Image Too Small  
Check the imageable regions for the size media you are  
using (see “Media Handling” section of Appendix B,  
“Technical Specifications”). Are you trying to print  
outside of the imageable region of the page? If so, change  
to a larger size media, or adjust the margin(s) through your  
application.  
The charger unit or various roller and plates may be dirty.  
See “Preventative Maintenance” in chapter 6 for  
instructions on how to clean these parts.  
Smearing on Transparencies  
Make sure the printer is set for transparency printing: use  
the Media key on the printer’s control panel to tell the  
printertransparenciesare in the currently selectedcassette.  
See chapter 4, “Printer Configuration,” for information on  
using the control panel.  
Make sure the transparency stock is in good shape and  
meets all the specifications in the “Media Handling”  
section of appendix B, “Technical Specifications.” Try  
printinga fewtransparenciesatatimeandgivingthesheets  
a chance to cool between prints.  
Make sure the transparencies are loaded print side up and  
the cassette is not overloaded (50 sheets or less, not over  
the upper-limit mark inside the cassette).  
Check the print density dials for the toner cartridges. Try  
setting the dials in the middle (where the dot appears).  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
9 - 3 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9  
Placing a Service Call  
If you have a problem you cannot resolve, contact your QMS  
vendor. Your vendor is best equipped to immediately handle  
problem you may encounter. If you cannot get service from your  
vendor, see appendix A, “QMS Customer Support.”  
9 - 3 4  
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A  
QMS Customer Support  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
QMS Customer Support  
Several sources of help and information are available, depending  
on the type of help you need:  
1. Your QMS printer vendor  
Your localvendor(theonefromwhomyouboughttheprinter)  
may be best equipped to help you. Your vendor has specially  
trained service technicians available to answer questions, and  
the equipment to analyze your printer problems.  
2. Your application vendor  
Sometimes “printing” problems have more to do with the  
application being used than with the printer. In this case, the  
application manufacturer is the best source of help.  
3. Q-FAX  
Q-FAX, a QMS information retrieval service, provides  
applicationnotes,technicalsupportnotesoncommonprinting  
problems, and information about printer specifications,  
options, accessories, consumables, and prices.  
In the United States and Canada, call (800) 633-7213 to reach  
Q-FAX. In all other countries,call (334) 633-3850. Have your  
fax number handy when you call (or place the call from your  
fax machine’s handset).  
You can choose to have either a directory (a list of currently  
available documents on a particular topic) or a specific  
document sent to you. The first time you call, request the  
directory (press 2 on your phone or fax keypad when  
prompted). Then call back to requestspecific documents. You  
can order up to three documents per call.  
4. The QMS Corporate Bulletin Board System (BBS)  
Q M S C u s t o m e r S u p p o r t  
A - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A  
The bulletin board contains technical support notes,  
application notes, drivers, patches, and utilities, and you may  
leavetechnical questionsnot requiring animmediate response  
on electronic mail for the Sysop (System Operator). The  
bulletin board [(334) 633-3632] operates at 1200, 2400, 9600,  
and 14400 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit, with  
XMODEM, YMODEM,andZMODEMcapabilities. Contact  
QMS Customer Technical Assurance for more information  
about the bulletin board.  
5. CompuServe  
Through CompuServe, you can ask general (non-technical)  
questions, share information with other users, and access  
printing information and programs. When you use  
CompuServe, type the following command to go directly to  
the forum where QMS is located:  
go qmsprint  
The QMS library section contains application notes, printer  
drivers, utilities, technical information, and announcement  
files.  
6. The Internet  
The QMS server provides access to technical reports, new  
product announcements, a trade show schedule, and other  
general information about QMS. You can access the QMS  
server via any of the web viewers available to Internet users.  
If you don’t have access to a web viewer, we recommend the  
NCSA Mosaic web viewer (Mosaic is at  
ftp.ncsa.uiuc.edu).The QMS home page is at  
http://www.qms.com/. The QMS ftp resource is ftp.qms.com.  
7. QMS Customer Technical Assurance  
QMS Customer Technical Assurance is available in the US  
from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Central Standard Time, at (334)  
633-4500. You can also fax questions to CTA at (334)  
A - 2  
Q M S C u s t o m e r S u p p o r t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix A  
633-3716. Please indicate whether you would like a faxed or  
a phoned reply.  
If you call for assistance, have the following information  
ready so our technicians can help you more quickly:  
Your phone number, fax number, and shipping address  
A description of the problem  
The printer model and serial number  
The type of host computer you are using  
The type and version of operating system you are using  
The interface you are using, and, if serial, the protocol  
The application and version you are using  
The printer language you are using  
Your printer firmware version (listed on the status and  
start-up pages)  
If after consultation with CTA, you need to return the unit for  
repairs or warranty work, please be sure to get an RMA (Return  
Merchandise Authorization) number, since QMS cannot accept  
warranty work without this number. CTA can connect you with  
Customer Service to get this number.  
QMS National Service  
For information on service and maintenance of QMS and other  
manufacturers’ printers, call (800) 762-8894. For information  
about on-site service and depot repair, call (800) 858-1597. For  
information on spare parts, call (334) 633-4300 ext. 2530.  
Q M S C u s t o m e r S u p p o r t  
A - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A  
QMS World-wide Offices  
United States/ QMS, Inc.  
Latin America One Magnum Pass  
Mobile, AL 36618  
USA  
(334) 633-4300  
E-mail: info@qms.com  
Product Information: (800) 523-2696  
OEM Information: (800) 631-2692  
Consumables: (800) 777-7782  
US Fax: (334) 633-4866  
Latin America Fax: (334) 639-3347  
Canada  
QMS Canada, Inc.  
9630 Rte. Trans-Canadienne  
Saint-Laurent, Québec  
H4S 1V9 Canada  
Telephones: (514) 333-5940  
(800) 361-3392  
Fax: (514) 333-5949  
National Service Canada: (800) 206-9234  
Offices in Ottawa,  
Québec City, Toronto,  
and Vancouver  
Europe,  
Middle East,  
Africa  
Düsseldorf (49) 211/596 1333  
London (44) (1) 784 442255  
Maarssen (31) 3465 51 333  
Paris (33) 1 4 107 9393  
Stockholm (46) (8) 725 5680  
Asia-Pacific  
Hong Kong (852) 511 5300  
Melbourne 61 (3) 899 5777  
Sydney 61 (2) 901 3235  
Tokyo (81) (3) 3437-4030  
A - 4  
Q M S C u s t o m e r S u p p o r t  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B  
Technical Specifications  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Print Engine  
Print Method Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black electrophotographic  
recording with semiconductor laser. Dry toner, image  
transfer to print media.  
Resolution  
The table below shows minimum RAM requirements  
for different page sizes and numbers of colors (shaded  
areas indicate printing capabilities with the standard 12  
MB RAM):  
Page Size  
Dots per Minimum RAM Minimum  
Inch  
(Monochrome)  
RAM  
(Four-color)  
Letter  
Legal*  
A4  
300  
600  
300  
600  
300  
600  
300  
600  
300  
600  
12 MB  
12 MB  
12 MB  
16 MB  
12 MB  
12 MB  
12 MB  
12 MB  
12 MB  
12 MB  
12 MB  
24 MB  
16 MB  
28 MB  
12 MB  
24 MB  
12 MB  
24 MB  
12MB  
20 MB  
Executive  
Envelopes  
(DL and  
Com 10)  
*Although the monochrome imageable area for  
legal-sized pages is 8.11" x 13.61" (205.90 mm x  
345.60 mm), the full-color imageable region for this  
size is limited to 8.11" x 11.7" (205.90 mm x 297.18  
mm).  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
B - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B  
Print Speed  
12 pages per minute monochrome  
6 pages per minute 2- or 3-color  
3 pages per minute 4-color  
(Assuming the use of letter or A4 size with 30% or less  
toner coverage.)  
Recom-  
mended  
5,000 color prints per month  
20,000 monochrome prints per month  
Duty Cycle  
Warm-Up  
Time  
250 sec. maximum; 180 sec. average  
Not more than 58 dB (A)  
Noise Level  
Engine  
Switches  
Main power switch (back of printer)  
Remote power switch (front of printer)  
Dimensions  
Weight  
20.5" W x 22.3" D x 14.6" H  
520 mm W x 565 mm D x 370 mm H  
Approximately 106 lbs (48 kg) without consumables  
or options installed  
Controller  
Type  
Intel 80960CF RISC-based controller operating at 33  
MHz  
Fonts  
See chapter 7, “Optimizing Color Output,” for a list of  
the resident fonts.  
Emulations  
PostScript Level 2  
PostScript Level 1  
HP-GL (7470A/7475A/7550A/ColorPro)  
HP PCL 5C (HP XL 300)  
Hexdump  
Lineprinter  
Optional emulations  
Interfaces  
LocalTalk, parallel, serial, SCSI, optional network  
interface  
See “Cable Pinouts,” later in this chapter, for more  
information.  
B - 2  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B  
SCSI  
Supports optional SCSI disks, up to a 512 MB.  
12 or 24 MB RAM (upgradable to 64 MB)  
Standard  
RAM  
Internal Hard Disk  
Size  
80 MB IDE drive  
(Upgradeable to 512 MB.)  
Electrical Requirements  
Power  
Requirements  
120 V ±10%  
Frequency  
Power  
60 Hz (± 2Hz)  
Standby  
Consumption 1000 W max.; 150 W ave.  
Operation  
1000 W max.; 250 W ave.  
Energy Saver Mode*  
less than 45* W  
*Available only on Energy Star models of the printer  
when Energy Saver mode is enabled. See chapter 4,  
“Printer Configuration,” for more information on  
Energy Saver mode.  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
B - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B  
Environmental Requirements  
B - 4  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B  
Media Handling  
Media  
Sizes*  
Size  
Inches  
Millimeters  
Letter  
Legal  
A4  
Executive 7.25 x 10.50  
Com 10 9.50 x 4.125  
8.50 x 11.00  
8.50 x 14.00  
8.27 x 11.69  
215.90 x 279.40  
215.90 x 355.60  
210.00 x 297.00  
185.00 x 267.00  
241.30 x 104.78  
220.00 x 110.00  
DL  
8.66 x 4.33  
Imageable  
Regions*  
Size  
Inches  
Millimeters  
Letter  
Legal 1/C 8.11 x 13.61  
Legal 4/C 8.11 x 11.7  
8.11 x 10.61  
205.90 x 269.40  
205.90 x 345.60  
205.90 x 297.18  
200.00 x 287.00  
175.00 x 257.00  
233.30 x 98.78  
212.00 x 104.00  
A4  
7.87 x 11.30  
Executive 6.89 x 10.12  
Com 10 9.19 x 3.89  
DL  
8.35 x 4.09  
Margins*  
Letter  
Top  
0.2"  
Bottom  
0.2"  
Left  
Right  
0.2"  
0.2"  
Legal 1-Color 0.2"  
Legal 4-Color 0.2"  
0.2"  
0.2"  
0.2"  
2.1"  
0.2"  
0.2"  
A4  
5 mm  
5 mm  
5 mm  
0.12"  
3 mm  
5 mm  
5 mm  
0.16"  
4 mm  
5 mm  
5 mm  
0.16"  
4 mm  
Executive  
Com 10  
DL  
5 mm  
0.12"  
3 mm  
*All measurements are accurate within 0.02"/0.5 mm. See chapter  
5, “Print Media and Daily Operations,” for more information on  
media.  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
B - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B  
Print Media Types, Weights, and Recommended Brands  
Media Type  
Weight  
Brand  
2
2
Plain Paper  
60 to 90 g/m  
16 to 24 lb  
Xerox 4024  
Laser Paper  
60 to 90 g/m  
16 to 24 lb  
Hammermill Laser  
Print (White)  
2
Thick Stock  
(manual-feed only)  
up to 163 g/m  
up to 43 lb  
N/A  
2
2
Transparencies  
Labels  
138 to 146 g/m  
36.7 to 38.8 lb  
3M PP2500, Xerox 3R  
2780, Xerox 3R 3117  
156 to 170 g/m  
41.5 to 45.2 lb  
Avery 5260  
2
Envelopes  
90 g/m  
24 lb  
CraftMaster, Velpa,  
Sphinx White Wove  
Sub 24, Auto Fil #1914  
NOTE: Hammermill Paper offers free samples of its laser paper  
in varying weights. In the US, call toll free (800)  
242-2148.  
Media Storage 63.5° to 80.6° Fahrenheit  
(17.5° to 27° Celsius)  
60% to 70% relative humidity  
Media should be stored in its original wrapper, on a  
flat surface, away from dust and sunlight  
Paper Cas-  
sette Capacity  
250 sheets of paper  
50 transparencies  
Output Tray  
Capacity  
150 sheets  
B - 6  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B  
Consumables  
Your QMS vendor can provide the consumables listed below for  
your color printer. In the US, you can also call (800) 777-7782 to  
order consumables. Keep in mind that consumables can have an  
effect on your printer warranty. See “How Consumables Affect  
Your Warranty” later in this appendix for details.  
The industry standard for toner, developer, and OPC belt  
measurement is quoted at 5% coverage (letter- or A4-size media).  
Toner  
Cartridges  
Black  
Cyan  
Magenta  
Yellow  
4,000 pages  
3,000 pages  
3,000 pages  
3,000 pages  
Developer  
Cartridges  
Black  
Cyan  
Magenta  
Yellow  
30,000 pages  
15,000 pages  
15,000 pages  
15,000 pages  
Oil Bottle and The first oil bottle and cleaning pad change will last  
Cleaning Pad  
approximately 1,500 pages. After that, they will last  
approximately 3,000 pages.  
OPC Belt  
Cartridge  
50,000 planes  
Waste Toner  
Pack  
6,000 planes per pack (sold in 5-pack sets for a total of  
30,000 planes per set)  
NOTE:  
Measurement of waste-toner pack and OPC life is done  
inplanes ratherthan pages. A plane is a pass ofthe OPC  
beltfor onecolor. Forexample, a one-colorpagemakes  
one pass (one plane) and a two-color page makes two  
passes (two planes).  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
B - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B  
Options  
These are the options available for this printer at the time this  
manual went to press. Contact your QMS vendor for a complete,  
updated list, or (in the US) call QMS at (800) 777-7782.  
250-sheet  
Sheet Feeder  
Comes with a media cassette, which is interchangeable  
with the standard cassette.  
30-envelope  
Envelope  
Cassette  
Can be used in the standard media-cassette slot or the  
optional sheet feeder.  
Emulations  
LN03 Plus  
CCITT  
Font Cards  
HP ProCollection  
System Administrator Security Card  
Dataproducts Short-line Conversion Kit  
External Hard Disk  
Internal Hard Disk  
Kanji Typeface Hard Disk Kit  
Ethernet  
Interface  
LAN Manager/LAN Server  
DECnet  
TCP/IP  
NetWare  
EtherTalk  
Token-Ring  
Interface  
LAN Manager/LAN Server  
TCP/IP  
NetWare  
Optional  
QMS Crown Document Option Commands  
Documentation QMS Crown Network Notes  
HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical Reference  
QMS Crown Technical Reference  
B - 8  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B  
SIMMs  
Memory  
Upgrade Kit  
4 MB  
8 MB  
16 MB  
32 MB  
Electrical  
5V ± 10%  
Fast page mode  
tras = 80 ns.  
trac = 80 ns.  
tcas = 20 ns.  
tcac = 20 ns.  
Mechanical  
Size  
72-pin industry standard package; 1" high; tin-plated  
contacts  
4 MB (1M x 32)  
8 MB (2M x 32)  
16 MB (4M x 32)  
32 MB (8M x 32)  
You can get information on which SIMMs and hard disks are  
compatible with your printer from Q-FAX. See appendix A, “QMS  
Customer Support,” for information on using Q-FAX. Ask for  
Q-FAX document 6502, “QMS-tested SIMMs and Hard Disks.”  
Warranty Considerations  
Youshould readyour printerwarranty carefully and be sureto store  
it in a safe place. Various factors can affect a printer’s warranty.  
Two important ones are consumables and electrostatic discharge.  
How Consumables Affect Your Warranty  
The use of non-QMS consumables and/or accessories alone  
doesn’t affect either your warranty or any maintenance contract  
you may have purchased. However, if a QMS printer failure or  
damage is found to be directly attributable to the use of non-QMS  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
B - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B  
consumables and/or accessories, QMS will not repair the printer  
free-of-charge. In this case, standard time and material charges will  
be applied to service your printer for that particular failure or  
damage. QMS recommends that you use only quality QMS  
consumables and accessories to support your printer. To order  
QMS accessories, in the US call (800) 777-7782. In all other  
countries, check appendix A, “QMS Customer Support,” for the  
QMS office closest to you.  
How Electrostatic Discharge Affects Your Warranty  
Incidental and consequential damages caused by not discharging  
electrostatic buildup can affect your printer warranty. Electrostatic  
discharge can destroy circuit boards, such as a SIMM or your  
printer’s controller board. To prevent this, use an antistatic  
wristband when handling printer circuit boards. To use it, attach  
one end of it to your wrist and the other end to any convenient  
electrical ground (for example, the bare metal chassis of  
equipment, as on the back of a computer, that is plugged in but  
turned off). Never attach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment  
with an electrical current present. Turn off all power switches first.  
Plastic, rubber, wood, painted metal surfaces, and telephones are  
not acceptable grounding points. The printer isn’t an acceptable  
grounding point either because it must be unplugged before you  
perform this task.  
If you don’t have an anti-static wrist strap, discharge your body’s  
static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you  
handle any printer boards or components and before removing the  
tray assembly cover. Redischarge your body each time after  
walking around and before touching the printer again.  
B - 1 0  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B  
Cable Pinouts  
LocalTalk  
The table below gives the correct pinouts for the printer end of the  
8-pin LocalTalk cable used to connect a computer and printer:  
Pinout:  
Pin No. Name  
LocalTalk  
3
4
5
6
8
TxD-  
GND  
RxD-  
TxD+  
RxD+  
Macintosh to Serial  
The table below gives the correct pinouts for a cable connecting  
the Macintosh printer or modem port to the printer serial port. (This  
type of cable would be required to reinstall printer system software  
from a Macintosh if printer software is not functioning.)  
Pinout:  
Host  
Serial  
Signal  
Direction  
Macintosh  
to Serial  
Pin No. Pin No.  
1
5
4
3
7
2
-
RTS  
CTS  
TxD  
GND  
RxD  
NC  
From Mac  
To Mac  
From Mac  
2
3
4,8*  
5
To Mac  
6
7
-
NC  
*Pins 4 and 8 must be connected at DIN-8  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
B - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix B  
Serial  
The table below gives the correct pinouts for the printer end of the  
25-pin serial cable used to connect a computer and printer:  
Pinout:  
Serial  
Pin No. Name  
2
TxD  
3
RxD  
4
5
RTS (optional)  
CTS  
6
7
DSR (optional)  
GND  
20  
DTR (optional)  
IBM PC/XT, PC/AT, and Compatible Computers  
Pinout:  
Printer  
IBM PC/XT  
IBM PC/XT  
DB-25S  
DB-25P  
1
1
2
3
3
2
4
5
5
4
20  
6+8  
7
6+8  
20  
7
Pinout:  
Printer  
IBM PC/AT  
IBM PC/AT  
DB-25S  
DB-9P  
1
1
2
2
3
3
7
5
20  
6+8  
B - 1 2  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix B  
Centronics Parallel  
The following table describes the Centronics parallel interface  
cable that can be used with your printer. (See “Notes to the  
Centronics Parallel Cable Pinouts Table” on the next page for more  
information.)  
Pinout:  
Signal  
Return  
Signal  
Direction  
Centronics  
Parallel  
Pin No. Pin No.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
-
STROBE-  
DATA 1  
DATA 2  
DATA 3  
DATA 4  
DATA 5  
DATA 6  
DATA 7  
DATA 8  
ACKNLG-  
BUSY+  
PE+  
SELECT  
GND  
VCC TEST  
GND  
IPRIME  
FAULT-  
GND  
In  
In  
In  
In  
In  
In  
In  
In  
In  
Out  
Out  
Out  
Out  
-
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
16  
18  
19-30  
31  
32  
33  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
In  
Out  
-
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
B - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B  
Notes to the Centronics Parallel Cable Pinouts Table  
Direction refers to the direction of signal flow as viewed from the  
printer.  
Return denotes “twisted-pair return” and is to be connected at  
signal-ground level. When wiring the interface, be sure to use a  
twisted-pair cable for each signal and always complete connection  
on the return side. To prevent noise effectively, these cables should  
be shielded and connected to the chassis of the system unit and  
printer, respectively.  
All interface conditions are based on TTL level. Both the rise and  
fall times of each signal must be less than 0.2 microseconds.  
The cable must have an overall braided shield, Belden 8345 or  
equivalent.  
Connectors must have shielded housings. The overall shield must  
be bonded to the shielded housings at both ends of the cable.  
B - 1 4  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B  
1284 Parallel  
The Centronics parallel interface supports two modes for 1284  
bi-directional communication, nibble mode and byte mode:  
In nibble mode, bi-directional communication between the printer  
and the host is done in nibbles (four bits) with the low order nibble  
sent first. A transfer of two nibbles is required for each byte of  
information. In byte mode, bi-directional communication between  
the printer and the host is done in bytes. The byte mode may be  
used by the host device in a DMA (Direct Memory Access) mode  
for more efficient operation.  
When byte transfer is complete and there is no more data to  
transmit, the host may do one of the following:  
terminate and return to the compatibility mode.  
stay in the HostBusy, Data Not Available phase.  
set HostBusyLow,puttingthe interfaceinto the idlephase.  
If there is additional data, the host may do one of the following:  
set HostBusy Low, indicating that the host can accept  
additional data.  
stay in the HostBusy, Data Not Available phase.  
terminate and return to the compatibility mode.  
Check your host documentation to see if the host is 1284  
compatible.  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
B - 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B  
Dataproducts Parallel  
The following table describes the Dataproducts parallel interface  
cable that can be used with your printer.  
Pinout:  
Signal  
Return  
Signal  
Direction  
Dataproducts  
Parallel  
Pin No. Pin No.  
Description  
Data Bit 3  
Parity Error  
(grounded)  
1
2
-
In  
11  
12  
-
+5V (limited by  
1K ohm resistor) Out  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
28  
30  
34  
36  
38  
39  
41  
43  
45, 46  
3
4
5
6
Data Bit 1  
Data Bit 2  
Online  
Ready  
Demand  
Data Bit 8  
In  
In  
Out  
Out  
Out  
In  
7
44  
14  
18  
35  
37  
-
40  
42  
-
Paper Instruction In  
Data Bit 5  
Data Bit 7  
Strobe  
Logic Ground  
Data Bit 4  
Data Bit 6  
Interface Verify  
In  
In  
In  
In  
In  
B - 1 6  
T e c h n i c a l S p e c i f i c a t i o n s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C  
Notices  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C  
FCC Compliance  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class  
A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed  
to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment  
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and  
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance  
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at  
his own expense.  
To comply with part 15 of FCC rules, shielded interface cables must be used.  
WARNING!  
To prevent electrical shock, do not remove any covers from  
your printer unless you are experienced in working with circuit boards and  
are following instructions for procedures described in QMS documentation.  
ACHTUNG!  
Um einen Elektroschock zu vermeiden, sollte die Drucker-  
abdeckung niemals von Unbefugten geöffnet werden. In jedem Fall müssen  
die diesbezüglichen Hinweise des Handbuches genau beachtet werden!  
CAUTION: Any modifications or changes to this product not expressly  
approved in writing by the manufacturer responsible for compliance to Federal  
Regulationscouldvoid theuser’sauthority to operatethisproductwithintheLaws  
and Regulations of the Federal Communications Commission.  
Canadian Users  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions  
from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the  
Canadian Department of Communications.  
Le présent appareil numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les  
limites applicables aux appareils numériques (de la classe A) prescrites dans le  
Règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des  
Communications du Canada.  
N o t i c e s  
C - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix C  
Vfg 1046/1984 Conformity Statement  
Hierdurch bescheinigen wir, daß dieses Produkt in Übereinstimmung mit  
Postordnung 1046/1984 ist und RFI unterdrückt ist. Die Geschäftslage und der  
Verkauf diese Geräte auszuprobieren, mit der Übereinstimmung und der  
Regierung zu bestätigen, wurde der Deutschen Bundespost gegeben.  
Bescheinigung des Herstellers/Importeurs  
Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daß Laser Printer model magicolor LX in  
Übereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der Vfg 1046/1984 funkentstört ist.  
Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen dieses Gerätes angezeigt  
und die Berechtigung zur Überprüfung der Serie auf Einhaltung der  
Bestimmungen eingeräumt.  
QMS, Inc., Mobile, AL  
Declaration of Manufacturer/Importer  
We hereby certify that the laser printer model magicolor LX is in compliance with  
Vfg 1046/1984 and is RFI suppressed.  
The marketing and sale of this equipment was reported to the German Postal  
Service.  
The right to retest this equipment to verify compliance with the regulation was  
given to the German Postal Service.  
QMS, Inc., Mobile, AL  
Electronics Emissions  
Your printer complies with the Electronics Emissions Requirements of the  
German Federal Minister for Postal and Telecommunication Technology  
regulation:  
Vfg. 1046/1984  
Your printer complies with the Electronics Emissions Requirements of the  
European Economic Council directive:  
82/499/EEC  
C - 2  
N o t i c e s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix C  
Laser Safety  
This printer is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of  
Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according  
to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. This means that the  
printer does not produce hazardous laser radiation.  
Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective  
housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine  
during any phase of user operation.  
Proprietary Statement  
The digitally encoded software included with the QMS magicolor LX printer is  
Copyrighted © 1995 by QMS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. This software may not  
be reproduced, modified, displayed, transferred, or copied in any form or in any  
manner or on any media, in whole or in part, without the express written  
permission of QMS, Inc.  
Copyright Notice  
This manual is Copyrighted © 1995 by QMS, Inc., One Magnum Pass, Mobile,  
AL 36618. All Rights Reserved. This manual may not be copied in whole or in  
part, nor transferred to any other media or language, without the express written  
permission of QMS, Inc.  
Manual Notice  
QMS, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to this manual and to the equipment  
described herein without notice. Considerable effort has been made to ensure that  
this manual is free of inaccuracies and omissions. However, QMS, Inc. makes  
nowarranty of any kindincluding, but not limited to,anyimplied warranties  
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this  
manual. QMS, Inc. assumes no responsibility for, or liability for, errors contained  
in this manual or for incidental, special, or consequential damages arising out of  
the furnishing of this manual, or the use of this manual in operating the equipment,  
or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated.  
N o t i c e s  
C - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix C  
Colophon  
This manual was written with WordPerfect, illustrated with Adobe Illustrator and  
Micrografx Designer, and formatted with Ventura Publisher. The manual was  
printed in camera-ready form on a QMS printer.  
C - 4  
N o t i c e s  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix D  
Additional Technical Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
Introduction  
This appendix provides additional technical information on how  
your printer works and memory management.  
How Your Printer Works  
Your laser printer works using a combination of a mechanical and  
an electrical process. The whole process comes down to five stages  
in which mechanical parts move media (paper or transparencies)  
through the printer and progressively stronger electrical charges  
transfer toner from area to area as it forms the image. See figure  
D.1 for an overview of the mechanical part of the interior of your  
printer.  
Fig. D.1 Interior View of the Printer  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix D  
1. A precharger unit puts an even charge across the OPC  
(Organic Photoconductor) belt. Think of it as preparing a  
surface for painting.  
2. When you send an image file, the QMS controller uses that  
information to control when the laser beam in the optical unit  
turns on and off as it scans the OPC belt. When the beam is  
on, it discharges sections of the belt forming an image.  
3. Next, the belt passes under the developer/toner unit, which  
opens, and toner is electrically attracted to the discharged  
areas. (In color printing, each color is individually applied  
during a separate pass of the belt: yellow first, followed by  
magenta, cyan, and black.)  
4. The belt carries the toner image to the transfer drum, where a  
slightly stronger charge attracts and stores the toner until all  
colors are processed. Once the full image is collected, the  
drum turns toward the transfer roller, which has an even  
stronger attracting charge. However, just before the toner can  
switch to the transfer roller, media passes between the drum  
and roller, so the toner lands on the media instead.  
5. Rollers pull the media up through the fuser unit, where heat  
and pressure set the toner, and the final copy comes out into  
the top cover.  
D - 2  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
Memory  
The memory requirements of the printer are dictated by the  
applications that you run. Of the printer’s memory, 9 MB are  
divided among blocks or “memory clients,” each dedicated to a  
specific purpose. Added or extra printer memory (if any) can be  
redistributed among the memory clients where it can best serve  
your specific printing needs. This appendix explains the different  
memory clients and what happens if you increase or decrease their  
memory allocations. See the glossary for definitions of unfamiliar  
memory terms.  
Don’t feel compelled to reconfigure your printer’s memory just  
because you have the ability to: printer memory is configured at  
the factory to provide optimal performance in most printing  
environments. Remember that the engine’s maximum speed is  
about 8 pages per minute for a letter- or A4-size, monochrome  
page, no matter how much memory is installed.  
NOTE: To reset all factory defaults in the Configuration menu,  
use the restore defaults option in the  
Administration/Miscellaneous menu. You can also reset  
all factory defaults by simultaneously holding down the  
Select and Online/Offline keys (for about 10 seconds)  
while turning the printer off and on again. The reset  
process takes several minutes to complete.  
Memory Management  
There is no single correct way for everyone to allocate printer  
memory. The factory default configuration might be the best for  
your environment. Or, for example, if you use a large number of  
PostScript fonts of various point sizes, you might want to increase  
the amount of memory allocated to the memory client dedicated to  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix D  
PostScript fonts. Each of your printer’s features requires a  
minimum amount of memory. If you use a feature, you must  
allocate enough memory to the client that controls it, but if there  
are features you do not use, you can move excess memory from  
unused features to other clients that need additional memory.  
To determine if and how you need to reallocate printer memory,  
read the descriptions of the different memory clients in the sections  
that follow.  
The Memory Clients  
Thememoryclients canbesetupfromtheAdministration/Memory  
menu of the printer’s Configuration menu. Each time you make  
changes in the Memory menu, print a status page (in the  
Administration/Special Pages menu) to confirm the memory  
reallocation. When you allocate memory to a specific client  
through the control panel, it is allocated in kilobytes (KB). The  
sizes listed on the status page are in bytes, so you must divide the  
numbers on the status page by 1024 to get the equivalent number  
of kilobytes entered through the control panel.  
NOTE: The value for each memory client must be evenly  
divisible by 4 KB: if a value is entered that is not evenly  
divisibleby4 KB, itis automatically convertedtothenext  
lower value that is divisible by 4 KB. For example, if you  
enter 102 KB, the actual value is lowered to 100 KB  
(assuming there is enough memory available to allocate  
to this client). The amount shown on the status page will  
then be 102,400 (100 x 1024).  
D - 4  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix D  
Frame Buffer  
Listed as K Mem Framebuff in the Administration/Memory menu,  
the frame buffer memory client holds rasterized (bitmapped)  
images of page faces that are ready to be sent to the physical print  
engine. Your QMS printer comes configured with enough frame  
buffer memory for a single four-color 300 dpi legal-size page or a  
single four-color 600 dpi letter-size page in the largest media size  
supported.  
PostScript Heap  
Listed as K Mem for PSHeap in the Administration/Memory menu  
and elsewhere as PostScript VM and Virtual Memory, this client  
holds downloaded fonts, PostScript operators, and forms.  
Inefficiently coded PostScript jobs can consume an infinite amount  
of virtual memory or leave objects in the PostScript heap after the  
print jobs are completed, leading to virtual memory errors. If not  
enough memory is allocated to the PostScript heap, the job cannot  
print.  
Increasingthememoryallocatedto this client allowsmorecomplex  
jobs to print and increases the number of fonts that can be  
downloaded to virtual memory. If you receive a virtual memory  
error when attempting to print a job or download a font, this client  
should be increased in small increments until the error message  
goes away.  
Spool Buffers  
Listed as K Mem for Spool in the Administration/Memory menu  
and as Host Input on the status page, this memory client stores  
incoming data from all the interfaces until the physical print engine  
can print the job. When enough memory is allocated to this client,  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix D  
the host becomes free more quickly, and the number of jobs that  
the printer can accept simultaneously is increased. So increasing  
this client can be beneficial in reducing network traffic, but  
throughput speed is not necessarily increased. If available, a hard  
drive can supplement this client with additional memory needed  
for spooling. See “Hard Disk Management,” later in this appendix.  
PostScript Font Cache  
Listed as K Mem PS Fonts in the Administration/Memory menu  
and also as Font Cache, this memory client stores bitmapped  
representations of previously rasterized PostScript fonts, which  
reduces the number of times a font must be converted from outline  
form to bitmap form, so that pages print faster.  
As the font cache memory fills, the printer erases bitmapped  
characters to make room for new characters. By increasing the  
memory allocated to this client, the printer can store more  
characters and spend less time erasing and replacing characters in  
the cache.  
Normally, you do not need to change this memory clientunless you  
use a large number of fonts at different point sizes. There is no  
specific formula to use in figuring the amount of memory required  
by the font cache, but after a certain point, large font caches cause  
printing to take longer than smaller font caches because of the  
search time through the cache. The recommended font cache size  
is 128-256 KB, but you should experiment to see what font cache  
size works best for you.  
Emulation  
Listed as K Mem Emulation in the Administration/Memory menu,  
this memory is used to store any optional (loadable) emulations.  
D - 6  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix D  
Increasing this client’s memory allows more complicated  
non-PostScript jobs to print and allows larger, optional emulations  
or multiple emulations to be loaded and ready to process jobs,  
without having to be reloaded every time a job in that emulation is  
sent.  
If an emulation is loaded to process a print job and there is not  
enough memory in the emulation client, another emulation already  
loaded might be unloaded automatically to obtain the necessary  
memory. If you notice a delay in printing between jobs that have  
different non-resident emulations, it’s possible that emulations are  
being reloaded each time they are run. Adding to the emulation  
client might eliminate this unloading and reloading and,  
consequently, increase throughput.  
Also, increase the emulation client if you are printing complex  
non-PostScript jobs that might require more memory to process  
correctly.  
Temporary Emulation  
Listed as K Mem Emul Tmp in the Administration/Memory menu  
and as Emulation Temporary elsewhere, this memory is used by  
non-PostScript emulations for storing downloaded fonts, forms,  
and macros. This allows “context switching,” which is the ability  
to retaindownloaded fonts and forms even after the printer changes  
from one emulation to another. Context switching prevents  
repetitive downloading and traffic congestion on networks.  
Normally, this memory client does not need to be changed unless  
you plan to download many different non-PostScript fonts.  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix D  
Display List  
Listed as K Mem Display in the Administration/Memory menu,  
this client shares its memory with the PostScript heap. The display  
list stores compressed representations, or blocks, of the pages to be  
printed. Approximately 1 compressed block is required for a  
normal 8.5" x 11" text page, 4 compressed blocks for an 8.5" x 11"  
page that includes some graphics, and as many as 500 compressed  
blocks for an extremely complex page. Approximately 64 KB of  
memory for each compressed block is required by the printer.  
Many pages of compressed blocks belonging to multiple print jobs  
can be stored simultaneously in the display list. If enough memory  
is allocated to this memory client, a page can always be ready to  
print as soon as another page has been imaged by the print engine,  
so increasing the amount of memory in this client might improve  
printing throughput. If not enough memory is allocated to this  
client, memory is taken from the excess memory client (PostScript  
heap) to complete the print job.  
Disk Cache  
Listedas KMemDiskCacheinthe Administration/Memory menu,  
this memory client stores frequently used data in system memory  
instead of continually storing and retrieving it from a hard disk. If  
a hard disk is used and a lot of disk access is required, adding  
memory to thedisk cachemight increasethe printer’sperformance.  
For example, if many fonts are stored on disk, increasing the disk  
cache size can help the printer access these fonts faster.  
The amount of memory needed for the disk cache client depends  
on the size of the disk, the number of disks, the number of  
subdirectories on each disk, and the amount of memory dedicated  
to caching. The disk cache size should be set to 0 KB if no hard  
disks are connected to the printer, or if the hard disks are connected  
D - 8  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix D  
but are not being used. However, the hard disks remain unavailable  
until this client’s size is increased.  
The recommended amount of memory for the disk cache client is  
as follows:  
120 KB minimum  
0.5 KB per MB of disk storage total for all disks  
MB Printer Mem  
This memory client shows the number of megabytes of RAM  
available to be split among the memoryclients whendisk swapping  
is turned off.  
System Memory  
Listed as System Use on the status page, this non-configurable  
client is the amount of RAM that is used to run the printer’s  
operating system. It is never increased or decreased. The system  
memory subtracted from the total amount of RAM identifies the  
amount of RAM available for all the other memory clients.  
Hard Disk Management  
In addition to your printer’s internal hard disk, you can connect up  
to six external hard disks to your printer via the SCSI port. These  
hard disks serve as secondary storage places for such items as  
downloaded fonts, emulations, and spooled data. Once you have a  
hard disk installed on your printer, it has virtual memory  
capabilities for spooling overflow, which is an extension of the  
spool memory client.  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix D  
Spooling Overflow  
The spool overflow option (Administration/Disk Operations  
menu) specifies the maximum space reserved for spooling  
overflow on the hard disk, if one is available.  
When aprint jobis sent to your printer, aportion of thatjob is stored  
in the spooling buffer (Administration/Memory/K Mem for Spool  
menu) while the rest of the job is being printed. If all the memory  
in the spooling buffer is being used and the spool overflow option  
is enabled, the printer stores the overflow from the spooling buffer  
in a reserved area of the hard disk. Even if you have a hard disk,  
you should allocate as much RAM to the spool buffer as possible  
for increased throughput.  
Reserving a 10-20 MB portion of the hard disk for spooling  
overflow works well for most printing environments. If too much  
ofthediskis dedicatedto spooling, theprinter’sperformancemight  
actually be hindered because the printer tries to fill the overflow  
space before passing the job to the processor.  
PS Protocol  
Your printer supports a new protocol for communication between  
the printer and a host computer over a serial, parallel, or optional  
interface connection. This new protocol is called PS protocol. This  
binary communications protocol allows any 8-bit binary value  
(0-255) to be treated as data, while allowing a few of the values to  
function as special control characters. When communicating 8-bit  
binary data in binary or binary fixed mode, the printer uses the  
quoting mechanism of the binary communications protocol (BCP)  
to distinguish between the special control characters and print job  
binary data.  
D - 1 0  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix D  
To differentiate data from the special control characters, any data  
that is the same as one of the following special control characters  
must be quoted.  
ASCII  
Keyboard Name  
ASCII  
ASCII  
Hex  
Control  
Function  
^A  
^C  
^D  
^E  
^Q  
^S  
^T  
^\  
SOH  
ETX  
EOT  
ENQ  
DC1  
DC3  
DC4  
FS  
0x01  
0x03  
0x04  
0x05  
0x11  
0x13  
0x14  
0x1C  
Quote data character  
Abort job and flush to end of file  
End-of-file marker  
(Reserved for future use)  
XON in XON/XOFF flow control  
XOFF in XON/XOFF flow control  
Job status request  
(Reserved for future use)  
A data byte is quoted by replacing it with a two-character sequence.  
The first character is a ^A (ASCII hex 0x01), and the second  
character is the character itself XORed with the ASCII value 0x40.  
For example, to send the value 0x14(^T) as data, send the  
two-character sequence 0x01 0x54 (^a T) instead. (ASCII “T” is  
the result of XORing ^T with 0x40).  
This method of quoting guarantees that whenever the printer  
receives any of the eight control characters, the control function is  
intendedregardlessofwhetherthe preceding character is a ^A. Any  
data byte not equal to one of the eight special control characters is  
transmitted by sending the data byte. For more information on BCP  
and quoting, see the PostScript Language Reference Manual  
(Adobe Systems, Inc., Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, 1990,  
ISBN 0-201-18127-4), the “Adobe Serial and Parallel  
Communications Protocols Specification” (in Adobe Developer  
Support. Adobe Systems, Inc., February 14, 1992), and the  
“PostScript Language Reference Manual” (in Supplement for  
Version 2011, Adobe Systems, Inc., January 24, 1992).  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
PS Protocol Menu for Optional Network Interfaces  
These options for the PS Protocol menus for optional network  
interface cards set the binary communications protocol (BCP) for  
communicating over that interface to a PostScript printer. The  
default option is normal. Any change to this menu takes effect  
immediately.  
PS Protocol Menu  
Normal  
Normal Fixed  
QBinary  
QBinary Fixed  
Binary  
Binary Fixed  
Normal  
Enables standard, ASCII hex protocol. Data is sent and  
received in ASCII format. This mode is recommended  
if you do not print binary data. It was designed for data  
in the printable ASCII range. Print jobs can alter the PS  
protocol value through PostScript operators.  
Normal  
Fixed  
Enables standard, ASCII hex protocol. Print jobs can  
not alter this value through PostScript operators.  
QBinary  
Quoted Binary. Enables binary communications  
protocol. Print jobs can alter this value through  
PostScript operators. Data in the printableASCII range  
also prints. Use the special quoting mechanism for the  
special characters and ^D (EOF).  
QBinary  
Fixed  
Quoted Binary Fixed. Enables binary communications  
protocol. Print jobs can not alter this value through  
PostScript operators. Data in the printableASCII range  
also prints. Use the special quoting mechanism for the  
special characters and ^D (EOF).  
Binary  
Enables binary communications protocol. Print jobs  
can alter this value through PostScript operators. Data  
in the printable ASCII range also prints.  
D - 1 2  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix D  
Binary  
Fixed  
Enables binary communications protocol. Print jobs  
can not alter this value through PostScript operators.  
Data in the printable ASCII range also prints.  
A data stream sent through the serial or parallel interface  
using Binary would be treated the same as a data stream  
sent through the optional network interface using Quoted  
Binary on your QMS Crown printer. However, a data  
stream sent through the optional network interface using  
Quoted Binary would not be treated the same as a data  
stream sent through the same interface using Binary.  
Advantages  
The main advantage of using the Binary and Fixed Binary PS  
protocol modes when sending binary data is that these modes  
compress the data stream allowing your documents to be smaller  
so you can send smaller jobs to the printer. For example, some  
device drivers can format bit map images as binary data instead of  
as ASCII hex data.  
Implementation  
To implement PS protocol for sending binary data on your system  
you need a device driver available with some applications or  
operating systems, or you can alternatively use a program to read  
the data and write out the quoted characters. See your QMS vendor  
for any available information on device drivers or binary filter  
programs.  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix D  
Updated DOCs  
This section provides updated information on HP PCL 4 and PCL  
5 DOCs. This information will be merged into the appropriate  
manuals as they are revised. But until then, it supersedes the  
following: QMS Crown Document Option Commands manual  
(part number 1800216-001E) and HP PCL 5 Emulation Technical  
Reference Manual (part number 1800304-001A).  
PCL 5 Emulation Terminology  
Font  
A font is a unique set of objects that has an ID and attributes  
(symbol set, spacing, pitch, height, style, weight, and typeface  
number). A font is accessedby specifyingadesiredsetofattributes.  
The system selects the font that most closely matches these  
attributes from the available set of fonts. See the PCL 5 Emulation  
Technical ReferenceManual for informationonwhatcharacterizes  
a PCL font.  
There are two types of fonts: bound and unbound. A bound font  
supports a single symbol set. An unbound font supports multiple,  
but not all, symbol sets. With unbound fonts, the symbol sets are  
organized into two groups: normal and Dingbats. All downloaded  
fonts are bound,and all residentfonts (exceptZapf-Dingbatswhich  
supports the Dingbats symbol set) support the group of normal  
symbol sets.  
In the QMS PCL 5 emulation, only fonts located in the current  
resource may be accessed by a PCL font ID using the normal  
<ESC>(#X sequence. All other fonts (resident, cartridge, or other),  
D - 1 4  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix D  
including those stored on the additional resources, can be accessed  
only by attributes.  
Also, only objects stored in the current resource may be deleted  
directly by the PCL language. Therefore, unless they are explicitly  
removed, external fonts are always available to all PCL jobs.  
Font Index Number  
In addition to its ID, a downloaded font also has an unique index  
number that is automatically assigned by the printer when the font  
is downloaded. This index number may change if new resources  
are added, but in practice it usually remains fixed. All currently  
available PCL fonts (resident, cartridge, temporary, permanent,  
and external) are listed with their font index numbers on the  
Advanced Status Page.  
The font index number defines the default PCL font to be used if  
"selectbyid" is specified as the default PCL font. Do not confuse  
the font index with the PCL font ID, a mechanism used to identify  
downloaded fonts in the PCL language using the <ESC>(#X  
sequence. There is no way to specify fonts by their font index  
numbers from within the PCL language. Only the default PCL font  
is affected.  
Object  
There are three types of PCL downloaded objects: temporary,  
permanent, and external. Temporary objects reside on the current  
resource and they are deleted either at the beginning and end of a  
job (unless Retain Temporary is set to On or On Compatibility) or  
when the system is reset (<ESC>E or receipt of Printer Job  
Language). Permanent objects reside on the current resource and  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix D  
are retained when the system is reset (E or receipt of Printer Job  
Language). External objects reside on the additional resources.  
All objects are temporary when first created. They can be made  
permanent objects through PCL commands. Both temporary or  
permanent objects can become external objects when the current  
resource is changed (for temporary objects Retain Temporary must  
be set to On, True, or On Compatibility). External objects become  
permanent when the resource in which they reside becomes the  
current resource.  
User-downloaded PCL objects (with the exception of palettes) are  
identified by an ID when they are downloaded. The ID is usually  
set by the file performing the download. If not, the system will  
provide a default value (normally 0, but this can be set using the  
%%IncludeFeature:install DOC). If two objects of the same type  
are provided with the same ID, the last one received replaces the  
former. From that point on, downloaded objects are accessible by  
their IDs.  
Resource  
A resource is a location where downloaded objects such as fonts,  
macros, and patterns are stored. The printer has one default  
resource and one additional resource for each attached hard disk.  
All downloaded objects are stored in file systems which reside on  
these resources. The RAM1 resource may be used as the default,  
but systems with at least one hard disk use the system disk instead.  
So, for any hard disk-equipped printer, all downloaded objects  
(except palettes, which require specialhandling) are stored on disk.  
The default resource and one of the additional resources can reside  
on the same hard disk, but they will be located in different  
directories of that resource’s file system.  
D - 1 6  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix D  
Updated PCL 5 DOCs  
%%IncludeFeature:scalablefonts(value)  
Purpose:  
Enables/disables PCL 5 scalable fonts (to print PCL 4  
documents that have selected PCL 5 scalable fonts or  
to more closely emulate the PCL 4 font environment).  
value:  
0 (enables scalable fonts) or 1 (disables scalable fonts)  
0
Default:  
%%IncludeFeature:install(resource id object id)  
Purpose:  
Establishes the current resource and the default object  
ID value for the current job to which it is attached. If it  
is attached to a job that downloads a font without  
setting the current object ID using the PCL escape  
sequence <ESC>(#X, it has the appearance of  
“storing” the font on disk. If no  
%%IncludeFeature:install DOC command is sent, the  
internal default location is used; otherwise, this  
parameter, which must be provided, specifies one of  
the alternate locations. For most QMS printers,  
resource 6 is the internal system disk.  
resource id:  
object id:  
0 to 6 (identifies one of the possible locations for  
downloaded objects). Default: internal system disk  
0-32767 (assigns an ID to an object, such as a font,  
macro, or pattern). Default: 0. The object ID can be  
used instead of the usual PCL command to assign an  
ID. This ID is overwritten by any ID assigned from the  
PCL print job, if present. If neither a DOC command  
nor the PCL print job specify an ID, the default ID of  
0 is used. Identifiers must be unique. If the ID matches  
an ID for an existing object, that object is deleted and  
replaced by the new object. If  
a
%%IncludeFeature:remove command precedes a  
%%IncludeFeature:install command, the install  
command is ignored (these two commands are  
mutually exclusive). All downloaded objects are by  
default temporary and will be deleted at the end of a  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix D  
job unless Retain Temporary is set to On or On  
Compatibility. If the file the %%IncludeFeature:install  
command is attached to does not make its downloaded  
fonts permanent or Retain Temporary is not set, then  
those objects are removed from the disk when the job  
completes. A downloaded font can be accessed only by  
its ID if the font is stored in the current resource.  
Regardless of its resource, a font can be selected by its  
attributes. Example A shows a pair of jobs that will not  
produce the desired results (subjob 2 has only the  
appearance of storing the font on disk). By contrast,  
examples B and C show a pair of jobs that will produce  
the desired results.  
Example A: Job 1  
%!  
%%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6  
20)  
%%EndComments  
<ESC>)s#W<download font header>*c33E  
(s#W<char 33 data>*c34E  
(s#W<char 34 data>... *c5F  
Example A: Job 2  
<ESC>(20Xthis text is NOT in the downloaded  
font...  
Example B: Job 1  
%!  
%%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6  
20)  
%%EndComments  
<ESC>)s#W<download font header>*c33E  
D - 1 8  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
(s#W<char33data>*c34E  
(s#W<char34data>.*c5F  
Example B: Job 2  
<ESC>(8U(s1p12v0s0b4153This text will be in  
the downloaded font, if it supports the  
ROMAN-8 symbol set, is proportionally  
spaced, 12 points in height (or scalable),  
upright, medium weight, and has type # 4153.  
Example C: Job 1  
%!  
%%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6  
20 )  
%%EndComments  
<ESC>)s#W<download font header>*c33E  
(s#W<char 33 data>*c34E  
(s#W<char 34 data>... *c5F  
Example C: Job 2  
%!  
%%IncludeFeature:emulation(pcl5) install(6)  
%%EndComments  
<ESC>(20Xthis text is also in the downloaded  
font...)  
%%IncludeFeature:remove(resource id object id object type)  
Purpose:  
Removes an external object from the printer system.  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
object type:  
*, font, macro, pattern, or other object type (specifies  
the kind of objects that are to be deleted from the  
specified printer system). If object type is * or is not  
specified, then all objects on the specified resource  
with the specified object id are removed.  
object id:  
*, -1 (wildcard) to 32767 (specifies the ID of the object  
that is to be removed from the printer system). Default  
-1. If the object id is not specified, or if it is specified  
as * or -1, all objects on the specified resource are  
removed. Unlike the %%IncludeFeature:install  
command, the %%IncludeFeature:remove command  
does not set any defaults, and it is not directly related  
to the job to which it is attached. This command allows  
youto removeexternalobjects fromthesystemwithout  
having to generate a job containing both the DOC  
command to set the appropriate current resource and  
the PCL code to delete the desired object. If this  
command is specified more than once, the last  
command received is the one that will be executed. In  
the following example, the remove(6 5 font) command  
is executed, and the remove(6 1 macro) command is  
ignored:  
%%IncludeFeature:remove(6 1 macro) remove(6  
5 font)  
%%IncludeFeature:resource(resource id object code)  
Purpose:  
Establishes the current resource and the default object  
code value for the current job to which it is attached.  
This  
command  
is  
identical  
to  
the  
%%IncludeFeature:install DOC. It is included for  
backward compatibility. All downloaded objects are  
by default temporary, and will be deleted at the end of  
a job unless Retain Temporary is set to on, true, or on  
compatibility. If the file that the %%IncludeFeature:  
resource command is attached to does not make the  
downloaded font permanent and Retain Temporary is  
not set, then those objects are removed from the disk  
when the job completes. A downloaded font can only  
be accessed by its ID if the font is stored in the current  
D - 2 0  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
resource. Regardless of its resource, a font can be  
selected by its attributes.  
resource id:  
object code:  
0 to 6 (identifies one of the possible locations for  
downloaded objects). Default: internal system disk. If  
no resource item is provided, the internal default  
location is used; otherwise, this parameter, which must  
be provided, specifies one of the alternate locations.  
For most QMS printers, resource 6 is the internal  
system disk.  
0-32767 (assigns a code to an object such as a font,  
macro, or pattern).  
%%IncludeFeature:font (font name)  
Purpose:  
Specifies the default font to use. Fonts are identified by  
the names shown above. Only the resident fonts may  
be selected (the available set varies from printer to  
printer). An asterisk * in the name indicates that a font  
is scalable, and that a point size needs to be applied  
using the pointsize command. The value selectbyid  
indicates that the default font ID or unique font index  
(set by the fontid command) will be used for default  
font selection. Selectinga bound, bitmapfontoverrides  
the default settings for symbol set and point size. An  
unbound font uses the specified default symbol set if  
possible, whilea scalable font usesthe default font size.  
font name:  
courier12times*blditalic  
courier12bolduniv*  
courier12italicuniv*italic  
courier10univ*bold  
courier10bolduniv*blditalic  
courier10italicunivcond*  
lineprinter  
univcond*italic  
times*univcond*bold  
times*italicunivcond*blditlc  
times*bold  
selectbyindex  
%%IncludeFeature:fontid (index #)  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 2 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
Purpose:  
Specifies the default font index number. This index is  
used when the Default Font selected is selectbyid. This  
allows for selection of fonts only on the current  
resource. Selection of default font by index overrides  
the symbol set value. The symbol set is overridden if a  
bound font is selected as the default or if an unbound  
font is selected that does not supportthe defaultsymbol  
set. Ifa fontwiththespecifiedindex exists,itisselected  
asthe Default Font. Ifthespecifiedvalue doesnotexist,  
courier 12 point is substituted.  
index #:  
0 to 32767  
%%IncludeFeature:symbolset (name)  
Purpose: Specifies the default symbol set for the emulation. This  
command specifies the default symbol set. Not all  
symbol sets are available with certain resident fonts. In  
particular, the Desktop, PS Math, Math 8, Microsoft  
Pub, Pi Font, PS Text, Ventura Intl, Ventura Math,  
Ventura US, and Windows symbol sets cannot be used  
with the resident bitmap fonts: courier10,  
courier10bold, courier10italic, courier12,  
courier12bold, courier12italic, and lineprinter. The  
five dingbat symbol sets (PS-Zapf-Dingbats,  
Ventura-Dingbats,  
Zapf-Dingbats100,  
Zapf-Dingbats200, and Zapf-Dingbats300) can be  
used with all fonts. If a mismatch between symbol set  
and font occurs, the standard PCL font selection  
mechanism is used to locate a font that matches the  
selected symbol set. With the standard set of fonts  
distributed by QMS, this matches the Times* font, but  
other user installed fonts could change this result.  
name:  
roman-8iso-60, pc-850iso-61, pc8-usiso-69,  
pc8-dniso-84, ecma-94iso-85, legaldesktop, hpgerman  
ps-math, hpspanishmath8, iso-2microsoft-pub,  
iso-4pi-font, iso-6ps-text, iso-10ventura-intl,  
iso-11ventura-math,  
iso-15windows,  
iso-14ventura-us,  
iso-16ps-zapf-dingbats,  
iso-17ventura-dingbats, iso-21zapf-dingbats100,  
iso-25zapf-dingbats200, iso-57zapf-dingbats300  
D - 2 2  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
%%IncludeFeature:criscrlf(value)  
Purpose:  
Controls the default line termination mode (the  
<ESC>&k#G command). Specifies the line  
termination treatment of a carriage return.  
value:  
off (treat line feed as a line feed) or on (treat line feed  
as a carriage return-line feed combination).  
The result of various settings for these parameters is  
shown in table below, in terms of the equivalent code  
passed to the PCL line termination command  
(<ESC>&k#G). The second setting (lfiscrlf on, criscrlf  
off) is correct for most ASCII listings printed from  
UNIX machines. PC listings should usually be done  
with both items set to off, and Macintosh listings  
usually requirethethirdsetting(lfiscrlfoff, criscrlf on).  
The following table shows the criscrlf/lfiscrlf  
commands and the corresponding PCL Line  
Termination command parameters.  
LFISCRLF CRISCRLF PCL Code  
Comments  
Off  
On  
Off  
Off  
0
2
CR is CR, LF is LF, FF is FF  
CR is CR, LF is CR-LF, FF is  
CR-FF  
Off  
On  
On  
On  
1
3
CR is CR-LF, LF is LF, FF is  
FF  
CR is CR-LF, LF is CR-LF, FF  
is CR-FF  
%%IncludeFeature:lfiscrlf (value)  
Purpose:  
Controls the default line termination mode (the  
<ESC>&k#G command); specifies the line  
termination treatment of a linefeed.  
value:  
off (treats linefeed as a linefeed) or on (treats linefeed  
as carriage return-linefeed combination).  
The result of various settings for these parameters is  
shown in the table included in the Set Carriage Return  
(Line Termination) discussion, in terms of the  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
D - 2 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D  
equivalent code passed to the PCL line termination  
command. The second setting (lfiscrlf on, criscrlf off)  
is correct for most ASCII listings printed from UNIX  
machines. PC listings should usually be done with both  
items set to Off, and Macintosh listings usually require  
the third setting (lfiscrlf Off, criscrlf On). Note that the  
FF becomes a CR-FF when the LF is a CRLF.  
%%IncludeFeature:linesperinch (#)  
Purpose:  
Sets the default PCL line spacing. The  
%%IncludeFeature:linesperinch DOC affects PCL’s  
default VMI (vertical motion index).  
#:  
1-48. Default: 6.  
%%IncludeFeature:pointsize(default font size)  
Purpose:  
Specifies the point size for scalable default font. If the  
selected font is not scalable or if a bitmap font size is  
specified, this setting is ignored.  
default font:  
0.25 to 999.75 in 0.25 increments.  
D - 2 4  
A d d i t i o n a l T e c h n i c a l I n f o r m a t i o n  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
For more information about a term, check the index listings.  
Application A computer program designed to help people perform a certain  
type of work, for example, a word processing program, a page layout  
program, a programming language, or software that handles graphics and  
prints documents, spreadsheets, and/or forms.  
Consumables Supplies that are used up, like print media, toner, and  
developer.  
Crown A proprietary multitasking printer operating system, which allows  
QMS to adapt an advanced softwarecode base to the evolving printing needs  
of users in many different operating environments. As implemented in the  
QMS Crownfamily of products, this modular, portablearchitectureprovides  
advanced features as well as the capability to easily integrate new features  
as they become available. A QMS Crown printer can process and print jobs  
simultaneously instead of sequentially (multi-task) because of advanced  
memory management techniques such as simultaneous interfacing, input  
buffering, job spooling, emulation sensing processing, compile-ahead  
technology, and compressed data formats.  
Default The values or settings built-in to a system or program. The default  
settings in this printer can be changed. See also factory default.  
Emulation Theability of theprinter to respond tocommands thatareintended  
for a different type of printer. For example, when the printer is set for  
PostScript Level 2 emulation, it responds to the same commands that a  
PostScript Level 2 printer does.  
Engine The non-intelligent part of a printer where the paper is physically  
processed and printed.  
ESP Technology Emulation Sensing Processor Technology: technology  
that uses a form of artificial intelligence to analyze incoming file data from  
any of the printer’s interfaces. ESP technology, which works with most  
popular commercially available applications, selects the appropriate printer  
G l o s s a r y  
G - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
emulation from those installed on the printer and processes the print job,  
freeing the user from having to change printer switch settings or send  
software commands toaccommodate different printeremulations.ESPmode  
is an option for the printer’s LocalTalk, serial, and parallel interfaces.  
Factory Default The printer settings that are programmed into the printer at  
the factory. These settings can be changed through the printer control panel  
oroverridden withprintercommands sentthroughsoftware. Seealso default.  
Imageable Region The areas of a page sizea printercan access, determined  
by hardware limits (physical page size and margins required by the printer  
engine) and software constraints (amount of memory available for the  
full-page frame buffer). Also referred to as imageable area and printable  
region.  
Interface The place where a physical connection is made between  
components, such as a cable and printer, and communication or signals are  
passed back and forth.  
Laser Paper Paper designed for laser printing. Laser paper allows the richest  
color and black and white output and the most consistent coverage  
(especially for large areas of one color). It is best for prepress proofs. For  
laser paper printing, we recommend Hammermill Laser Print. Laser paper  
has a printable side and a non-printable side; usually, the printable side is  
indicated by an arrow on the side of the wrapping covering the media, and  
that side is slightly smoother. See also plain paper.  
Manual Feed Feeding single sheets of print media to the printer by hand (as  
opposed to letting the printer automatically pull sheets from a cassette).  
Media See print media.  
Mode One of several alternative conditions or methods of operation.  
Network Administrator See system administrator.  
Option In this manual, either a choice available in the printer’s Configuration  
submenu, or an extra accessory you can purchase for your printer.  
G - 2  
G l o s s a r y  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PDL Page Description Language: a programming language, such as PostScript  
or HP-GL, that translates messages from a computer to a printer. See also  
PostScript.  
Planes Toner, developer and OPC belt measurements (rather than copies) for  
usage. A plane is a pass of the OPC belt for one color, so a one-color page  
makes onepass (oneplane), a two-color pagemakes two passes(twoplanes),  
and so forth.  
Plain Paper Uncoated, general-purpose paper designed for photocopy  
printing, found in most offices. It is less expensive than laser paper, but does  
not offer the same output quality that laser paper does. This printer has plain  
paper capability: it produces good output on documents such as reports and  
newsletters. See also laser paper.  
PostScript A page description language trademarked by Adobe Systems Inc.  
PostScript Level 2 capabilities, among others, are implemented in the printer  
through a PostScript emulation developed by QMS. PostScript Level 2  
emulation is thenative languageof yourprinter’scontroller. It describes text,  
graphics, and page images to the printer.  
Print Media The material on which the printer prints (for example, paper,  
transparencies, and labels).  
Printer Driver A file that enables the application to talk to the printer,  
translating computer data into a form understood by the printer. Usually, the  
printer driver is in the application.  
Protocol A set of procedures that control how data is transmitted between  
devices.  
QCOLOR A QMS-developed technology for automatically optimizing color  
printing from Windows and Macintosh applications. QCOLOR configures  
the magicolor LX for the best output quality based on the contents of the  
document (for example, text, line art, presentation graphics, photographs, or  
scans).  
Resident Permanent printer features.  
G l o s s a r y  
G - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SIO Simultaneous Interface Operation: a Crown function that allows printing  
to all three of the printer’s concurrently active ports. See also Crown.  
Software Loadable System (SLS) Your printer offers a software  
loadable system, SLS, which allows you to add features and enhancements  
as they become available from QMS. This feature works through the parallel  
port via the control panel or PS Executive Series Utilities, and it makes it  
easier for you to keep up with the latest software changes.  
Start-Up Page A page generated automatically when you turn on theprinter,  
if it has not been disabled through the control panel, an application (such as  
PS Executive Series Utilities), a PostScriptoperator, or a DOCfunction. This  
page gives limited information on the printer, such as the printer’s name, the  
number of pages printed to date, current interface settings, and the amount  
of RAM available.  
Status Page A page or multiple pages listing detailed printer status, such as  
identification information and settings, current memory configuration,  
timeout values, communication and buffer settings, and available fonts. The  
printer has two status page options, standard and the advanced. The standard  
page is more detailed than a start-up page, but far less so than the advanced  
option. (See “The Status Pages” in chapter 5 for details.)  
System Administrator The person in charge of operating a network; also  
called a network administrator.  
Trailer Page A separator page that prints after the last page of a print job to  
identify a print job and help users sort out jobs. For details on this page and  
what it monitors, see “Header and Trailer Pages” in chapter 5. Also, the  
information on trailer pages for this printer can be customized with QMS  
Document Option Commands. (The QMS Crown Document Option  
Commands manual, which came with your printer, contains more  
information.)  
Utility Software, such as PS Executive Series Utilities, that performs a specific  
function of system management, such as maintaining disks and files or  
controlling a printer.  
G - 4  
G l o s s a r y  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
100K CHECKUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
1284 parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15  
600 dpi  
Printing Jobs in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
RAM requirements for . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Selecting through the control panel. . . 4-48  
Startup Options submenu. . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Adobe  
Illustrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7, C-4  
Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
Agfa FotoFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Aldus  
FreeHand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8  
PageMaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
PageMaker (Windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
PrePrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
Alignment  
A
A media  
See also Glossary  
A4  
See also Glossary  
See also Image alignment  
Image not centered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31  
Print engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20  
Angles  
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5  
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5  
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Accessories  
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
Dataproducts conversion. . . . . . . . . . . 8-33  
Dataproducts conversion kit . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Emulation cards. . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-47 - 8-48  
Font cards . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-47 - 8-48  
Network interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26  
Q-FAX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Security card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Sheet feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
SIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
Warranty considerations . . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
ADJUST xxxxx BIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Adjusters  
See also Halftones  
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
Anti-static wristband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
Apple ColorSync. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
AppleShare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
See also LocalTalk  
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Spool buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23  
Applications  
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8, 9-25  
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
ASCII files, won’t print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21  
AUTOEXEC.BAT . . . . . . . 3-17, 3-20, 9-27  
Automatic color control  
See QCOLOR  
Automatic error recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
Avant Garde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
See Paper guides  
Administration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20  
Communications submenu . . . . . . . . . 4-21  
Disk Operations submenu . . . . . . . . . . 4-52  
Emulations submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
Engine submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46  
Memory submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42, D-4  
Miscellaneous submenu . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50  
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
Saving changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Special Pages submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
B
BACK PANEL OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Banding  
Reducing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29, 7-9  
Banner page  
Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38  
I n d e x  
I - 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Baud rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 4-23  
Bulletin board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
BELT CARTRIDGE MISINSTALLED . 9-1  
Bi-directional parallel interface . . . . . . . B-15  
Bitmapped PCL fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20  
Black and white printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
Blank pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
Bookman. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Buffers  
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 - 8-14  
Cassette  
Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
Lower. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-1  
Media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Cautions  
External hard disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
In manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
CCITT  
Enlarging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
See also Memory  
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44  
Printing problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44  
Technical reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Center image  
See Alignment  
See Image alignment  
Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
Bulletin board, QMS. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13, A-1  
Application notes . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13, A-2  
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Technical information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Business CRD . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29, 7-10 - 7-11  
Centronics parallel  
cable pinouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13  
Chain Inputbin menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Change Printer Name  
Error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Changes, default  
C
Permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50  
Preventing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50  
Changing media sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Charger unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27  
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27  
Grid plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30  
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29  
CHECK WASTE TONER . . . . . . . 6-14, 9-1  
CIE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Cleaning  
Charger unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27  
Cleaning solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41  
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41  
Manual-feed belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38  
Paper exit plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37, 6-41  
Paper exit rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37  
Paper-feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38  
Pre-charger unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Register roller unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34  
Cleaning pad  
Cable pinouts  
Centronics parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13  
IBM PC/AT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12  
IBM PC/XT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12  
LocalTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11  
Macintosh to serial port. . . . . . . . . . . . B-11  
Parallel, Dataproducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16  
Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12  
Cables  
Macintosh interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
PC interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
RJ11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Calibration, color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Calibration, engine  
See Alignment  
See Registration  
CALL FOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Canada, radio noise emissions . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Cancel key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 5-17  
Cancelling a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 5-17  
CANCELLING JOB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Cards  
Emulation . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-11, 8-47 - 8-48  
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-11, 8-47 - 8-48  
Installing . . . . . . . . 8-10 - 8-11, 8-13, 8-47  
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-48 - 8-49  
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24  
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
When to replace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Cleaning,Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Clear warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-48  
I - 2  
I n d e x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CLOSE MANUAL FEED TRAY . . . . . . 9-1  
CMS  
See Color management systems  
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, A-2  
Application notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
QMS announcements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Concurrent interfaces  
See SIO  
Configuration  
See Menu  
Collating  
Chunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13  
Disk space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54, 5-12  
Collation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18, 5-12  
Collation option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54, 5-12  
Color  
Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
Pantone chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
See also QCOLOR  
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32  
Separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Uneven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28  
Color management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Color management systems . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
Color model  
Configuration menu  
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
When to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Configuration, printer  
Using applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using DOC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using HP PCL 5C commands . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using HP-GL commands . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using PostScript commands . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using printer commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using PS Executive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Connection  
AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
LocalTalk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, 4-26  
LocalTalk interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
Consumables  
Contaminating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Developer cartridges . . . . . . 6-2 - 6-3, B-7  
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Measurement . . . . 6-4, 6-7, 6-10, B-7, G-3  
Non-QMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
Oil Bottle/Cleaning Pad. . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
OPC belt cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
Q-FAX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Toner cartridges. . . . . . . . . . 6-2 - 6-3, B-7  
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7, B-9 - B-10  
Context switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, D-7  
Contrast  
Full color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Monochrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Color Model menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Color rendering dictionaries . . 1-7, 4-29, 7-10  
Business. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Colorimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Photographic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
See also Photographic, Colorimetric, Business  
Color Separation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Colorimetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
Colorimetric CRD. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29, 7-10  
Communication  
Between the printer and a Macintosh. . 3-3  
Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Testing, Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
Testing, PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Communications menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21  
AppleTalk option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Emul Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
ESP Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
Job Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
Network Interface option . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
PS Wait Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21  
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
Timeouts option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21  
Compile-ahead processing . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Compressed data format . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
Print density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Cancel key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Emulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23  
I n d e x  
I - 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Keypad language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51  
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Media key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
Menu key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Message window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 9-1  
Next key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
Online/Offline key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Previous key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Select key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Status messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 9-1  
Tray select key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
When to use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Controller board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, B-2  
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18  
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20  
Controller, type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Copies menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Courier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33, 7-18, B-2  
CRDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29  
Crown . . . . . . 1-9, 3-23, 4-2, 4-31, 4-52, G-1  
Compile-ahead processing . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Compressed data format . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Configurable memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Context switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Multitasking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
SIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Spooling overflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Technical reference. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, B-8  
Curl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Q-FAX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Defaults  
Halftone option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47  
Preventing changes to . . . . . . . . . 4-8, 4-50  
Restore factory. . . . . . 4-2, 4-50, 9-26, D-3  
DEV LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7, 9-1  
Developer  
Contaminating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Measurement . . . . 6-4, 6-7, 6-10, B-7, G-3  
Planes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
Spills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Developer cartridge  
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 6-9  
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Securing latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8  
When moving printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19  
DEVELOPER UNIT MISINSTALLED. . 9-2  
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
DIN-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14  
Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43  
Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
Identifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45  
Internal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52, B-3  
Loading emulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43  
Loading fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43  
Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54  
SCSI interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2 - B-3  
SCSI port . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 3-11, 8-43  
Disk cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8  
Disk Cache option  
D
See K Mem Disk Cache option  
Data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
Data LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21, 9-24  
Dataproducts  
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33  
Conversion kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33, B-8  
Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35  
Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36  
Shunts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35  
DB25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Declaration, Manufacturer/Importer. . . . . C-2  
DECnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28  
Disk location option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54  
Disk Operations menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52  
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Collation option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54  
Format Disk option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
Install Option option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
Installing upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51  
Location option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54  
Remove Option option. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
Size (Meg) option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54  
Spool Overflow option . . . . . . . 4-53, D-10  
Disk space  
I - 4  
I n d e x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Collating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Display list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8  
Dithering  
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 - 8-11  
Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-48 - 8-49  
Emulation Sensing Processor  
Printer default style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29  
Do Error Handler option. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40  
Do Start Page option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40  
Do Sys Start option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40  
DOC  
See ESP mode  
Emulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, 8-10, B-2  
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
Context switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Emulations menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
See also ESP, Hexdump, HP-GL, HP PCL 5C,  
LN03+, PostScript  
HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43  
Memory, temporary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44  
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
PostScript. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
Specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23  
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
Emulations menu  
ESP Default Emul option . . . . . . . . . . 4-36  
ESP option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25  
Hexdump option . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25  
HP PCL 5C option. . . . . . 4-22, 4-25, 4-33  
HP-GL option . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25, 4-31  
Lineprinter option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30  
LN03+ option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25  
PostScript option . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25, 4-28  
End job mode  
See Document Option Commands  
Document Option Commands . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
DOCs supported by printer . . . . . . . . . 4-56  
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, B-8  
Documentation  
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 - 1-5, B-8  
DOC functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, B-8  
Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
HP PCL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, B-8  
HP PCL 5C technical notes. . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Network notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, B-8  
Printer options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
PS Executive Series Utilities. . . . . . . . 1-11  
Q-FAX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Technical reference. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, B-8  
DOS commands, mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Drivers  
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12  
Windows, installing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Drivers folder  
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Energy Saver mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 4-49  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46  
Duty cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Noise level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Power switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Print method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, B-1  
Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Warm-up time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Engine menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46  
Clear Warning option . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 4-48  
Default Paper option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47  
Energy Saver option . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 4-49  
Image Alignment option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47  
Inputbin 1 Name option. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47  
Inputbin 2 Name option. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47  
Jam recovery option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49  
Manfeed Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49  
Outputbin Name option . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48  
PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
PDX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
PPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8  
Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
E
EfiColor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Electrical requirements  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, B-3  
Electronics emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
Emissions  
Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Laser radiation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6  
Temporary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7  
Emulation card . . . . . 8-10, 8-12, 8-48 - 8-49  
I n d e x  
I - 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resolution option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48  
Enhanced mode (HP-GL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Envelope jams, preventing . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19  
Envelopes  
Removing an emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48  
SCSI port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43  
F
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Envelopes, printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Clearance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Degree of slant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, B-4  
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Error Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40  
Error Messages  
Change printer name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
Error page, trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Error recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
ESP  
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8, 4-22, 4-25  
ESP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9, 3-23  
Default option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36  
Timeout option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21  
Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28, B-8  
EtherTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28, B-8  
ETX/ACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Executive  
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5  
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Expand mode (HP-GL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Exterior cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41  
External hard disk . . . . . 1-13, 8-43, B-3, B-8  
Controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43  
Formatting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45  
Identifying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45  
Installing a font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47  
Installing an emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47  
Loading emulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43  
Loading fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43  
RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
Removing a font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48  
Factory defaults  
Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50, 9-26, D-3  
FCC compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Features, printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7  
File storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
Flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 4-23 - 4-24  
Font Cache  
PostScript. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6  
Font card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 - 8-11  
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 - 8-11  
Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12, 8-48 - 8-49  
Fonts  
Bitmapped PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20  
Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
Downloadable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Downloading . . . . . 1-11, 1-13, 9-24 - 9-25  
HP PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
HP PCL printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Lineprinter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30, B-2  
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25  
PostScript. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
PostScript, memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Printer resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25  
Resident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, B-2  
Sample files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4, 3-13  
Scalable PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20  
Format Disk option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
FORMAT FAILED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46  
Formatting  
External hard disk . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 - 8-45  
Internal hard disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50  
Frame Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3, 7-6 - 7-7  
See also Halftones  
FUSER OIL EMPTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
FUSER OIL LOW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12, 9-2  
Fuser unit  
Life. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44  
Pressure-release pieces . . . . . . . 2-20, 6-22  
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
I - 6  
I n d e x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Horizontal lines  
G
Sharp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33  
Host Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
Host input buffer  
Gamma correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30  
Gamut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11  
See K Mem for Spool  
Hot ports  
H
Halftones  
See SIO  
HP PCL  
Technical reference . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-33  
Typefaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20  
HP PCL 5  
Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
Choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Screen lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
Halftones, printer default  
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9  
Handling printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Hard disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3, D-9  
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-43, B-8  
Formatting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44 - 8-45  
Identifying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45  
Installing a font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47  
Installing an emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47  
See Internal  
Loading emulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43  
Loading fonts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43  
RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
Read error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
Reformatted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52  
Removing a font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48  
Removing an emulation . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48  
SCSI port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43  
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Write error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
Hard disk kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39  
Hdwe Flow Ctl  
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
Header inputbin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38  
Header page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38  
Header Page option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38  
Heavy stock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Media menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
See Thick stock  
Technical Reference . . . . . . 1-5, 4-33, B-8  
HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, B-2  
Default font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
Default Font Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
Download Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35  
Line Termination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
Lines per inch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
Monochrome GL/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
Point Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
Retain Temporary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
Scalable Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34  
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25  
Symbol set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
HP PCL 5C technical notes. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
HP-GL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23, B-2  
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Enhanced mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Expand mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31  
Origin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Paper type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Pens 1-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Reverse image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Scaling percent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Scaling plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Technical reference . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-2  
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
I
IBM PC  
Helvetica. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Helvetica Condensed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Helvetica Narrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Hexdump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25, B-2  
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25  
AT cable pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12  
XT cable pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12  
IDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
IDLE INPUT PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Ignore parity, serial interface . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
I n d e x  
I - 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Image  
Partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33  
Too small. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33  
Image, not centered  
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
ITC Bookman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
ITC Zapf Chancery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
ITC Zapf Dingbats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
See Alignment  
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5, G-2  
Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11, 9-31, 9-33  
Not centered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31  
Physical limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Software limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Incomplete jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
INITIALIZING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
INNER JAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2, 9-9  
Inputbin  
J
Jam recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49  
Enabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
Jams  
See Paper jams  
Job timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Inputbin 1, naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47  
Inputbin 2, naming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47  
Inputbin menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Install Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
Installation menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15  
Admin Password submenu . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
Operator Passwrd submenu. . . . . . . . . 4-15  
Use Admin Pwd submenu. . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
Use Operator Pwd submenu . . . . . . . . 4-16  
Installing  
Cleaning pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24  
Developer cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . 2-15, 6-9  
Emulation card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
Font card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
Oil bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24  
OPC belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32  
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46  
Security card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Sheet feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
System software . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 8-51, G-4  
Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 8-51  
Waste toner pack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30  
Intel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2  
Interfaces  
K
K Mem Disk Cache option . . . . . . . 4-44, D-8  
K Mem Display option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8  
K Mem Emul Tmp option . . . . . . . . 4-44, D-7  
K Mem Emulation option . . . . . . . . 4-43, D-6  
K Mem for PSHeap option . . . . . . . 4-43, D-5  
K Mem for Spool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
K Mem for Spool option . . . . . . . . . 4-43, D-5  
K Mem Framebuff option . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
K Mem PS Fonts option . . . . . . . . . 4-43, D-6  
Kanji Option Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Keys  
See Control panel  
Kodak ColorSense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
L
Label  
Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Labels  
Error recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
Imageable region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Landscape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Languages  
Choosing emulation for. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23  
Network. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 3-1, 4-28, B-2  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
SCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, B-2 - B-3  
Internal hard disk . . . . . 1-13, 9-19, B-3, B-8  
Identifying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45  
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19  
Reformat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50, 8-52  
See Emulations  
Laser paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 5-11  
See Paper  
I - 8  
I n d e x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Laser Prep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5, 9-25  
Laser printing  
Laser Prep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
LaserWriter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
PrintMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
PS Executive Series Utilities. . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Screen fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 3-4  
System 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
System 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Terminating resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Testing communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
Macintosh checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
Main power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44, B-2  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25  
Preventative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Manual  
Typographical conventions . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
Manual feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49  
Manual Feed LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Manual Feed Size menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Manual-feed belts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . 6-38  
Manuals  
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Laser radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
Laser safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3  
LaserWriter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5, 9-25  
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Legal  
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5  
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Letter  
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, B-5  
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Letterhead  
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Line Termination, HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . 4-34  
Lineprinter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30, B-2  
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30  
Typefaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20  
Lines per inch, HP PCL 5C. . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
LN03 Plus  
Overview, user’s guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Manufacturer/Importer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Image placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, G-2  
See also Imageable region  
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25  
Loading  
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
LocalTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, B-2  
See also AppleTalk  
MB Printer Mem option . . . . . . . . . 4-45, D-9  
Mechanical problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24  
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10  
Changing size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Choosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Collating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Filling cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38  
Heavy stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17, 5-11  
Imageable regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Laser Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41, 5-2, 5-5  
Loading cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Lower cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-1  
Manual feed size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Output tray levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17  
Recommended brands . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Cable pinouts for port . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11  
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Testing communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
Location for printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Maximum slant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Weight capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Location, disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54  
Lockup, printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
Low-power mode  
See Energy Saver mode  
M
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Cable pinouts for serial port . . . . . . . . B-11  
Change Printer Name message . . . . . . . 3-4  
Communication with printer . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
I n d e x  
I - 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17, 5-11  
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 5-10, B-5  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Thick stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17, 5-8, 5-11  
See also Transparencies  
Transparency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17  
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Versatility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Media cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38  
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
See also Trays  
Media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
Cassette capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
Inner jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
Misfeed jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Outer jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14  
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
Preventing . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11, 9-18 - 9-19  
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Transparencies. . . . . . . . . 5-11, 9-18 - 9-19  
Media menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
Memory  
Allocating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42  
Configurable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Downloading fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25  
Host input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43  
Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3  
PostScript fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43  
PostScript heap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43  
See also RAM,SIMMs  
K Mem PS Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6  
MB Printer Mem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9  
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20  
Alphanumeric values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15  
Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
Optional features in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54  
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14  
Saving changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Selecting options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
String values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10  
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20, 4-8  
Menu key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Message LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Message window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 9-1  
Micrografx Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
Min K Spool  
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Miscellaneous menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50  
Permanent Changes option . . . . . . . . . 4-50  
Restore Defaults option . . . . . . . . 4-50, D-3  
MISFEED JAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 9-6  
Missing Dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31  
Mode  
AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
LocalTalk interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
See also Printing modes or mode name  
Spool buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43  
Standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22, B-3  
Upgrade kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
Virtual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43, D-5, D-9  
Memory clients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 - D-4  
Memory management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3  
Memory menu  
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
mode command (DOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Moiré . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Monochrome printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
Moving the printer. . . . . 2-23, 6-18, 6-22, 8-1  
Multitasking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Allocating memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42  
K Mem Disk Cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8  
K Mem Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-8  
K Mem Emul Tmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7  
K Mem Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6  
K Mem for PSHeap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
K Mem for Spool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
K Mem Framebuff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
N
Names  
Inputbin 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47  
Inputbin 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47  
Outputbin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48  
Naming the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
National Service  
I - 1 0  
I n d e x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
Netware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Network administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2  
Network Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26  
Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26  
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32  
Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32  
Network Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, B-8  
Networks. . . . . . . . . 1-4, 1-11, 3-1, 4-28, B-8  
Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1, 4-28  
Optional interfaces . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 4-28  
New Century Schoolbook. . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Next key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
Noise level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Notes  
Manual Feed Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15  
Operator Passwrd menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15  
Optional (Lower) LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Optional accessories  
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
Dataproducts conversions . . . . . . . . . . 8-33  
Emulation cards . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-47 - 8-48  
Font cards . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-47 - 8-48  
Network interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26  
Security card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Sheet feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
SIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
Optional cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
Optional features, configuration . . . . . . . 4-54  
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 8-1 - 8-28, B-8  
Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13  
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54, 5-12  
Dataproducts conversion kit . . . . . . . . B-8  
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Emulation cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
Ethernet interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Font cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
Hard disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13  
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46, 4-53  
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
Network interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 4-28  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Removing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
Security card . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 8-13, B-8  
SIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
Spool overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Token-Ring interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Updated list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Warranty considerations . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
Orientation  
In manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
Novell NetWare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28  
O
Oil bottle  
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24  
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
When to replace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Oil Bottle/Cleaning Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
One-color printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
Online LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Online/Offline key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
OPC belt  
Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3  
OPC belt cartridge  
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-11  
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32  
Light exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-10  
Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Pressure release pin. . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 6-11  
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-10  
Temperature and humidity . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Tension release pin . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 6-11  
When moving printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19  
Operator Control menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
Chain Inputbin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Collation submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Color Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Color Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19  
Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Inputbin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Orientation menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18  
Origin (HP-GL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
OUT OF OIL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
OUTER JAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 9-14  
Output tray  
Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6  
Media levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Output, collating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12  
Outputbin, naming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48  
I n d e x  
I - 1 1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PS protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Spool timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
Test file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Testing communication . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Password  
Administration menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16  
Operator Control menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15  
PC  
Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 - 3-13  
PS Executive Series Utilities. . . . . . . . 3-12  
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Testing communication . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Testing parallel port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Testing serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
PC checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
PDF  
P
Packing materials, in printer . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Page Description Languages  
See Emulations  
Pantone POCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
Pantone Professional Color Toolkit . . . . 7-16  
PANTONE® * Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8  
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Filling cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38  
Imageable region. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 5-11  
Laser Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41, 5-2, 5-5  
Lower cassette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-1  
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Media menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17  
See Paper jams  
Plain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 5-11  
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17, 5-11  
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, B-5  
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6  
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 5-11  
Paper cassette  
Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6  
Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38  
Paper exit plates, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37  
Paper exit rollers, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37  
Paper feed cassette  
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8  
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
PDLs  
See Emulations  
PDX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8  
Pens 1-8 (HP-GL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Permanent Changes option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50  
Phone numbers  
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8  
Photographic CRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Plain paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 5-11  
See Paper  
See Paper cassette  
Paper jams  
Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3  
Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
OPC belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10  
Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Ports  
Error recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
Jam recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
Message stays on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
Paper LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Paper type (HP-GL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Paper-feed roller, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38  
Parallel cable pinouts  
See Interface  
PostScript  
Compatibility of printer. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Level 2 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12  
Level 2 page description language . . . 1-12  
PostScript VM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
PS Heap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, 4-25  
Technical reference . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-2  
PostScript emulation  
Dataproducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-16  
Centronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13  
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . 3-11, 4-25, B-2  
Data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Default interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Emulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
End job mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Min K Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25  
Interpreter, memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43  
I - 1 2  
I n d e x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Level 1. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, 4-29, 4-58, B-2  
Level 2. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12, 4-29, 4-58, B-2  
PostScript emulation mode. . . . . . . . . . . 3-23  
PostScript emulation option . . . . . . . . . . 4-28  
PostScript errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40  
PostScript font cache . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6  
PostScript operators  
scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
showpage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17, 3-19  
translate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Power  
Effect of resolution on. . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Gamma correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30  
Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28, 9-30  
Media storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32  
Scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31  
Sharp horizontal lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33  
Smudges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32  
Specific problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28  
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
White lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30  
Print status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
Print Status option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
Printable region  
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Power cable  
See Power Cord  
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43  
Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43  
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Power switches  
See Imageable region  
See Margins  
Printer  
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41  
Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Daily operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 5-1  
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Electrical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . B-4  
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26  
Level location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Locks up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
Moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23, 6-18, 6-22  
Reinitialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25  
Resets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25  
Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 8-1, B-2  
Printer body, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41  
Printer configuration  
Using applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using DOC commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using HP PCL 5C commands . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using HP-GL commands . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using PostScript commands . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using printer commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Using PS Executive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Printer driver  
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44, B-2  
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44, B-2  
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
PPD File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8  
Pre-charger unit, cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31  
Pre-printed media  
Printing on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Pressure release pin. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 6-11  
Pressure-release pieces  
Moving the printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22  
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20, 6-22  
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22  
Previous key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Print density  
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
Transparencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33  
Print engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Duty cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Noise level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Print method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, B-1  
Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Warm-up time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Print quality  
100K checkup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Blurry images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31  
Dark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28, 9-30  
Dark vertical lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32  
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28  
See also Driver  
PostScript emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Printer drivers  
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
I n d e x  
I - 1 3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See Windows, installing  
Printer emulations  
Specifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23  
Printer options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Printer setup  
Q
Q-FAX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 3-13, A-1  
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Application notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Printer specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
QCOLOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7, 7-1  
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Windows setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
QMS  
Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Customer Technical Assurance . . . . . . A-2  
FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
Printer drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Product registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Technical information . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
World-wide offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4  
QMS Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
QMS customer support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
QuarkXPress  
Using menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Printing  
Blank pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
Duty cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
In 600 dpi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14  
Incomplete jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Print quality problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28  
Problem quick check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
Process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Service call messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Single sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Status messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Printing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23  
PRINTING STATUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
PRINTING TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
PrintMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Problems  
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 - 3-8  
QuarkXPress 3.3  
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16  
Quick check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
Quoted character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11  
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
See Troubleshooting  
Product modification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
PS Executive Series Utilities . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Printer configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51  
PS Executive Utilities. . . . . . . 1-11, 3-4, 3-12  
Color chart file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
PS protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10, D-12  
Advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13  
Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12  
Binary fixed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13  
For network interface cards. . . . . . . . . 4-28  
Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13  
Normal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12  
Normal fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12  
Parallel interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26  
Quoted character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11  
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24, D-12  
PS wait timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21  
PUT PAPER IN INPUT BIN . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
R
Radio emissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Radio frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
Radio noise, Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1  
RAM  
Allocating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42  
Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-22  
See also Memory  
Requirements for 600 dpi . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
See also SIMMs  
Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Random Access Memory  
See RAM  
Rasterizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Rcv Sw Flow  
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
READ ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
I - 1 4  
I n d e x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Register roller, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34  
Registration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2  
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32  
Registration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37, 5-21  
Reinitialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25  
Remote power Switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-44, B-2  
Remove Option option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
REPLACE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10, 9-3  
REPLACE FUSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Replacement parts  
Screen printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
Screendumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11  
SCSI  
See Disk  
Security card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 8-13  
Select key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22, B-2  
Cable pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12  
Data bits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
End job mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Flow control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 - 4-24  
Hdwe Flow CTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
Ignore parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Min K Spool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
PS protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
Rcv Sw Flow Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Spool timeout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
Test file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19  
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19  
Xmit Sw Flow Ctl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
Service  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
Reprinting jammed pages . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
Requirements  
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Environmental. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4  
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3  
Resident typefaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-13, 4-48, B-1  
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 1-13, 4-48, B-1  
Restore Defaults option . . . . . . . . . 4-50, D-3  
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14  
Return Merchandise Authorization  
See RMA  
International. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4  
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
Service call  
Reverse image (HP-GL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
RMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
Robust XON/XOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Placing a . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34  
Setup, printer  
Using menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Sheet feeder  
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Shipment  
Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Missing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Shipping spacers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
showpage operator (PostScript) . . 3-17, 3-19  
SIDE PANEL OPEN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
SIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22  
S
SA media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Sample page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38, 5-21, 9-3  
Sample Page option. . . . . . . . . . 4-38, 5-21  
Saving changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12  
Scalable PCL fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20  
scale operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Scaling percent (HP-GL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Scaling plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32  
Scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31  
Screen angles  
Moiré. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Screen fonts  
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 3-4  
Screen lines  
See also Frequency  
I n d e x  
I - 1 5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mechanical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
See also Memory  
Part number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
See also RAM  
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
Simultaneous Interface Operation (SIO)  
See SIO  
Startup options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Startup Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Do Error Handler option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40  
Do Start Page option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40  
Do Sys Start option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40  
Static electricity  
See Electrostatic discharge  
Status  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45, 5-19  
Status messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
100K checkup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Adjust xxxxx bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Back panel open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Belt cartridge misinstalled. . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Cancelling job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Check waste toner . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14, 9-1  
Close manual feed tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Dev low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7, 9-1  
Developer unit misinstalled. . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Fuser oil empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Fuser oil low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12, 9-2  
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Idle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Idle input printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Initializing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Inner jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Message window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4, 9-1  
Misfeed jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Out of oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12  
Outer jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Printing status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Printing test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Put paper in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Replace belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10, 9-3  
Replace fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Side panel open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Toner empty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Top cover open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
Waiting on input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Warming up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
X active jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
X toner cartridge empty. . . . . . . . . 6-4, 9-3  
Status page  
Single In-line Memory Module  
See SIMMs  
SIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Size (Meg). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54  
Sizes  
Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39  
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, 5-10, B-5  
SLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 8-51, G-4  
Smears, transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33  
Smudges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32  
Software  
Macintosh application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Space requirements, printer . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Special Pages menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
Header Inputbin option . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38  
Header Page option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38  
Print Status option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
Registration Page option . . . . . . 4-37, 5-21  
Sample Page option. . . . . . . . . . 4-38, 5-21  
Status Page Type option . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Trailer Inputbin option . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Trailer Page option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Spills  
Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14, 6-20  
Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Spool buffer  
AppleTalk interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27  
Spool buffers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5  
Spool overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53  
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Spool Overflow option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10  
Spool timeout, serial interface . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Spooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10  
Standard (Upper) LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4  
Start-Up page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44  
Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24  
Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37  
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
Status Page Type option . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
I - 1 6  
I n d e x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stop bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20  
Serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
Storage  
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6  
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6  
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6  
Pressure-release pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22  
Transparencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6  
Supplies  
Timeouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21  
Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22  
Manual feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49  
PS Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21  
Times. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Token-Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28, B-8  
Toner  
Adjusting density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
Contaminating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Darken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16  
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Lighten. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16  
Measurement . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 6-7, B-7, G-3  
Planes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Redistribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
Spills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3  
Toner cartridge  
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7  
Extend life of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11  
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
When moving printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19  
TONER EMPTY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
TOP COVER MISINSTALLED . . . . . . . 9-3  
TOPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Trailer inputbin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Trailer page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
Trailer Page option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39  
translate operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Transparencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Density. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33  
Error recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
Imageable region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Lower cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13, 8-1  
Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Quality of. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33  
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17, 5-11  
Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10, B-5  
Smears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33  
Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11, B-6  
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11  
Transparency  
See Consumables  
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
CompuServe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
International . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4  
QMS bulletin board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Technical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2  
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3 - A-4  
Switches  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Main . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44  
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44  
Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
System administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4  
System failure, reload system software . 8-51  
System memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9  
System software, installing. . . 1-8, 8-51, G-4  
System Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9  
T
TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 4-28  
Technical Notes, HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . . . 1-5  
Technical Reference . . . . . . . . . 1-5, 4-2, B-8  
Crown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Document Option Commands. . . . . . . . 4-2  
HP PCL 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2, 4-33  
HP PCL 5C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33  
PostScript . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Temporary emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7  
Tension release pin . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34, 6-11  
Testing, PC  
Parallel port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17  
Serial port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19  
Text files, won’t print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21  
Thick stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8, 5-11  
Media menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17  
Tickmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47, 5-20  
Media menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-17  
Transparency LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Tray  
See also Cassette  
I n d e x  
I - 1 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See also Media cassette  
See Media, cassette  
Tray Select key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6  
Troubleshooting  
Side panel open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Smudges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32  
Start-up page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24  
Status message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
Status page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
Top cover open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Transparencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
Write error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
X ACTIVE JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Typefaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
Avant Garde. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Bookman . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11  
Courier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Helvetica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Helvetica Condensed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Helvetica Narrow. . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 - 7-19  
HP PCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20  
ITC Zapf Chancery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
ITC Zapf Dingbats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
New Century Schoolbook . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Resident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
100K checkup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Adjust xxxxx bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
AppleTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23  
Back panel open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Belt cartridge misinstalled. . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Blank pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
Blurry images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31  
Call for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Cancelling job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Check waste toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Close manual feed tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15  
Dark vertical lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32  
Data LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21, 9-24  
Developer unit low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Developer unit misinstalled. . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Double feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18  
ESP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21  
Fuser oil empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Hard disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
Image not centered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31  
Incomplete Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26  
Inner jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2, 9-9  
Installing print system software . . . . . 8-51  
Internal hard disk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19  
Jam recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49  
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
Macintosh applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25  
Mechanical problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24  
Media jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 - 9-19  
Misfeed jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 9-6  
Missing dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31  
Outer jam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3, 9-14  
Paper jam message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17  
PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
Print quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28  
Printer resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25  
Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22  
Quick check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20  
Read error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
Reinitialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25  
Replace belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Replace Fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Scratches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31  
Service calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34  
U
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Upgrades, installing. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8, 8-51  
US National Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
Utilities  
See PS Executive Series Utilities  
V
Vendors  
SIMMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
Ventura Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
Windows version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Vertical lines  
Dark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32  
Vfg 1046/1984 conformity . . . . . . . . . . . C-2  
Virtual memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5, D-9  
See K Mem for PS Heap  
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
I - 1 8  
I n d e x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When to replace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14  
Weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 8-1  
Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5  
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, B-2  
Windows driver  
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
WordPerfect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4  
WRITE ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44  
W
WAITING ON INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Warm-up time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2  
WARMING UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4  
Warnings  
In manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6  
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45  
Warranty  
Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9  
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9 - B-10  
Electrostatic discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
Non-QMS accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
Non-QMS consumables . . . . . . . . . . . B-10  
Repairs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3  
Waste toner pack  
X
X ACTIVE JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
x DEV LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
X TONER EMPTY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 9-3  
Xmit Sw Flow  
Serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24  
XON/XOFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Robust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23  
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30  
Replacing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4  
I n d e x  
I - 1 9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I - 2 0  
I n d e x  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Graco Baby Swing 1750853 User Manual
Grizzly Lathe G9972Z User Manual
Grundig CRT Television Vision 6 26 6840 T User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Food Warmer 67137 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Trimmer 90757 User Manual
Harman Kardon Home Theater System HS 350 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Computer Drive 5000I User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard TV Converter Box 8590 D series User Manual
Humminbird Fish Finder 1197C SI User Manual
Iiyama Computer Monitor PLT1500 User Manual